SIONE OFFICi LIBRARY OF THE University of California, Class Noncommissioned Officers' Manual By Captain James A. Moss 241/1 U. S. Infaiit7-y (Printed August, 1909) Being a manual consisting of a compilation in con- venient, handy form, of matters of a practical, worth- knowing nature — things of value and assistance to the inexperienced as well as to the experienced noncom- missioned officer. For Sale By THE U. S. INFANTRY ASSOCIATION, Wash- ington, D. C, ^W THE POST EXCHANGE, Fort Wm. McKinley, Philippine Islands. mBkL Press of The George Banta Publishing Company Menasha, Wisconsin Copyrighted igog, by James A. Moss INTRODUCTION By Major-General J. P. Bell Chief of Staff , U. S. Ar?ny '^brZ5' OF THE ^N/VERS/TY WAR DEPARTMENT OFFICE OF CHIEF OF STAFF WASHINGTON ^>^ OF uforn^k^ A^ V^rc'^. 204139 ^/^■^..^^^/C^ u? l^t^--^ C"^^ ^2:- I "f ^i^^x- y- Jt^,^^ <0^^.,i2.^2L^^ C4^ J^tM>C^oX^-CrhX^ • EXPLANATORY This manual consists of two parts — the book proper and the supplement pamphlet. The former contains matter not subject to change by War Department orders or Army Regu- lations, while the latter consists of matter subject to such change. The chapters in the supplement are numbered and en- titled, and the paragraphs are numbered, so as to correspond to the same subjects in the book proper. A new up-to-date supplement is published once a year. INDEX Letters refer to paragraphs and numbers to pages. "Sup." means Supplement. Abbreviations: In indorsements and correspondence book 79 Of titles 156C On muster and pay rolls Sup. Chap. XI, Par-. 23 Address, forms of 49 Addressing communications to office not to individual 155A Addressing N. C. Os., custom 378A "Adjutant General," not hyphenated. 156D Adjutants' office. See "Sergeant-Major." Advance Guard — General principles 238 Problems 244 Allowances, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 66 Ambulances, loading on cars 287 Animals : Care of 289 Loading on cars 286 Pack, capacity 412 Annotation 78B Appearance and deportment 46 Appointment of N. C. Os., (Sup. Chap. XXIII). Band N. C. Os Par. S2b Coast Arty N. C. Staff Par. 51 Company Par. 53 First Sergt Par. 55 b ; 61 Hosoital Corps 48 Indian Scouts Par. 65 Lance corporals Par. 48a Post N. C. Staff Par. 50 Q. M. Sergt., Co Par. 61 Regimental N. C. Staff Par. 52 Signal Corps Par. 49 Stable Sergt Par. 61 Arm-racks 20 footnote ; 42 A Arms — Care of rifle and bayonet 56 General suggestions on care of . . . . 58A Taking apart 57B ARMY REGULATIONS Pars, affecting Band N. C. Os Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52a Chiefs of Squads Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 54 Coast Arty. N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 51 Company N. C. Os . Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 53 Co. Q. M. Sergt Sup. Chap. V. Chap. XIV First sergeants. Sup. Chap. I. Par. 1 ; Sup. Chap. XXIII, Pars. 55, 55b and 61. General noncommissioned staff . . .....Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 47 Hospital Corps .. Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 48 Indian Scouts Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 65 Lance corporals. Sup. Chap. XXIII, Pars. 48a and 56 Mess Sergt Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 60 Noncommissioned officers Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 47 Ordnance Sergt Sup. Chap. X. Par. 38 Post N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 50 Post Q. M. Sergt Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 24 Regimental N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52 Sergeant-Major Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 16 Signal corps Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 49 Paragraphs modified Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 82 Paragraph most violated, 157A; Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 42 Army slang 384 "Army Toast to Bride" 383F Army Transport Service Regulations, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 98 Arrest Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 70 Articles of War — Reading of to command 407 Reading of to recruits 45 Synopsis of 395 Attention, calling and inviting 154C Baggage allowance Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 66 Bands 381 Baptizing under colors 383G Basket system 90 Battalion N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52 Bayonet, care of 57A BLANK FORMS Adjutant's office — Improvised 95 War Dept., Sup. Chap. VII. Par. 19 Company — Improvised 30 War Dept. Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 10 Extra and Special Duty 113 INDEX. Ordnance Sergt., Sup. Chap. X, Par. 37 Pass lists 109 Post Commsv Sergt Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 34 Q. M. office — Improvised 128 War Dept., Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 29 Blued and browned parts of arms.... 57C Briefing 76E; 158 A (3) Brooms and brushes, allowance Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 67 Buttons, care of 52 "By command" 154B "By order" 154B "Calling attention to" 154C Calls, words to 383 Camping 277; 283 Card-record system 75 (footnote) CARE OF— Animals 289 Arms 56 Ornaments 52C Bayonet 57A Buttons 52C Chevrons and .stripes ; 52B Clothing 52 Feet 304 Harness 289 Haversack 59 A Health 300 Khaki 53A Mess kit 59A Rifle 56 Property by Ordnance Sergt 153 Post Commsv. Sergt 138 Post O. M. Sergt 118 Russet leather 58B Shelter-tent 59A Shoes 53 Wagons 289 Cars, capacity 412 Case, file 93D.. Cavalry Drill Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 91 Certificate, form of - — Challenge table 184 Charges on muster and pay rolls against enlisted men Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 81 Check on communications 62D "Cheers, the three" 393 Chevrons and stripes, care of 52B Chief Musician, customs affecting. . .381 Chiefs of Squads 21 Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 54 Christening under color 383G Cleanliness, personal 48 Clerks, Adjutant's office 65 Clothing Account 34 (9) Care of 52 Record of sizes 35 (10) Coast Arty. N. C. Staff, appropriate duties of, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 46 Coast Arty. Drill Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 92 Coast Arty. N, C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 51 Colors — Definition 165 and 382 Kept at Colonel's quarters 382 Saluting ' 165 "Commanding officer desires" 154D Communications, addressed to office, not to individual 155A Communications, signing of: By adjutant 70 (4 and 5) In general 154A Company. See"First Sergeant." Company comdr., to be assisted by N. C. Os 18C Company fund book Part of company records 34 (5) Expenditures from Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 4 Company N. C. Os. Addressed by privates 18B Army Regulation Pars, affecting. . Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 53 Assisting Co. Comdr 18C Details, attention to 17A Discipline in barracks 18A Duties of — Chiefs of Squads 21 First Sergeant 22B Mess Sergeant 18F N. C. O. in charge of Qrs. ... 19A N. C. O. in charge of Squad- Rooms 20A O. M. Sergt 38A Vanous N. C. Os _ 18E N. C. Os. in uniform suppressing disorder 18D Preventing commission of offenses. 17B COMPANY Q. M. SERGT. Appointment and reduction Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 67 Arm-racks and chests 42A Army Regulations Sup. Chap. V. Par. 14 General duties 38A Grindstone 41 C Hand-cart 41D How can he make himself most useful 42B Labor-Saving devices, etc 40B Rubber stamps 41A Stencil 41B Things he should take special care — To do 38B Not to do 40A Tools, kit of 41 E War Dept. orders, Sup. Chap. V, Par. 15 Complaints to the captain SOB Confinement ..Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 70 Contours 355 Contract, form of 412 Conventional Signs 364 Cooking, individual 267 INDEX. Corrections, initialed 160 (9) Correspondence. See "Paper-Work." Correspondence, how kept, etc.. Sup. Chap. VII. Par. 17; Chap. XI, Par. 41 Correspondence, burdened with repi- titions, etc 155C Correspondence book ....34 (7); 75; 76B Countersign 182 Courtesy. . .See "Military Courtesy." Courts-martial Appearing as a witness 51A Removing glove 389 Wearing gloves and side-arms ....383C Courts-Martial Manual Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 85 Cross-reference 78A CUSTOMS OF THE SERVICE Addressing N. C. Os 378A Affecting — First Sergeants 28 Adjutant's office 64 Post Noncommissioned Stafif... 377 Post Q. M. Sergt 137 and 377 Attention, calling and inviting ....154C Army Slang 384 "Army Toast to Bride" 383F Bands _ 381 Baptizing under colors 383G "By order" 1 54B "Calling Attention to" 154C Calls, words to 383 Cheers, the three 393 Chief ISIusicians •. 381 Christening under colors 383G Colors, kept at Colonel's quarters etc. 382 Commanding officer "desires," 154D; 382C Courts-Martial — Removing glove 389 W^earing gloves and side-arms ..383C Dances 383B "Desires, the commanding officer" 154D; 382C "Dough Bov" 391 Flag, folding of 380 Flag, hoisting and lowering 393 Funerals Horse and boots of Deceased ...379 Sounding taps 387 Three volleys 386 Glove removal of, when sworn ...389 Horses, riding in post 383D "How" 391 Insignia — How worn 389 Significance 393 International salute 389 "Inviting attention to" 154C Knock, official 383A Medals, how worn 389 Messages, delivery of 382D Military weddings 383 E Muster 379 National salute 389 N. C. Os., how addressed 378A Official knock 383 A Origin of certain customs 386 Parades — ■ Origin 393 Sounding ofT 393 Presidential salute 39 Rank, significance of insignia ....393 Reviews and parades, origin of ....393 Salute International 389 Origin of 388 Presidential 390 To the Union 391 Saluting ladies 379 Slang 384 Sounding off at parade 393 Taps At funerals 387 Words to 384 "The three cheers" 391 Three volleys at funerals 386 Titles Zn Toast to bride 383F Trumpet calls, words to 383 Umbrellas 379 Vollevs at funerals 386 "Wag'on soldier" 391 Weddings 383E White gloves, wearing as witness before G. C. M 383C "Wishes, the commanding officer" 154D; 382C Witness before G. C. M. — Removing glove when sworn . . . .389 Wearing side-arms and gloves ..383C Words to calls 383 D Dances 383B Delinquency Book 35 (1) Delivery book 62C Deportment and appearance 46 Deposition, form of 414 Descriptive Lists 34 (9); 159A "Desires, the commanding officer," .. 154D Desks, arrangement of in Sergt. -Major's office 74 Details, looking after by company N. C. Os 17A Discipline, general principles 14 Discipline in barracks 1 8A Document file 34 (8) ; 76A "Dough Boy" 391 Dress of N. C. Os 1 1 C Drinking llA Drill Regulations ...(Sup. Chap. XXIII) Cavalrv Par. 9 1 Coast Artv Par. 92 Field Arty Par. 93 Hospital Corps Par. 94 Infantrv Par. 95 "Duplicate, in," etc 159B Duplicating device 93A DUTIES OF Chiefs of Squads 21 Coast Artv. N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 46 INDEX. Co. Q. M. Sergt 38A First Sergeant 22 Mess Sergeant, 16 F and Sup. Chap. XXIII. Par. 60. N. C. O.— In Charge of Qrs 19A In Charge of Squad-Rooms 20A Ordnance Sergt. 152 Post Commissary-sergeant 134 Post Q. M. Sergt 116 Sergeant-Major 62A Various Co. N. C. Os 18E Duty roster 34 (3) E Electric bells 93C Endorsements. See "Indorsements." Envelopes Addressed to office, note to indi- vidual 155 A With printed addresses 90 Equipment, marking of Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52a Errors usually made in — Paper- work in general 157B Muster and pay rolls Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 44 Estimates. See "Reports." Exchange Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 99 Extra Duty, N. C. Os Sup. Chap. XXIII, Pars. 54a and 71 Feet, care of 304 Field Arty. Drill Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 93 Field intrenchments 294 FIELD SERVICE Camping 277 Care of animals, wagons and har- ness 289 Cooking, individual 267 Improvised things ." 261 Individual cooking 267 Kitchens 280 Kitchen pits 281 Loading wagons 283 Loading on cars — Ambulances 287 Animals 286 Property 288 Wagons 287 Marches 275 Parking trains 289 Police of camp 283 Rifle trenches 294 Sinks ..279 Water '.282 Wood 282 Field Service Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 96 File case for reference books 93D Files, Falcon and others 94 First aid to sick and injured 305 FIRST SERGEANT Army Regulations : . Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 1 Blank forms Improvised 30 War Dept.. Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 10 Books and Records 33 Books of reference and instruction, Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 12 Clothing — Account . 34 (9) Record of sizes 35 (10) Company fund. Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 4 Company fund book 34 (5) "Customs of the Service" 28 Daily routine 24A Delinquency Book 35 (1) Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account 34 (9) Document file 34 (8) Duties, general 22B Duty roster 34 (3) Estimates and requisitions ....Sup. Chap. IV, Pars. 2 and 13 Favoritism 25 A "First Sereants' Call" 23A Forms. See "Blank forms." General — Duties 22B Status 22A How to make himself most useful to his captain 27A Impartiality 25 A Marriage of enlisted men 36A Memorandum Book 35 (2) Morning report 33A Muster and Pay Roll Data Book 35 (2) Orders, forms of 83 Order file 34 (4) Partiality 25A Prices of articles charged against men ..Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 81 Property Book 35 (4) Ration Book 35 (3) Record of sizes of clothing .... 35 (10) Reference books Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 12 Routine, daily 24A Reports, returns, estimates and re- quisitions, Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 13. Requisitions for Supplies Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 2 and 3 Shoemakers and Tailors 36 B Sick report 34 (2) Statement of charges Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 1 Supplies, requisition for Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 2 Tailors and shoemakers 36B Target records 34 (6) Things he should take special care — To do 24B Not to do 26 Venereal Diseases 36C War Dept. orders affecting First Sergeants Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 5 INDEX. Flag Folding of 3gQ Hoisting and lowering ..." 7qi Saluting ......; i64 Flank guards ' ' ' " '^^^ Forage, ration of ... 419 Forethought Ti/- Form of— ^^^ Contract Depositions Power of Will Forms. See ••• .• 412 and certificates 414 attorney 422 ■ ''Blank 'foVms.'"' '^^^ Chap. XXllY/paV. chkp!'i\ 49 68 Forms of speech Fuel, allowance Sup. Fund, company, Funds, ioss of . .' ' Funerals W.''°''*^ 'Vu^P- C^^P- XXIII, Par. 72 Hoi se and boots of deceased 379 Sounding taps ••30^ Three volleys 3^g Par. 4 ...123A ^nlf.?.^/"' sentinels except those at p^post of guard ,,, Privates, duties ". , Sf Respect for sentinels ..'.'. 17, R Sentinels in charge of prisoners ' V 191 Sergeant of the guard ... 9ni 191 Supernumeraries I^^ Star Spanglcu joanner ... ion Guard Manual " Chap. XXIIl",'par". '86 H Sup. Hand-cart Harness, care of 41D 289 Hasty intrenchments' .' .' 904 Haver-sack rar.- ^f ~ _. er-sack, care of Health, care of Horses, Hospital Corps Drill Regulations, "How- 59A 300 riding in post ^o,n ^"-ps Drill Regulatic Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 94 391 XXIII, PaV. '79 156C Os. 'Courts- 6C .389 Garrison Court-martial, "n •••••,••• Sup. Chap.' General" Abbreviation of word Lsed instead of "Sir" in beginning letters to heads of bureaus ... 1S6B and '"Tf^^''"^^^'"«; ''Major-Generals'' and Brigadier-Generals" 1;; tjeneral considerations. N C Ueneral courts-martial. See' Martial." Gloves — ■Removal when sworn nesT^. '^^^" appearing 'as a wit- Grindstone 383 C Growling and' whining' '. '. f i 9 Guard Duty ^"-^ Challenge table TSt, Color sentinels '.V. ion Compliments from sentinels .' is; Commander of the guard . . " ' ' 19; Corporal of the guard .... 206 Countersign f"° Duty of sentinels i-~.r> Explanation of general o;-d;;s.'.'.' ' 'ue General orders for sentinels ......' 175 \ Instruction of recruit .... ^qp Its importance ,7^^ Musicians of the guard '.'.'; ig-^''^ ^''^^^ - "isO: 1S7 Night ?n3h"^ Scouts Sup. Chap. XXIII. Par Individual cooking ,;- Indorsements ~ How entered in correspondence book 65 95 Spelling of word . . . ''In duplicate, triplicate, etc " Industry and perseverance Infantry Drill Regulations ..";.'; Chap. XXi'li, "p'ar INFORMATION AND SECURITY i-'atrolling Facts to be obtained by patrols regarding certain objects . 22? General principles " ' 9}'z Messages ^i^ 77 158A 159B IIF Message Method of leading patrols ' .' ." .' .' .' 'ne -Methods of reconnoiterino- r^^e,- reconnoitering posi- tions of the enemy ... -yyn Problems 5X7 Reconnaissance of posit i'on s'and '" localities 9,- Reports Xy Service of Securitv ~^ Advance guards 2I8 Flank guards 042 General principles ... 9^7 Outposts ;^^ Problems, advance guard" 'and "o"ut- Re^ Gua;ds '.'.'.-.v.'.'.'. "'' f,l Orderly for the commanding officer IqYa "T„c . V^ .^42 Orders for sentinels on post^ . 7,^ Jns7rn.';*°' General," not hyphenated 156D Orders for sentinels at host of Instruction, practical .'^. . . "^ j^f^ „ gua'd "^'^ °' , _ Insane soldiers to Government m;. ".,•;• , ^"^ Orders for Orders for prisoners Orders for - - 183 color sentinels igg sentinels in charge of ' ••••••, 191 sentinels on outpost dutv ■255A breast Insignia — AVorn on left Significance Inspection at taps . . Sup. Chap. overnment Hospital ^up. Chap. XXIII. Par. 73 .389 393 XXIII, Par. 55a INDEX. Interlineations ^«q International salute . .^ •'f/, "Inviting attention to 154C Janitor, Adjt's. office K 69 53 Khaki, care of • . , ^ Kit of tools (Ordnance) ^^^ Kitchens, field ^°Y Kitchen pits ^°\ . Knock, official 38>5A Labor-saving devices, etc. Company office . ^° Company Q. M. Sergt 40B Post Commissary-Sergeant i^/ Post O. M. Sergt. 1^4 Sergt. Major 89 Lance corporal, appointment of 48a Land grant woods ... • • Vt" * ^' ' ' ' ot Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 23 Letters, addressed to office, not to individuals lb5A Loading on cars — Ambulances ^°^ Animals ^§5 Property ^°« Wagons 287 Loading wagons ^^-^ Loss of funds -iVr Loyalty ^^^ M Mailing book V V * ' V^u ' ' ' vvttt? Manuals (Sup. Chap, -{^-^^^i^ Courts-Martial Par. 85 Guard duty Par. 86 Medical Dept Par. 87 Pay Dept Par. 88 Q. M. Dept Par. 89 Sub. Dept Par- 90 Map Distance .• -. • • • • • ••'•'' - - ■ ■ • See "Military Sketch- See "Military Map Map Making. ing." Map-Reading, Reading." Marches ^' ^ Marking equipment . . •^••■- ••■•'■ co^ Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52a Marriage of soldiers -jqq Medals, how worn -'o^ Megaphone \c (o\ Memorandum Book Wc\ \ on A Memorandum receipts 119 A ; 1^^^ Memorandum slips 90 Meridian • • • • • • '^Q^-p. Messages, delivery of bu i J ; •'^^^ Mess kit, care of -^9 A Mess Sergeant, duties, 16F; ........ • Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 60 "Military channels, through" 158A Military Courtesy Civilian salute \'^'c \n'7 "Colors" i J How to salute :j^^ Its importance [y Military salute .... • • • ^^^ Mistakes usually made in saluting. .16» Nature of salutes and origin 1 1 -r N C. Os. personification of • lii> Respect to be paid National air and Salutingin a group of soldiers 172 Saluting indoors V ' '/ J" " ' Saluting when in command ot de- tachments \'/^ Salutes, nature and origin |o^ Saluting the flag j^^ Salute, how rendered i Ac '177 . "Standards" ..••••• ^ ^ 5 ; 177 The Star Spangled Banner ...164, 190 Uncovering to the colors jos When and how to salute \^' Whom to salute ^^/Z Military deportment and appearance. 46 Military map-reading -J^y Contours il^ Conventional signs ^^Jl Map Distance ^^' Orientation . . Scales of Maps Slopes True Meridian :Z"^ Visibility "^^^ Military Sketching. General methods ^°^ Outpost sketching ^'J\ Position sketching "yJl Road sketching , .- -/'^ Minor tactics.. See "Information and Security." „ Mistakes. See "Errors. ,, Model forms. See "Forms of. Model remarks on muster and pay oils Sup. Chap. XI, Pai. 43 Morning report • • • • • Musician of the Guard ^^^ Guard duty ; • ',■ ' : 1- ' i '^+'0 Instructions as orderly m adjutant s ^^ office •. ->7Q Muster, customs regarding >" ^ ''"':''; ;'°"':S^.^h?p^XXm.- Pan-74 Muster and pay rolls Abbreviations Sup. Chap. Ai, Fat. 4J Model remarks Preparation, general remarks, . . 160 A; Sup. Chap. XI, Pai. ITsual errors ..Sup. Chap. Ai, rar. .361 ,349 .359 .363 33A 43 44 Typewriter, use of. • • • • • • • • • • • v Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 43 (foot note) Muster and Pay Roll Data Book... 35 (2) N National air, respect to be paid National salute • N. C. Os.. how addressed to.. 164 389 378A INDEX. In charge of Qrs.., duties 19A Noncommissioned Officer in Charge of Recruits Arms, taking apart 57 B Arms, general suggestions on care of 58A Articles of War 45 Bayonet, care of 57A Buttons, care of 52 Care of Clothing, arms, etc 52 Clothing, ornaments and buttons. care of 52 Complaints to the captain SOB Forms of speech 49 General considerations 43 Guard Duty 59B Haversack, care of 59A Message, how delivered SOD Mess kit, care of S9A Military deportment and appearance 46 Obedience 45 A ; 46 A Ornaments, care of 52 Russet leather, care of 58B Payment, how conducted SOC Personal cleanliness 48 Polishing of blued and browned parts S7C Rifle, care of 56 Shelter tent, care of 59A Shoes, care of 54 Witness before courtmartial 51 A Noncommissioned Officer In charge of Squad-Rooms 20A o Obedience 12B, 15 (10), 45 A, 46A Office, bow to enter SOA "Official copy" 159D Official knock 383 A Order in barracks 18A Orderlies in general 194 Orderly for commanding officer 193A Ordnance Sergeant Army Regulations Sup. Chap. X. Par. 38 Blank forms ...Sup. Chap. X, Par. 37 Books of reference Sup. Chap. X, Par. 36 Care of property 153 Duties 152 Pointers and suggestions 153 Reports, returns and requisitions... ._ Sup. Chap. X. Par. 40 Things he should take special care — To do 152 Not to do 152 War Dept. orders Sup. Chap. X, Par. 39 Order file, company 34 (4) Orders Adjutant's office 80 Company 33 General principles 79 Indices of 94 Sentinels 175 A; 254A See. "War Dept. Orders, etc." Orientation 361 Origin of certain customs 386 Ornaments, care of 52c Outposts — General principles 248 Orders for Sentinels , ."254 A Pack animals, capacity 412 Pallbearers.. Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 75 PAPER-WORK Abbreviations — In correspondence 79 On muster and pay rolls ^. , Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 43 Titles 156C Analyzmg papers 69A Addressing communications to office, not to individual 155A "Adjutant General," not hyphenated , 156D Adjutants Office, transaction of . . . Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 17 Annotation 78B Army Regulation paragraph most violated 157A .\rmy Regulations to be kept posted 69 "Attention to calling and inviting" 154C Basket system 90 Briefing communications 76E; 158 A (3) "By command" 154B "Bv order" 154B "Calling attention to" 154C Check on communications 62D "Commanding officer desires" 154D "Commissary General," not hyphen- ated . . . . 156D Communications, addressed to office, not to individual 1 SSA Corrections, initialed 160 (9) Correspondence book 75; 76B Correspondence, burdened with repe- titions, etc 155C Cross reference 78A Descriptive lists, preparation of ....159 A Desks, arrangement of 74 "Desires, the commanding officer". .154D Document file 76 A "Duplicate, in" 1S9B Duplicating device 93A Envelopes, addressed to office not to individuals 155A Errors usually made- in — Paper-work in general 1S7B Muster and pav rolls Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 44 Estimates, preparation of 157C Falcon and other files 94 "General" Abbreviation of word 156C Used in addressing "Major-Gen- erals," etc ..156C Used instead of "Sir" in beginning letters to heads of bureaus . . . .156B Indorsements — Entering 77 Indorsement, spelling of 158A Indices of orders 94 INDEX. "In duplicate, triplicate," etc 159B "Inspector General," not hyphen- ated 156D Interlineations 160 (9) "Inviting attention to" 1 54C Letters, addressed to office, not to individual 155 A Mailing book 72 (15) Memorandum slips 90 "Military channels, through," 154; 158A Mistakes usually made. See "Errors." Muster and pay rolls. See "Muster and pay rolls." Names, only official designations to be used 76D "Official copy" 159D Papers, check on 62D Pay rolls. See "Muster and pay rolls." Pigeon-hole box 94 "Quartermaster General," not hyphen- ated 156D Record of officers and men 73 Reports, returns, estimates and re- quisitions, preparation of 157C Repetition of titles, etc 155C Requisitions, preparation of I57C Stamps, postage 155B Statement of charges Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 1 Spelling of "Adjutant General," etc. 156D Signing of papers — By adjutants 70 (4 and 5) In general 1 54A Signature, copying 1 59C "THE Adjutant General of the Army," 156D "The commanding officer desires, wishes" 154D "Through military channels" 154; 158A "Tickler" 90 Titles, abbreviations of 156C Typewriter, use of in preparing mus- ter and pay rolls. Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 43 (foot note). "Triplicate, in" 159B "True copies" 159D Parades Meaning of word 88 (footnote) Origin 393 "Sounding off" 393 Parking trains 289 Parole 182 Pass Lists 109 Pay Dept. Manual Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 89 Pay rolls. See "Muster and Pay Rolls." Pay table 416 Payment, how conducted 50C Pensions 417 Personal reports Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 50b; 51b Perseverance and industry IIF Personal cleanliness 48 Pigeon-hole box 94 Polishing blued and browned parts of arms 57C Position sketching 374 Post Commissary-Sergeant Blank forms. Sup. Chap. IX. Par. 34 Books of reference, etc Sup. Chap. IX, Par. 33 Duties 134 How to make himself most useful.. 137 Labor-saving devices, etc 137 Loss of funds .143 A.. Miscellaneous "pointers" 140 Necessary knowledge 137 Property, care of 138 Reports, returns, estimates and re- quisitions Sup. Chap. IX, Par. 34 Rubber stamps 143B Savings, record of 137 Things he should take special care — To do 134 Not to do 135 War Dept. orders Sup. (Thap. IX, Pa-. 32 Post Exchange Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 99 Post N. C. Staff Appointment Sup. Chap. XXIII, Parf. 50 Customs affecting 377 Reduction, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 50a Post Ordnance Sergeant. See "Ord- nance Sergeant." POST Q. M. SERGT. Army Regulations ." Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 24 Blank forms 128 Blank forms Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 29 • Books of reference Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 25 Care, preservation and responsibility of property 118 Circulars Q. M. G. O Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 22 Customs of the Service 377 Duties 116 How can he make himself most use- ful 118 Labor-saving devices, etc 124 Land grant roads Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 23 Loss of funds 123A Memorandum receipts 1 19 A ; 120 A Miscellaneous "pomters" 122 Property, care of 118 Record books Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 26 Reports, returns, estimates and re- quisitions Sup. Chap. VIII. Pars. 30 and 31. Rubber stamps 124 Supplies.... Sup. Chap. VIII. Par. 31 Things he should take special care — To do 116 Not to do 117 War Dept. orders Sup. Chap. VIII. Par. 21 Power of attorney 412 Practical instruction 1 2D INDEX. Precedence Sup. ..Chap. XXIII, Par. 76 Presidential salute 39 Preventing commission of offenses ....17B Prices of articles usually charged against soldiers, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 81 Printing press 92 Privates Addressing N. C. Os 18B Treatment of, by M. C. Os. 12 A; 25A Problem.s Advance guard 244 Outpost 259 Patrols 227 Promptness HE PROPERTY Care of by Ordnance Sergt 153 Post Commsy. Sergt 138 Post Q. M. Sergt 118 Loading on cars 288 Property Book 35 (4) Punctuality 1 1 D Quarters, fuel and stoves Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 68 Q. M. Manual Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 89 Quartermaster Sergeant. See "Company Q. M. Sergt." and "Post Q. M. Sergt." Q. M. Sergt., Co., appointment and re- duction Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 61 R Railroad cars, capacity 412 Rank- Precedence of Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 76 Significance cf insignia 393 Rations, weight of 411 Ration Book 35 (3) Rear guard 242 Record of sizes of clothing 35 (10) Records.. See "Books and Records. Record of men and officers Ti Recruit. See "Noncommissioned Offi- cers in charge of Recruits." Reduction of N. C. Os. (Sup. Chap. XXIII) Band N. C. Os Par. 52b Battalion N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52 Coast Arty. N. C. Staff Par. 51 Company Par. 58 First Sergt Par. 55b Hospital Corps 48c Indian Scouts Par. 65 Post N. C. Staff 50a Q. M. Sergt. Co Par. 61 Signal Corps 49 Stable Sergt ;Par. 61 When effective Par. 63 Regt. Court-Martial Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 79 Regt. N. C. Staff Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 52 Regulations governing Organized Mili- litia. Pars, amended, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 83. Reports, personal Sup. Chap. XXIII, 50b Reports, returns, estimates and requi- sitions Company ....Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 13 Ordnance Sergt Sup. Chap. X, Par. 40 Post Commsy. Sergt Sup. Chap. IX, Par. 35 Post Q. M. Sergt ..Sup. Chap. VIII, Pars. 30 and 31 Preparation of 157C Sergeant-Major Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 20 Reproval of N. C. Os Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 59 Requisitions. See "Supplies." Reviews and parades, origin of 393 Rif^e: Care of 56 Description 321 Rifle trenches 294 Road sketching 375 Rosters Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 11 Rubber Stamps Adjutant's office 78C ; 89 Commissary 143B Company 29 ; 41A, 71 (6) ; 160A Not authorized for authenticating post and regimental orders 89 (foot- note) Post of Manila 71 (6) Q. M. office 124 Used in all offices 78C Used in preparation of :nuster and pay rolls 160 A Russet leather, care of 58B Salute International 389 Origin of 388 Presidential 390 To the Union 391 Salutes. See "Military Courtesy. Saluting in command of detachments.. Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 78 Saluting the colors 165 Saluting ladies 379 Savings, commissary, record of 137 Scales of maps 349 Seal 89 (foot note) Security and Information. See "In- formation and Security." Sentinel on outpost, instructions ....254A SERGEANT-MAJOR Abbreviations 79 Annotation 78B Army Regulations Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 16 Basket system 90 INDEX. Blank forms, W. D., Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 19 Blank forms — Improvised 95 War Dept., Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 19 Books of reference, etc Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 18 Card-record system .... 75 (footnote) Clerks 65 Communications, check on 62D Correspondence, how kept Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 17 Correspondence 69 Correspondence book 75 ; 76B Check on communications 62D Cross reference 78 A "Customs of the Service" 64 Delivery book 62C Desks, arrangement of, in ofifice. ... 74 Document file 76A Dress and bearing 61B Duplicating device 93A Duties 62A Electric bells 93C Envelopes with printed addresses.. 90 Forms. See "Blank forms." Files, Falcon and others 94 File, case 93D Indorsements T^ Indices of orders 94 Janitor 69 Knowledge, necessary 61C Labor-saving devices 89 Mailing book 72 Memorandum slips 90 Megaphone 66 Musician of the Guard 66 Necessary knowledge 61C Official business of office, transaction of Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 17 .. Orders 79 Paper work 69 "Parade," meaning of ..88 (footnote) Pigeon-hole box 94 Printing press 92 Relations with adjutant 61 A Reports, returns, estimates and re- quisitions ..Sup. Chap. VII. Par. 20 Routine of office 65 Record of men and officers TZ Telephone clerk 67 "Tickler" 90 Typewriter 93B War Dept. Orders Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 15 Shelter tent, care of 59A Shoes, care of 53 Shoemakers and Tailors 36B . . Sick Report 34 (2) Signature, copying 159C Signing papers 70 (4 and 5) ; 154 A Sinks 279 Sketching, See "Military Sketching." Slang 384 Sleeping car accommodations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 69 Slopes 359 Small Arms Firing Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 97 Sounding off at parade 393 Speech, forms of 49 Spelling of "Adjutant General, etc. ..156D Spelling of "Indorsement" 158A Stable-Sergt., appointment and reduc- tion Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 61 Stamps. See "Rubber Stamps." "Standards" 165 Statement of charges Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 1 Stationery allowance, post N. C. S. O. Chap. XXIII, Par. 50c Stencil 41B Stoves, allowance Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 68 Stripes, care of 52B Sub. Dept. Manual Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 90 Summary Court Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 79 Supplies, requisitions for — Company ..Sup. Chap. IV, Pars. 2, IZ Q. M Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 31 Taps At funerals Z%1 Words to 384 Tailors and shoemakers 36B Target practice, its importance 321 Target records 34 (6) Telephone Clerk 67 Tents, weights, dimensions and capa- cities 410 "THE Adjutant General of the Army" 156D "The commanding officer desires" ..154D "The Star Spangled Banner" ...164; 190 "The three cheers" 393 Three volleys at funerals 386 "Through Military channels" ..154; 158A "Tickler" 90 Titles Abbreviation of 156C Customs, regarding 377 Privates addressing N. C. Os 18B Use of title instead of "Sir" in letters 156 A and B Toast to bride 383F Tools, kit of (Ordnance).. 41E Transport Regulations Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 98 Treatment of privates 12A. . . . 25 A Trenches, rifle 294 Trial by Regt., Garrison and Summary Courts-Martial, Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 79. "Triplicate in," etc 159B "True copy" 159D True Merrdian 363 Trumpet calls, words to 383 Typewrite. Adjutants — Adjutants' office 93B INDEX. In preparing muster and pay rolls ..Sup. Chap. XI, Par. 43 (foot note) Purchase from Co. Fund Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 4 u Umbrellas 379 Uniform order Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 80 V Venereal Diseases 36C Volleys at funerals 386 w Wagons: Care of 289 Capacity 411 Loading of 283 Loading on cars 287 "Wagon soldiers" 391 War Dept. orders affecting Co. Q. M. Sergt Sup. Chap. V, Par. 5 First Sergeants Sup. Chap. IV, Par. 5 Ordnance Sergt Sup. Chap. X, Par. 39 Post O. M. Seigt Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 21 Post Commsy. Sergt Sup. Chap. VIII, Par. 32 Sergeant-Major Sup. Chap. VII, Par. 15 Warrants ...Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 62 Water Drinking 282 Water, allowance of 412 Weddings 383E Weights Articles usually taken into field... 408 Rations 411 Tents 410 Whining and Growling lOA Whistles ...Sup. Chap. XXIII, Par. 64 White gloves, G. C. M 383C Will, form of 413 "Wishes, the commanding officer" ..154D Witnesses before courts-martial Gloves and side-arms to be worn ..383C How to appear 5 1 A Removing glove when sworn 389 Wood 282 Words to calls 383 OF THE UNIVERSITY OF NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS' MANUAL CHAPTER I. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and cJianges, if any.) The Position of Noncommissioned Officer. In garrison and in the field, in camp and on the march, in peace and in war, the Noncom- missioned Officer occupies a most important position and phiys a most essential part in the success or failure of a command. Experience has shown that the efficiency, discipline and reputation of a command depend to a great extent on its Noncommissioned Officers. In fact, it is often said, "The Noncommissioned Officers are the backbone of an army." Soldiers are appointed Noncommissioned Officers because, in the opinion of their officers, they possess a high sense of dut}'-, force of character, efficiency, intelligence, sobriety and other soldierly, manly qualities. Indeed, the position of Noncommissioned Officer is one of honor and responsibility — it is a position that vests in its occupant certain authority not exercised by other enlisted men — it is a position that signals out its occupant from amongst the rest of his comrades, and the officer who recommends a soldier for appointment as Noncommis- sioned Officer and the superior who makes the appointment, both repose faith and confidence in the man's worth, loyalty and efficiency. Should not such a man, therefore, do all in his power^should he not endeavor with all his might, with all his soul, to show his comrades, his officers and the rest of the world, that the confidence thus reposed in him is not misplaced? And this he should do by being dignified, fair, just, and honest in his associations with his comrades, setting at all times an example in dress, neatness, military bearing, manliness and obedience. When a private is made a corporal his status is changed from that of a follower to that of a leader of men, and he should do all he 10 CHAPTER I. can to become an efficient leader. The man who is thus chosen to command other men occupies, indeed, an enviable position. The Noncommissioned Officer who is soldierly, reserved, fair and efficient, has the satisfaction of knowing that he enjoys the con- fidence, and respect of those that he commands. On the other hand, if a Noncommissioned Officer lacks the qualities named, his comrades have neither respect for nor confidence in him. These are things that noncommissioned officers ought to think about. In time of war a Noncommissioned Officer is very often placed in a position where he is responsible for the health, comfort and lives of his men, and the ambition of every Noncommissioned Officer should, therefore, be to so qualify himself that he will be able to "make good" wnth his men and with his officers — that he will be able to instruct his men in all their duties and look after them properly in garrison, in camp, on the march and in battle. Remember, the position that a Noncommissioned Officer oc- cupies in the eyes of his comrades — the extent to which he commands their respect and inspires their confidence, depends entirely on the Noncommissioned Officer himself, who, in fact, makes his position whatever it may be. The Noncommissioned Officer, for instance, who always does his duty and who requires others to do the same, will always command respect, admiration and obedience, while the one who fails to appreciate the responsibility of his position — the one who gambles with privates and does other things not in keeping with the dignity of his office, not only fails to command respect, but he also fails to inspire confidence. The sense of satisfaction experienced by the Noncommissioned Officer who appreciates the responsibility of his position, who does his duty faithfully and loyally, and who, as a result, knows and feels that he has the respect and admiration of his fellow soldiers and the confidence and good will of his officers — such a sense of satisfaction is something that riches can not buy and it means everything to the man of true soldierly instincts. A Growling and Whining. Don't be a groivler — there is nothing so tiresome and boring as a chronic "kicker". One sometimes hears a soldier growling about the amount of work he has to do. Remember your time is not your own — it belongs to the government, who pays you for it. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS. 11 Whatever you do, do not speak ill of your regiment or of any of your officers in tlic presence of outsiders, civilians or military, and don't criticise officers or orders in the presence of privates. Akin to growling is whining. If admonished by your captain, don't go around telling everybody about it — the chances are they are not at all interested in the matter, and furthermore, such action is childish. If you have done anything to be admonished for, take your medicine like a man, and say nothing about it. A Drinking. Excessive drinking in the Army, like excessive drink- ing in civil life, almost invariably leads to trouble, and often ruin. If you feel like taking a drink, do so, but do not so far forget yourself as to drink to excess. Reckless drinking is neither manly, military nor gentlemanly, and is always a drain on the purse and body. A good rule, even for moderate drinkers, is never to touch a drop of liquor when on, or about to enter upon, any duty. B Military Courtesy. The Noncommissioned Officer should be the very personification of military courtesy — he is expected to set the example for the private and, therefore, he can not be too careful and punctilious about salutes and all other matters pertaining to military courtesy. See "Military Courtesy," page 161. C Your Dress. Always be sure to turn out in the regulation uni- form, with your clothing properly brushed, cleaned and pressed and every article of j^our equipment shipshape. Above all, avoid slouchiness. D Punctuality. Punctuality is one of the cardinal requisites of a good soldier. Cultivate the habit of being punctual — make it an in- variable rule always to be at the appointed place three or four minutes before the time ordered. Get info tJic habit of being punctual. E Promptness. Always act prompth', never putting off until to- morrow what can be done today. Procrastination has thwarted the advancement of many a bright, able man. Get into the habit of being prompt. F Industry and perseverance. In the profession of arms, as in all other walks of life, men ultimately take standing according to effi- ciency and merit. Efficiency requires, time, labor and perseverance. G Forethought. Forethought, a most valuable asset, is really an 12 CHAPTER I. acquired trait. Get into the habit of cultivating it — it is astonishing- how this really can be iinproved with practice. A Treatment of Privates. Noncommissioned Officers sometimes run to one of two extremes in the treatment of privates — they either, by undue familiarity or otherwise, cultivate popularity with them, or they do not treat them with sufficient consideration — the former course will forfeit their esteem; the latter insure their dislike, neither of which is conducive to commanding their respect. By maintaining a quiet, dignified reserve, Noncommissioned Officers can refrain from being familiar with privates without creat- ing the impression that they consider themselves superior to or better than, other enlisted men. Under no circumstances should you ever swear at a private — not only is this taking a mean, unfair advantage of your position, but it is also undignified, ungentlemanly and unmilitary. The treatment of privates should be uniform and just. Discipline should be enforced in a quiet, dignified way, without loud, boisterous talking, swearing or roughness. Dignity and firmness are not only much more effective, but they also command more obedience and inspire greater respect. The Noncommissioned Officer who is capricious, insulting and abus- ive demeans himself and disgraces his position. Remember, the average private does not mind how strict you may be just so you are fair and impartial. B Obedience renders no man servile nor does it in any way destroy his independence of thought. On the contrary, obedience, which is nothing more or less than respect for constituted authority, increases the worth and usefulness of a man and makes a better citizen of him. See "Obedience," page 15 (lo), and also 45A and 46A. C Loyalty. There is only one soldierly trait that is more import- ant than loyalty, and that is obedience. It goes without saying that the Noncommissioned Officer should be absolutely loyal to his officers. The officer is entitled to the loyalty of his Noncommissioned Officers, and the Noncommissioned Officer of true soldierly instincts never hesitates about according his superior full, enthusiastic support. D Practical Instruction. The only reason for the existence of our Army, is the possibility of war, and it should always be borne in mind that every thing we do — all our preparations, all our instruction and all our training — has for its final purpose nothing but war, and it should also be borne in mind that everything in war is practical. GENERAL CONSIDERATIONS 1 -> Be practical; by effort, thought, common sense and experience learn to tell the difference between the essential and the nonessential, and learn how to DO things. Learn to THINK for yourself. The best way to learn a thing is to do it yourself. Instead of confining one's self to memorizing lots of rules — instead of loading one's mind up with "Normal formations", etc., think up problems and then solve them — imagine yourself in a certain situation and then work yourself out of it, by applying general principles and common sense — and best of all, go out and actually DO the thing. While every noncommissioned officer should, of course, have a thorough knowledge of such parts of the Army Regulations, the Manual of Guard Duty and the Drill Regulations as affect noncom- missioned officers and privates, too much time should not be xievoted to these subjects, at the sacrifice of other matters of a more practical nature, such as the applied principles of information and security (Chapter XIV), field service (Chapter XV), the construction of rifle trenches (Chapter XVI,) military map reading (Chapter XIX), and military sketching (Chapter XX), etc. 14 CHAPTER II. CHAPTER H. DISCIPLINE (See corresponding cJiapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) Discipline may be defined as "The preservation of order, tlie prevention of all kinds of offenses and the faithful performance of every kind of duty without delay or interruption." — Kautz's Customs of the Service. Drill, routine, strict attention to details, proper rewards and the invariable admonition or punishment of all derelictions of duty, are the best methods of attaining good discipline. In maintaining discipline, it must be remembered the object of punishment should be two-fold: (a) To prevent the commission of ofifenses, and (b) to reform the offender. They should, therefore, in degree and character depend upon the nature of the offense. Punish- ment should not be debasing or illegal, and the penalty should be proportionate to the nature of the offense. If too great it tends to arouse sympathy, and foster friends for the offender, thus encouraging a repetition of the oft'ense. A distinction, therefore, should be made between the deliberate disregard of orders and regulations, and offenses which are the result of ignorance or thoughtlessness. In the latter case the punishment should be for the purpose of instruction and should not go to the extent of inflicting unnecessary humiliation and discouragement upon the oft'ender. In the administration of discipline the following principles should be observed: 1 Every one, officers and soldiers, should be required and made to perform their full duty. If the post commander, for instance, re- quires the company commanders to do their full duty, they will re- quire their noncommissioned officers to do their full duty, and the noncommissioned officers will in turn require, the men to do the same. 2 Subordinates should be held strictly responsible for the proper government and administration of their respective commands, and all changes or corrections should be made through them. DISCIPLINE. 15 3 Subordinates should have exclusive control of their respec- tive commands and all orders, instructions and directions affecting their commands should be given through them. 4 If, in case of emergency, it be not practicable to make cer- tain changes or corrections, or to give certain orders, instructions or directions, through the subordinates, they should be notified at once of what has been done. 5 After a subordinate has been placed in charge of a certain duty, all instructions pertaining thereto should be given through him, and all meddling and interfering should be avoided. Interference by superiors relieves the subordinate of responsibility, and causes him to lose interest, become indififerent, and do no more than he is obliged to do. 6 The certainty of rew^ard for, and appreciation of, meritorious conduct, should equal the certainty of punishment for dereliction of duty. 7 It is the duty of an officer or noncommissioned officer who gives an order to see that it is obeyed; carrying out orders received by him does not end with their perfunctory transmission to sub- ordinates — this is only a small part of his duty. He must personally see that the orders so transmitted are made effective. 8 The treatment of soldiers should be uniform and just, and under no circumstances should a man be humiliated unnecessarily or abused. Reproof and punishment must be administered with dis- cretion and judgment, and without passion; for an officer or non- commissioned officer who loses his temper and flies into a tantrum has failed to obtain his first triumph in discipline. He who can not control himself can not control others. 9 Punishment should invariably follow dereliction of duty for the frequency of offenses depends, as a general rule, on the degree of certainty with which their commission is attended with punish- ment. When men know that their derelictions and neglects will be observed and reproved, they will be much more careful than they would be otherwise — that's human nature. 10 Obedience — the cardinal principle of all discipline — may be defined as submission to the laivful orders of superiors. Men can not be punished for refusing to obey illegal orders. - The question then arises, who is to judge of the legality of the order? It is evident that 16 CHAPTER 11. • if all officers and soldiers are to judge when an order is lawful and when not, the captious and mutinous would never be at a loss for a plea to justify their insubordination. It is therefore on established principle, that unless an order is so manifestly against law that the question does not admit of dispute, the order must first be obeyed by the inferior, and he must only subsequently seek such redress against his superior as the law allows. If the inferior disputes the legality before obedience, error of judgment is never admitted in mitigation of the ofifense. THE COMPANY NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 17 CHAPTER III. THE COMPANY NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) A Experience has shown that it is the company in which the Non- commissioned Officers attend to details ; the company in which ap- parent trifles, such as excessive swinging of the arm in marching, improper sloping of the rifle at right shoulder, the failure to cut away the hand with snap in the manual of arms, and talking and gazing about in ranks — experience has shown that it is the com- pany in which these apparent trifles are continually corrected that will always prove most satisfactory to its commander and be most efficient in the field. Attention to these details soon becomes a habit, which in turn is applied to more important matters. Remem- ber, too, that the company which takes pride in the snap and accuracy with which it does things on the parade ground is also most likely to be the company that will conform strictly to the requirements of discipline in garrison and in the field. However, noncommissioned officers should be careful to correct errors in a just and dignified manner, and under no circumstances to allow the proper correction of errors to degenerate into nagging. B Noncommissioned Officers can do much to prevent the commis- sion of offenses by members of their commands, both when on and when off duty, and such prevention is as much their duty as reporting offenses after they are committed; in fact, it is much better to pre- vent the offense than to bring the offender to trial. It is a well know^i fact that the Noncommissioned Officers can reduce materially the number of courts-martial in a company, by studying their men and taking an interest in their welfare; by exercising restraint and common sense while at the same time preserving discipline. Some men can be handled only with stern and severe measures, while others are ruined if so handled. Sometimes a quiet talk from a Noncommissioned Officers whom the man respects will be more effec- tive and beneficial than a court-martial. C Noncommissioned Officers must make the men understand that 18 CHAPTER HI. they mean what ihey say; that they will stand no nonsense, but that on the other hand they can be relied upon for fair and square treat- ment. A No company can be a good company if discipline in quarters is loose.. The men should be able to feel that in quarters they have a home where they can read, sleep and converse peacefully, and into which rowdyism cannot penetrate. The Noncommissioned Officers should, therefore," take special care to stop at once all forms of boisterous conduct. B Noncommissioned Officers must insist upon privates' addressing them by their titles of "Sergeant" and "Corporal", and not as "Smith", "Jones", etc. C So far as the company is concerned, the Noncommissioned Officers are expected to assist the company commander in carrying out his own orders and those of his superiors — they should see that all company orders are obeyed and that the known wishes of the captain are carried out. D Noncommissioned Officers clothed in the proper uniform of their grade are on duty at all times and places for the suppression of disor- derly conduct on the part of members of the company in public places. Men creating disorder should be sent to their quarters in arrest and the facts reported to the company commander without delay. THE USUAL DUTIES OF THE VARIOUS COMPANY NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS E The usual duties of the First Sergeant and of the Quarter master Seageant are much more uniform throughout the service than those of the other company noncommissioned officers. See "The First Sergeant," Chapter IV, and "The Company Quartermas- ter-Sergeant," Chapter V. The duties of the Mess Sergeant, the Chiefs of Squads, the Noncommissioned Officer In Charge of Quarters and the Noncommis- sioned Officers In Charge of the Squad-rooms, differ in different com- mands. However, in every well regulated organization they are in the main about as follows: F The Mess Sergeant draws the rations of the company and looks after the property of the mess, keeping a list of same in a book furn- ished for the purpose. He checks up all the dishes and utensils twice THE COMPANY NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 19 a month and reports at once all shortages to the company commander. He also reports all the breakages. He keeps order and exercises supervision over the men in the dining room, over which he has general supervision at all times; he sees that they are properly seated and served; that every man gets plenty of every article to eat and that meals are served promptly at the designated hours. He sees that everyone gets plenty to eat, but that nothing is wasted or left on the plates. Men who have complaints to make should make them to the Mess Sergeant at meal hours, and he should at once investigate same, making to the company commander such report thereof as may be necessary. (Some men have a way of covering bread with gravy or something else and then leaving it untouched. When the Mess Sergeant catches a man wasting food in this manner, the plate should be saved as left by the man for the next meal, and he has to eat that before he can get any more bread). He sees that the white clothing used by the cooks is regularly and properly laundered, mended and replaced, and that the cooks, waiters and others connected with the preparation and serving of food, at all times appear neat, clean and tidy. The Mess Sergeant should keep a "Ration Book" in which are entered each issue day the articles drawn and the articles saved, the entries being "O. K'd." by the commissary sergeant. Care and common sense should be exercised in drawing rations. Companies have been known to draw all of their potatoes at once when they were badly sprouted, and thereby losing over half of them before they could be used up. Again, companies have been known to draw all their butter, already strong with age, so that by the latter part of the period it would not be fit to eat. Of course, in such cases the components in question should never have been drawn — the money value should have been saved. All articles issued by the commissar}^ should be issuable — that is to say in good, wholesome condition. A The Noncommissioned Officer in Charge of Quarters. To report to the company commander each morning, immediately after guard mounting, for orders. ^ 1 At some posts it is customary foi him to report wearing side-arms. 20 CHAPTER III. Proper police of (jiiartcrs, other than that portion assigned to quartermaster-sergeant. Proper police of grounds around company. (Sometimes done by the First Sergeant.) To see that no loud noise, disturbance or disorder occurs in quarters, and that no unauthorized persons enter the barracks. To inspect the quarters, reporting absentees, at eleven o'clock p. M., and such other hours during the night as may be designated by the company commander. To see that men in arrest or confined to barracks do not leave the same without proper authority. To keep the armracks locked at all times, retaining the keys. 2 He will accompany the company commander on his daily in- spection of the barracks. To see that no liquor of any description is brought into the quarters. He will have charge of the company mail, collecting, mailing and distributing the same (3). (Often done by the Company Clerk). He will not leave the barracks during his tour of duty, except to go to the postoffice, as provided above. The room orderlies are subject to his orders. A Noncommissioned Officers in Charge of Squad-Rooms. The senior Noncommissioned Officer in each squad-room is in charge. He is responsible that corporals in charge of squads perform the duties assigned them and in the temporary absence of corporals may designate privates to perform their duties. He will see that all post and company orders in regard to uni- formity of bunks, bedding, clothing, etc., are strictly carried out. He will see that the lights in his squad-room are extinguished at the proper time. He will see that no liquor of any description is brought into his squad-room. 2 Some company commanders require the "new N. C. O. in charge of quarters to verify and give written receipt to the old N. C. O. for (so many) rifles and the keys. No War Dept. orders requiring arm-racks to be kept locked have ever been issued. However, ordinary precaution against the improper use of arms and also due care for the preservation of Government property, require that it be done, and the custom is universal througtout the Army. See Cir. 83, '08. (3) In every company there should be kept in some convenient place a mail 1)ox with a lock. THE COMPANY NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICERS 21 He will see that the room is properly ventilated and in cold or windy weather that the windows are lowered from the top and not raised from the bottom. He will be in charge of the police of his squad-room when gen- eral police is ordered. He will be present when a man's clothing is checked and will report any shortage to the company commander. (About once every two weeks the clothing of a few men selected at random should be checked.) He will keep posted in the squad-room the number of rifles in each rack. Chiefs of Squads. To inspect their squads on the company parade before all inspections under arms. To see that each man polices about his bunk, folding his bed- ding in the prescribed manner, immediately after breakfast. They will designate soldiers to look after the bunks, fioor space, etc., of mem- bers of the squads who may be absent. To make an accurate check once a month, immediately after muster, of all clothing in possession of soldiers and all equipment- issued them. They will report the result of the check to the Non- commissioned Officer in charge of squad-room. They will be in charge of their respective squads when genera) police is ordered. A thorough police of barracks will precede the Saturday inspec tion. The chiefs of squads will see that bunks and bedding are over- hauled, floors, tables, and benches scoured, arms and accouterments cleaned, and all leather articles polished. (A. R. 282). Chiefs of squads will be held responsible for the cleanliness of their men. They will see that those who are to go on duty put their arms, accouterments, and clothing in the best order, and that such as have passes leave the post in proper dress. (A. R. 283). 22 CHAPTER IV. CHAPTER IV. THE FIRST SERGEANT (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) A It has been said that the Captain is the proprietor of the company and the First Sergeant is the foreman. His position is, indeed, one of importance and responsibility. Through speech, manner and action he must leave no doubt in the minds of each and every member of the company, noncommissioned officers and privates, that next to the commissioned officers he is the head of the company and that during the absence of all officers he is the Company Commander's personal representative in the company and must be obeyed and respected accordingly. The First Sergeant who permits any "back-talk" is not fit for the position — he will soon be looked upon by the men of the company as a "joke." He should use the influence and prestige of his position to further the contentment, harmony, esprit de corps of the company. He can do a great deal in settling minor differences between members of the compan3\ » He should make the men feel that thej^ have in him a good friend and a loyal comrade — one who always has time to listen to their troubles and straighten out their difficulties. He should let his men know that all priveleges consistent with discipline and the necessities of the service will be granted them and that when a privilege is with-held it is because there is some good reason for it and not because of the whim or fancy of someone in authority over them. Remember that the convenience of enlisted men can often be consulted in minor matters without in any way jeopardizing discipline, and that when possible it should be done — it will go a long way toward making the men contented and satisfied. General Duties, (i) B Under supervision of the captain he has immediate charge of all routine matters pertaining to the company. He looks after all (1) The collated experiences of ten old and experienced First Sergeants. THE FIRST SERGEANT 23 company property, books, papers and records, in the care and keep- ing of which lie is assisted by the other Noncommissioned Officers and tlie compan}' clerk. See Chapter XI, " Paper-]]' ork." A Every day at "First Sergeants' Call" he will repair to the adjutant's office^ and get tlie company morning report, together with a list of the Noncommissioned Officers and the number of privates required for guard the next day. He will also receive from the ser- geant-major such orders, communications, etc., as may be given him for the company officers. He will show the company officers, with- out delay, all orders and instructions affecting them or the company and deliver to them such communications as may be addressed to them. After "First Sergeants' Call" he will prepare a list of the names of the Noncommissioned Officers and privates detailed for guard the following day. This will be posted on the company bulletin board,* and published at retreat. He will publish to the company at retreat all post general orders received that day, or that have not yet been read to the men. Every morning, immediately after breakfast, he will turn out as many men as may be necessary to police the barracks and the grounds around the quarters. (This is sometimes done by the Non- commissioned officer ifl charge of quarters.) Every Friday he will ascertain from the company commander the uniform for Saturday morning inspection the next day and will notify the company officers and the company accordingly. He will notify the mess-sergeant of the soldiers who are absent on duty and for whom meals must be saved. He will inform the Company Quartermaster-Sergeant of all orders, circulars and instructions that may be received concerning Ordnance, Quartermaster or any other property pertaining to a compan3^ He will sec tliat all drawers, lockers and boxes are opened at the weekly, monthly and other formal inspections of quarters and that the Morning Report, the Correspondence Book and all other record books are laid out and opened for examination on such occasions. 1 At some posts it is customary for first sergeants to wear side-arms at "First Sergeants' Call." *Every company should have a large bulletin board, hung in some convenient place, on which will be posted all orders, notices, etc., affecting the company. 24 CHAPTER IV. (He may do this by giving standing instructions to the company -lerk and the noncommissioned officers in charge of squad-rooms). It is customary for him to accompany the Company Commander on his daily inspection of the barracks. He will see that camphor balls (or coal oil and lye) are kept in the urinals and that all metal door knobs, faucets and other metal parts around the quarters are kept properly polished. He will also see that all window panes are kept clean. (Sometimes done, by the N. C O. in charge of quarters). A The Daily Routine Duties of a First Sergeant are: Taking reveille roll call; entering the names of sick on the Sick Report, and sending the report and the sick to the Hospital by a noncommissioned ofificer (generally the Noncommissioned Ofificer in Charge of Quarters) ; mak- ing out the morning report^ and the passes, getting the Company Commander to sign them and then taking them to post headquarters; forming and inspecting the guard detail and then marching it to guard mount; repairing to post headquarters at First Sergeants* Call to receive the Morning Report, the guard and fatigue details for the next day and such orders and communications as there may be for the Company Commander; making out the details for the next day and making the proper entries in the Duty Roster; publishing to the company at retreat the guard and fatigue details for the following day and posting same on the company bulletin board; forming the company and calling the roll for all drills, ceremonies and other formations; exercising supervision" over the official correspondence of the com- pany, and preparing for the signature of the Company Commander all the reports and returns that are to be rendered the next day, and the discharges and final statements of men to be discharged the following day. Things the First Sergeant Should Take Special Care To Do. (2) B To ascertain the Captain's wishes, then not only carry them out himself, but also see that others do the same. To be always properly and neatly dressed. 1 The First Sergeant should never submit the morning report to the Captain for his signature, unless he has satisfied himself by checking it up that it is correct. It is astonishing how many morning reports are submitted to the Adjutant's Office with mistakes. (2) This is the collated experiences of ten old and experienced First Sergeants. THE FIRST SERGEANT 25 To be firm but not overbearing. A Have no favorites and do justice to all, being strictly honest and distributing equally all duties among the members of the company. Remember, if there is any one thing that soldiers can not stand, it is partiality, and that there is no one thing that will destroy the contentment, harmony and esprit de corps of a company more than continued partiality on the part of the First Sergeant.. Impartiality is one of the important requisites of a good First Sergeant. Alen who try to avoid small routine duties, such as policing around quarters, etc., should be given at once a task of a harder na- ture. If the First Sergeant overlooks small matters like this on the part of some men, it will not be long before other men will get into the habit of avoiding these duties, until eventually there will be but a few men doing what every man should do, with the consequent discontent in the company. Especially is this true in the field, where this matter should receive the special attention of First Sergeants. Have a place for everything and keep everything in its place. Obey strictly and execute promptly all the orders of the Com- pany Commander, and personally see that they are complied with in the company. He should see that his own orders are strictly and promptly obeyed. Set an example to the rest of the company in morality, sobriety, manliness and soldierly bearing. Quell promptly with a firm hand any disorder that may arise in the company. Offences committed by members of the company must be promptly reported to the Company Commander, and any extra fatigue awarded by the Company Commander is to be carried into effect as soon as practicable. Make it a rule to be on the company parade at least three or four minutes before the assembly for formations; see that' the men fall in promptly at the assembly, that they answer to their names properly, that they do not gaze about in ranks and that they main- tain a military bearing while at attention. If a man is too drunk to remain in quarters if put in arrest, he should be confined in the guardhouse. He should learn, as far as practicable, the desires of the members of the company and keep the Company Commander informed of them. If anything comes up that requires immediate action, act at 26 CHAPTER IV. once and then promptly report the facts to the Company Commander. The duty roster should be carefully kept so that there shall be no grounds for complaint on the part of the men detailed and no sus- picion of partiality. He should see that such papers as need comparison, especially final statements, are carefully compared before being presented to the Company Commander for signature. Have the morning report signed and in the Adjutant's Office every morning at or before the specified time. After clothing has been drawn take special care to see that the proper amounts are entered on the Descriptive List and Account of Pay and Clothing of each man To see that all property lost through neglect is charged on the Muster and the Pay Rolls against the person responsible. When a man is transferred, note on his Descriptive List all con- victions by Courts-Martial, together with dates and amounts of for- feitures, and in the case of men going on detached service or absent sick in hospital, see that the Descriptive Lists are made out at once and promptly forwarded to destination. Read carefully all orders, circulars and letters of instruction that are received. Things the First Sergeant Should Take Special Care NOP To Do.i Not to give the men cause to feel any unfairness in details or in the allotment of duty. An old First Sergeant says his motto has always been : "Treat every man justly, whether young or old, and yon ivill gain the confidence of all." Not to do anything or not to use any language that would lead to undue familiarity on the part of privates or noncommissioned offi- cers, and nor should he allow any other of the noncommissioned offi- cers to encourage familiarity between themselves and the privates. Do not trifle with, gibe or antagonize the men of the company, and never try to act as "a good fellow" with those under you. Do not enter into any quarrels, disputes or arguments of any kind with members of the company. While he should not, under any circumstances, allow other non- commissioned officers or privates to tell him what he should do, he should, on the other hand, always be open to suggestions. 1 This is the collated experiences of ten old and experienced First. Sergeants. THE FIRST SERGEANT 27 He should not allow noncommissioned officers and privates to tattle to him about members of the company — if they have anything to say about anyone they should tell it in the manner of a verbal report. He should not interfere with noncommissioned officers to whom he has given certain work; he should give complete instructions be- fore the work is commenced, but after that the noncommissioned officer in charge should be let alone and only required to PRODUCE THE RESULTS— to "deliver the goods." U interfered with by the First Sergeant, a noncommissioned officer will become discouraged and his usefulness marred. He should not have any business dealings with members of the company, especially about lending money on interest, and he should never get under money obligations to any member of the company. He should not gamble with any member of the company. (The First Sergeant who does should be promptly reduced.) Nor should he allow any other noncommissioned officer to do so. Under no circumstances should he allow the orderly room to be- come a loafing place — no one should ever be allowed in the orderly room except on business. Not to permit any disrespect toward noncommissioned officers on the part of privates. Never criticise officers or noncommissioned officers in the hear- ing of privates or other noncommissioned officers. A First Sergeant should not lose his temper and take as a per- sonal insult any disobedience of his orders. H ordered by higher authority to have any duty of a disagreeable nature done, do not act and order its being done as if it were dis- agreeable to you personally — do not say that you are having it done by order of so and so. Such action on the part of a First Sergeant is childish and unmilitary. How Can a FIRST SERGEANT Make Himself Most Useful To His Captain and What Are The Usual Ways of Doing So? A By faithfully carrying out the instructions given under the head- ings, "General Duties," "Things the First Sergeant should Take Spe- cial Care to Do," and "Things the First Sergeant Should Take Special Care NOT to Do," and by taking as much personal pride in the com- pany as if he owned it himself; by doing his duty conscientiously. 28 CHAPTER IV. without fear or favor, making it his special business to instill disci- pline into the organization and to correct incessantly all faults in dress, demeanor and drill; by endeavoring not only to make the men satis- fied with the company, but also to make them take pride in it and its reputation. Such a company will work together, like one man — the Quartermaster Sergeant and the Artificer will make it their boast that they are never short and that the company is the best equipped in the command ; the Mess Sergeant and the Cooks will tell how theirs is the best fed company in the post; the Chiefs of Squads will talk enthusiastically about their men; the Company Clerk will boast that his is the most methodical and systematic office in the regiment, and that no papers are ever sent back for correction; and every non- commissioned officer and private will brag on the company, "Customs of the Service" Affecting FIRST SERGEANTS. It is a very general cus.tom for members of the company to get permission from the First Sergeant to speak to the Company Com- mander. Some Company Commanders give orders to that effect. It is customary- for the First Sergeant to give to the Company Commander such information about the company and the members thereof as he deems necessary to the interest of the organization. In some companies the First Sergeant has standing permission to be absent from check. It is customary to allow the First Sergeant considerable lati- tude about giving verbal orders regarding the minor routine of the company. Company Commanders are very liberal about granting First Sergeants passes and other privileges. In the Cavalry First Sergeants are generally allowed to use their horses between reveille and retreat without having to get permission from the Troop Commander. LABOR SAVING DEVICES, CONVENIENCES AND METHODS THAT ARE OF USE IN THE COMPANY OFFICE. One of the greatest labor-saving devices in a company office is SYSTEM — system in everything. (As a rule men are not permitted to see the Company Commander at his quar- ters unless there is some good reason for it. They usually see him in the company office or as he is leaving.) THE FIRST SERGEANT 29 Of course there should be a typewriter in every company office. The purchase of a machine from the company fund is authorized by Cir. 56, '06. The following devices and conveniences not only save time and labor, but they also do a great deal tow^ard introducing method and system into the transaction of business in the company office: A Company Commander's "Tickler," to be used in connection with the rendition of reports, returns, estimates and requisitions. See page 92. Rubber Stamps Usually Used In A Company. (a) Indorsement Company "I," 24th Infantry, Fort Missoula, Mont., 190 (b) (.For other stamps, see 78 C and 160 B). 30 CHAPTER IV. Blank Forms. CA useful form that can be printed on the regimental press. After being read to company, to be posted on bulletin board.) TROOP D, 3rd CAVALRY. /pop. Detail for Tomorrow. FOR MAIN GUARD. (11 lines, one with the heading "Sergt.," 2 with the heading "CorpL," 1 "Trumptr.," 1, "Supernumerary," and 6, "Privates.") FOR STABLE POLICE. (2 or 3 more lines). FOR FATIGUE. (3 or 4 more lines). FOR KITCHEN POLICE. (1 more line). ROOM ORDERLIES. (1 more line). IN CHARGE OF QUARTERRS. REMARKS. (4 lines). 1st Setgeant. THE FIRST SERGEANT 31 Report of NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER In Charge of Quarters. Troop "A," 20th Cavalry. 1909 Received Issued by Q. M. Sergt.... Turned in to Q. M. Sergt. On Guard In racks Turned over Rifles Revolvers Received : spades ; shovels. Turned over: spades; shovels. Serial Number of Arms: Issued Rifles. Revolvers , Turned In ,Q. M. Sergt. Absent From Check. Remarks Explanatory Total number out in troop, when N. C. O. in charge of Quarters goes on duty. To recruits and others, after N. C. O. has gone on duty. Men discharged, sent to hospital, etc., after N. C. O. has gone on dutv. Total number out in troop turned over to successor. No. Rifle No. ... Revolver No. (Bunk card. Size 214 x 3^ ins.) In Charge of Quarters. 1st Sergeant. (Size about 3J4 by 12 ins.) (For pass lists and other blank forms see pages 109, 111, 112, 113, 114.) 32 CHAPTER IV. (To be used by individuals in enumerating the articles of clothing they wish to draw.) CLOTHING REQUIRED. By Co. "A," 24th Infantry No. Articles Size No. Articles Size Belts, waist Neckties Blankets, S. B. Number, hat Blankets, O. D. Ornaments Blouses Overcoats Boots, rubber Overshoes Braid, cord edge Pajamas, suits Breeches, khaki Ponchos — Large Breeches, O. D. Old pattern Caps — Dress Shirts — chambray Fur D. B. F. Khaki O. D. F. O. D. , Muslin White Shoes — ^Barrack Cap bands Black, dress Chevrons — Dress Gymnasium Khaki Russet, garrison O. D. Marching White Black, old pat. Gun Com'd'rs Russet, old pat. Observers Stockings — Cotton, old pat. Master Gunners Cotton, new pat. Gunners, each Service Woolen, heavy Coats — Canvas Woolen, light Dress Stripes, trousers Service, Khaki Suspenders Service, O. D. Sweaters White Trousers — Dress Cords, breast Canvas Cords, hats White Collars Undershirts — - Drawers — Canton flannel Cotton Cotton, knit Nainsook Jean Winter, heavy Nainsook Winter, light Winter — heavy Buttons — Winter — light Bronze, large Gauntlets — Fur Bronze, small Leather Gilt, large Gloves — Leather Gilt, small Horsehide Overcoat Cotton Cloth covert — O. D. Wool D. B. Hats — service Kersey— O. D. Laces, leggin, prs. S. B. Laces, shoes, prs. Lasting Leggins — Old pattern Serge — -Khaki New pattern O. D. Letters — Hat Tags and tape U. S. .Co. "A," 24th Infantry. Date Countersigned : ,, 190. ,Co. "A," 24th Infty. Chief of Squad. (Size Syz inches x 8l4 inches.) THE FIRST SERGEANT 33 ORDERS. The following are the usual forms of the company orders gen- erally issued: Company "I," 24th Infantry, Fort Missoula, Mont., January 1, 1908. Orders No. 1. Artificer. Artificer John A. Smith is hereby relieved from duty as artificer, and Private Henry Jones appointed in his stead. Robert E. Jackson, Captain 24th Infantry, Commanding Co. Company Clerk. Private John A. Smith is hereby detailed on special duty as company clerk. Company Cook. (a) Private John A. Smith is hereby relieved as company cook, and Private Henry Jones appointed in his stead. (b) The verbal orders of the company commander of November 5, 1907, appointing Private John A. Smith company cook, are hereby confirmed and made of record. Company Tailor Private John A. Smith is hereby detailed on special duty as company tailor. First Sergeant First Sergeant John A. Smith is hereby relieved as First Sergeant, and Ser- geant Henry Jones is appointed in his stead. Lance Corporal Private John A. Smith is hereby appointed lance corporal. He will be obeyed and respected accordingly. Musician (a) Private John A. Smith is hereby appointed musician. (b) Musician John A. Smith is hereby relieved as musician and returned to duty as private. Quartermaster Sergeant Sergeant John A. Smith is hereby relieved as Quartermaster Sergeant, and Sergeant Henry Jones detailed in his stead. BOOKS AND RECORDS The following books and records are required by Army Regu- lations to be kept in every company: — A I Morning Report which shows the exact status of every mem- ber of the company. Changes that have occurred since the preceding reports are noted in figures and by name. 34 CHAPTER IV. 2 Sick Report, on which are entered the names of all enlisted men requiring medical attention and such officers as are excused from duty because of illness. J Duty Roster. A form on which is kept a record of all de- tails for service in garrison and in the field, except the authorized special and extra duty details. For instructions regarding rosters, see ''Rosters and Detachments," Manual of Guard Duty. 4 Order File, consisting of a file of all orders received and issued. 5 Company Fund Book, in which are entered all receipts to, and expenditures from the company fund, together with the proceed- ings of the Company Council of Administration. (The Moss-Dalton Company Fund Book is recommended. General Agent: The U. S. In- fantry Association, Washington, D. C. 6 The Company Target Records consist partly of a series of sheets bound on the loose-leaf plan, one for each soldier, on which are entered his record practice and qualifications for each season of his three years' enlistment. Another part of the Company Target Record is given to a record of the collective fire and the figure of merit of the company. 7 Correspondence Book, with index, in which is entered with ink or indelible pencil a brief of each item of correspondence in re- spect to which a record is necessary and a notation of the action taken thereon. (See page 75). 8 Document File, containing the original documents or com- munications when these are retained, and carbon, letter press or other legible copies of all letters, indorsements or telegrams sent with regard to same. The file also contains similar copies of all let- ters, indorsements or telegrams originating in the company office. (See page 'K) A). 9 Descriptive List, Military Record and Clothing Account, on which is kept a full description of every man, including the date of enlistment, personal description, a record of deposits, trials by court- martial, etc., also clothing allowances due soldier and amounts due U. S. for clothing drawn. The clothing account of every soldier is balanced June 30 and December 31 of each year, and when his service with an organization is terminated. Every year the War Department publishes a general order giving the clothing allowance for the next fiscal year. THE FIRST SERGEANT 35 10 A Record of Sizes of Clothing for every man in the company as ascertained by measurements. See Supplement, Chap. IV, Par. 11. The keeping of the following books, although not required by Regulations, will greatly facilitate and systematize company admin- istration: — 1 Delinquency Book, hi which are noted disciplinary punish- ments awarded by the company commander. (Cards may be used instead. The Moss-Dalton Delinquency Book, which is based on the loose-leaf system, is recommended. General Agent: The U. S. Infantry Association, Washington, D. C.) 2 Memorandum Book, in which are entered court-martial sen- tences, sicknesses, stoppages for losses of ordnance stores, camp or garrison equipage, and all other data necessary to make out the muster and pay rolls. (Or a card or slip may be kept for each man, all the necessary data for the muster and the pay rolls being noted thereon. (The Moss-Dalton Muster and Pay Roll Data Book, based on the loose-leaf system, is by far the simplest, most handy and business-like way of keeping this data). S Ration Book, in which, every time rations are drawn, the quartermaster-sergeant enters the total number of rations of each ai tide drawn and the number of rations of each article saved. 4 Property Book, in which are entered all ordnance and quar- termaster stores in the possession of the members of the company. Get from the quartermaster's department, or some other source, a blank book of suitable size and dimensions. Beginning with number one, number the pages consecutively, entering on each page alpha- betically a list of the stock kit of a soldier, i. e.: 1 bunk; 1 bag, barrack; 1 belt, cartridge (woven); 1 belt, car- tridge, fair leather; 1 box, cartridge (McKeever); 1 cup, tin; 10 cartridges, multi-ball; 2 covers, mattress; 1 cover, front sight and muzzle; 1 can, meat; 2 cases, pillow; 1 canteen; 1 fork; 1 gun-sling; 1 haversack; 1 holder, card; 1 knife; 1 mattress; 1 oiler, small arm; 1 pillow; 5 pins, tent; 1 rifle; 1 strap, haversack; 4 sheets, bed; 1 shelter tent, half; 1 spoon; 1 scabbard, bayonet, steel; 1 strap, canteen. Rule also a column for the signature of the soldier in whose possession the articles are. Soldiers are given company numbers corresponding to those of the pages. When a soldier's kit is turned in, a red line is drawn through his signature — when the kit is re- 36 CHAPTER IV. issued the signature of the new man appears below, thus preserving a complete history of each kit. The numbers of the rifles in the company are entered consecu- tively in the back of the book, opposite each being the company number of the soldier to whom it is issued. (The Moss-Dalton Property Book, based on the loose-leaf system, is recommended). THINGS OF INTEREST TO FIRST SERGEANTS. A Marriage of Enlisted Men. There is no law to prevent the marriage of enlisted men, but when they marry without the consent of the company commander they may forfeit extra privileges which are sometimes granted to married soldiers. For instance, it may ex- clude the wife from residence within the garrison. (Remarks of A. G. and C. G. A. on various cases from 1884 to 1902.) A soldier who marries without the permission of his Regimental Commander may also be denied re-enlistment. Married soldiers who are good and worthy men are usually permitted to sleep out of quarters, on or off the reservation, but at- tending all calls and formations; draw rations separately and occupy available vacant quarters. B Soldier Shoemakers and Tailors. It is not seen why a soldier who happens to be a shoemaker or tailor can not justly and without cause of complaint (on part of civilians), after having performed his military duties, do outside work and take pay for it. His rights to live are just as sacred to him, and his wife and children are just as dear to him, and their support just as important to him as they would have been had he not enlisted. Besides a soldier's rate of pay is small. (Ruling of War Dept. Sept., '92.) C Venereal Diseases. Young soldiers disabled, or about to be- come disabled, by reason of venereal disease should be encouraged by officers and noncommissioned officers to report sick and effect an early cure — they should be taught mildly the pernicious effects of such diseases, etc. (Surgeon General and A. G. O.) Enlisted men who contract venereal diseases and report them- selves to the post surgeon for treatment will be allowed a reasonable time for recovery, provided their previous good service and character so warrant; but men who are found to be incurable and men who fail to report for treatment will be discharged on S. C. D. (Decision Sec'y of War, Oct., '95). THE FIRST SERGEANT 37 Discharge for venereal diseases should not be without honor and there should be no objection to the re-enlistment of a man dis- charged for such disease if he has entirely recovered. If it is consid- ered in the interest of the service to discharge him rather than retain him until recovery he should be given the usual discharge on S. C. D., but there is no authority for indorsing the nature of the disease upon the soldier's discharge. For Army Regulation paragraphs and War Department orders and circulars affecting First Sergeants, and for returns, estimates and requisitions to be submitted, see Chap. IV, Supplement. 38 CHAPTER V. CHAPTER V. THE COMPANY QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) The Company Quartermaster-Sergeant may be called the general utility man of the company. A General Duties.i His general duties consist in looking after all Government property pertaining to the company. He sees that it is properly stored, cared for and accounted for. Rifles and bayonets not in use should be stored in a dry place and kept well oiled. For method of cleaning and preserving russet leather, see page 58 B. He also has charge of the fuel and illuminating supplies, and generally looks after the repairs of the quarters and sees that the fire buckets are kept filled and ready for use and that the water is frequently changed. All property should be kept under lock and key and the Quartermaster-Sergeant should be sole custodian of the keys. He should never leave his storeroom without first seeing that it is locked, and that no light is left burning in the room. He receives and looks after the equipment of men who are absent on account of sickness, confinement or for any other reason, and sees that equipments turned in by discharged men are clean and in serviceable condition. Whenever a man is absent, sick or other- wise, his property should be tied in a blanket or shelter-half, put away by itself and tagged with the man's name. The Company Quartermaster-Sergeant should keep himself posted as to the prices, allowances, etc., of all Government property pertaining to a company, and he should ask the First Sergeant and the Company Clerk to notify him whenever orders are received making changes in prices, allowances, etc. Things the Company Quartermaster-Sergeant should take Special Care To DoJ B See that all property issued to the members of the company is 1 The collated experiences of nine Company Quartermaster-Sergeants. COMPANY QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 39 receipted for when the issue is made, and that property gotten by officers is entered on their memorandum receipts. Not only that every soldier joining is furnished with the required equipment, but also that every article is in good serviceable condition, and marked with the letter of the organization, the number of the regiment and the number of the soldier. The number of all arms issued, transferred, etc., should be carefully noted. To take special care that all property lost, damaged or destroyed by members of the company is charged up against them. His Ordnance and Quartermaster papers should be so kept that he can tell at once exactly how much property he is responsible for and where it is. An inventory should be taken once every six months, and prop- erty in general use, such as spades, axes, shovels, ash barrels, etc.. should be frequently checked up, so that in case of shortage it will not be so difficult to fix the responsibility. Small arms and their appendages should be well oiled- before being stored. Sheets, pillow cases, canvas, etc., should be dried thoroughly before storing. Whenever any arms are turned in they should be carefully inspected and any needed repairs attended to without delay. To inform the Company Commander of any article required at the time, or that will be required in the near future, for the proper equipment of the company, or for the proper care of such equipment. Property condemned or charged on Statement of Charges should be promptly replaced. To turn in all unserviceable Quartermaster property and get credit slips for same. He should keep on hand a supply of ammunition for target practice, so as to avoid delay when it is needed, and he must be careful to keep an accurate account of all ammunition expended. The property of the different departments should be kept separ ately. On dry days open all windows and doors of the storeroom and let the air circulate through the place. 40 CHAPTER V. See that all property is properly marked — that which is issued to individuals, as required by the Army Regulations; that which is in general use around the company, with the letter and regiment of the organization. Sheets, pillow slips, etc., should be indelibly marked with a rubber stamp. When in the field never leave a camping ground without first going over same — you will often find articles of Ordnance forgotten by some of the men. In preparing Ordnance stores for shipment to an arsenal, be sure that the contents of the package tally absolutely with the invoice — do not put in any spare parts that are not on the invoice. During the target season see that as many empty shells as possible are returned and have them thoroughly cleaned without unnecessary dela}', as this afifects the ammunition allowance of the company. Things the Company Quartermaster-Sergeant should take Special Care NOT to Do.i A Never receipt for property that is not serviceable. Do not sign for property without first having received it. Consult the Company Commander on all matters of importance, but do not bother him with useless questions. Do not get on bad terms with the Post Quartermaster-Sergeant or the Post Ordnance Sergeant or any one else with whom you may have to do business. In receipting for property never take anything for granted — always see for yourself — carry out the popular saying, "/ am from MISSOURI ; you must show me". (Whenever packages of supplies are opened for the first time, the officer responsible or some other commissioned officer will be present and verify the contents by actual weight, count or measurement. A. R. 673.) Never issue a new article to one man and an old one to another; that is to say, shov/ no favoritism, but treat everyone alike. Labor-Saving Devices, Conveniences and Methods that Are of Value to a Company Quartermaster-Sergeant. B The storeroom should be a model of neatness, system and method. There should be as many shelves as possible, which can 1 The collated experiences of nine Company Quartermaster-Sergeants. COMPANY QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 41 be made of packing boxes in which Ordnance and other supplies are received. Oils, paints and other similar articles should be kept on the lower shelves. Everything should be so arranged as to be in sight. If this be not practicable, all articles not so exposed to view that they can be readily counted, should be listed and the list placed where it can be seen. Especially should this be done with the stores in chests and boxes. Get from the Quartermaster's Department a blank book of con- venient size and rule it with proper headings as a charge book. In this book is kept a complete record of all articles issued to soldiers to replace those lost or damaged. In order to avoid discussion in the future, soldiers should be required to sign in the book for articles so issued. A Rubber Stamps. Co."A" 24th INFANTRY NO. The figures o to 9 should go with this stamp. Used for the marking of linen and clothing, so that the marking throughout the company shall be uniform. * B A stencil outfit to mark Ordnance equipments is furnished b}^ the Ordnance Department, and a marking set for marking boxes, etc., can be obtained from the Quartermaster's Department. C Grindstone. A small grindstone about six inches in diameter, to sharpen kitchen knives, etc., is a convenience. D Hand-Cart. If the company has not a hand-cart, effort should be made to get one from the Quartermaster's Department. A hand-cart is one of the greatest conveniences that a company can have. Not only is it always at hand for the transportation of rations, clothing and other supplies drawn by the company, but it can also be used continually around the company for various purposes. E A Kit of Tools is issued to each company by the Ordnance De- partment for use in repairing the rifle and bayonet, and in regulating the socket spring of the woven cartridge belt, model 1903. 42 CHAPTER V. A Arm Racks and Arm Chests are issued by the Ordnance Depart- ment for the safe keeping of small arms. Officers who are responsible for small arms, and who neglect to obtain these chests, are regarded as not having taken every precaution to prevent loss. (Cir. 83, '08). Upon change of station arm racks are invoiced to the post ordnance officer, for the use of incoming organizations. (G. O. 134, '08). How Can a Company Quartermaster-Sergeant Make Himself Most Useful to His Company Commander? B By being careful and methodical in looking after the propert}'' interests of the company; by familiarizing himself with all orders and regulations that affect him; by having the property in such condition that it can be easily checked at a moment's notice and in case of a sudden move the Company Commander would not have to bother himself about getting his property together and preparing it for shipment. CHAPTER VI. NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN CHARGE OF RECRUITS (See corrcsf-'onding cliaptcr in Supplement for additional matter and changes, ,if any.} The recruit is, of course, ignorant of all military matters, but he is usually willing to learn and will submit without complaint to more hours of instruction than ever afterwards in his military career. Much of his unsoldierly conduct and awkwardness — from which he frequently reaps humiliation through harsh and ill-considered correction — is the direct result of his ignorance for which he is in no way responsible, and this ignorance should be removed by patient and systematic instruction. Explain to the recruit that there is a great deal in the service besides brass buttons and dress parades. There is plenty of hard work to do, some of it disagreeable work, but it is all necessary, and should be done cheerfully. After his first difficulties are over, he will find much of interest and benefit in the service. Tell him that he is not expected to know everything or do every- thing correctly at first; but he is expected to be attentive and careful, and above all to do whatever he is told to do by his officers and non- commissioned officers. Impress upon him tlie importance of starting of¥ right in his career as a soldier. Let him know that while his officers and noncommissioned officers are forbidden to be harsh or abusive, they are required to be firm and to see that the recruit docs his work promptly and properly. Advise him of the fact that if at an^^ time he thinks he is not being rightly treated, he may get permission from the First Sergeant to speak to his company commander and lay the facts before him, and that his company commander will see that he receives justice. Instruct him when and where to find the company commander and how to present himself. Th'us: He will stand at attention, three or four paces in front of the company commander, salute and say, for instance, "Sir, Private Smith has permission to speak to the Captain'', 44 CHAPTER VI. and then briefly state his case. Caution him about never referring to an officer as "you" and to end all statements by "sir". (See Forms of Speech, page 49.) When dismissed by the company commander, the recruit will salute, execute about face and leave. Should the First Sergeant refuse the recruit permission to speak to the company com- mander, the recruit, if his complaint be sufficiently serious, may go to the company commander direct, reporting the fact that the First Sergeant refused to give him permission to see the company com mander. While firm and thorough, the Noncommissioned Officer in Charge of Recruits should be patient and considerate with the recruit — by his bearing, speech and appearance, he should set an example for the young soldier. He should remember that the life of the recruit is the most trying part of a soldier's career — that the work and requirements being new and strange, they seem to the recruit in many ways useless and at times even degrading. Some recruits, for instance, misunder- stand the nature of the salute and failing to see any necessity therefor, are averse to saluting officers. The reason and significance of the salute, therefore, as well as all other things he does not understand, should be carefully explained to him, and as often as may be necessary. He should be told there is a reason for everything that he is required to do, and that study and hard work on the part of experienced officers has shown that not only are salutes, setting up exercises, squad drills, etc., necessary to make a soldier out of a man, but that they are the best and quickest means of attaining that end. The setting up exercises, for example, in addition to giving a man a military bearing, render his limbs more supple, thereby giving him better control of them, also develop and strengthen the muscles and other parts of the body, so that the soldier may be better able to endure any physical exertion and hardship that he may be required to undergo in garrison, in camp, on the march or in battle. The squad drill gives an elastic step, enabling the recruit to walk and carry himself like a soldier; it accustoms him to respond at once to commands, so that he may be quickly and easily handled on the field of battle. All instruction given the recruit has but one final object in view: To prepare and fit him for the crucial test — What to Do on the Field of Battle and How to Do it. As a rule, an infantry recruit is given instruction about three THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 45 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. hours a day for thirty (hiys or so, before being taken up for guard, police and other duty; cavab^y and artillery recruits generally require longer periods of instruction. The several daily periods of instruction should not exceed 45 minutes each — if they do, the recruit's mind will become tired and his attention will lag. The following general scheme of instruction is merely given as a guide. FIRST TEN DAYS Individual Instruction Without Arms. Setting-up exercises, salutes with the hand, marchings, etc. Barrack Regulations. The regulations of the company con- cerning the conduct of the men in barracks will be explained. Post Orders. All post orders regarding the conduct of en- listed men will be read and explained. Articles of War. All provisions affecting enlisted men to be carefully explained, and the consequences of their violation made clear. Special attention to be invited to Articles 47 and 48, regarding desertion, emphasizing the disgraceful, ignominous nature of the offense, the conviction of which involves the forfeiture of the rights ' of citizenship and the incapacity to hold ofifice under the United States. (Sec. 1996 and 1999, Rvd. Sts.) Conviction of desertion also forfeits all right to pension which the soldier might otherwise have. (See page 395). Army Regulations. Such paragraphs as immediately affect en- listed men, especially the general requirements of governing each soldier's responsibility for the safe keeping and care of all articles of clothing and equipment issued him. / A What is Obedience? It is compliance with everything that is re quired by authority — it is the mainspring, the very soul and essence of all military duty. It is said a famous general once remarked everj^ soldier should know three things — "First, obedience; second, obedience; third, obedience". Cheerful, earnest and loyal obedience must be paid by all sub- ordinates to the orders of their superiors. A soldier should obey first and if aggrieved complain afterward. All duty should be performed cheerfully and willingly. Soldiers 46 CHAPTER VI. are sometimes required to perform duties that are not pleasant — for instance, doing guard duty on a cold, rainy night, when tired and sleepy; digging ditches or cleaning up dirt and filth that have ac- cumulated around the barracks, kitchens, quarters, etc., scrubbing floors, polishing stoves, cleaning knives, forks, pots, etc. However, by doing everything required of him in a cheerful manner, a soldier will soon earn the respect of his comrades and the commendation of his officers. ■A Is it important that privates should always obey noncommissioned officers? Yes, it is most important that they should respect and obey their noncommissioned officers and recognize their authority under all circumstances. Even if the noncommissioned officer be at fault, this gives the private no aggressive rights. If, for instance, a noncom missioned officer should strike a private, justly or unjustly, this would not give the private the right to strike back. The private should at once make complaint to the captain, who will see that justice is done him. If the principle of soldiers taking such grievances into their own hands were recognized, the Army would soon become a mob. (Note. The recruit should be taught the different ranks of officers and non- commissioned officers, the authority they possess and the respect due them.) If in ignorance of any matter relating to his rights, privileges or any thing else, what should a recruit do? He should apply to a noncommis- sioned officer of his company, preferably the one in charge of recruits. If not satisfied with the information thus received he should then go to the first sergeant. Military Deportment and Appearance The recruit is no longer a civilian but a soldier. He is, however,, still a citizen of the United States and by becoming a soldier also he is in no way relieved of the responsibilities of a citizen; he has merely assumed in addition thereto the responsibilities of a soldier. For instance, if he should visit an adjoining town and become drunk and disorderly while in uniform, not only could he be arrested and tried l)y the civil authorities, but he could also be tried by the summary court at his post for conduct to the prejudice of good order and mili- tary discipline. Indeed, his uniform is in no way whatsoever a license for him. to do anything contrary to law and be protected by the gov ernment. Being a soldier, he must conduct himself as such at all time?, that he may be looked upon not only by his superior officers as a THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 47 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. soldier, but also by the public as a man in every way worthy of the uniform of the American soldier. Whether on or off duty, he should always look neat and clean, ever remembering that in bearing and in conversation he should be every inch a soldier — shoes must be clean and polished at all times; no chewing, spitting, gazing about, or raising of hands in ranks — he should know his drill, his orders and his duties — he should always be ready and willing to learn all he can about his profession — he should never debase himself with drink. It should be remembered that the soldiers of a command can make the uniform carry distinction and respect, or they can make it a thing to be derided. The soldier should take pride in his uniform. A soldier should be soldierly in dress, soldierly in carriage, soldierly in courtesies. A civilian owes it to himself to be neat in dress. A soldier owes it to more than himself — he owes it to his comrades, to his company — he owes it to his country, for just so far as a soldier is slack so far does his company suffer;his shabbiness reflects first upon himself, then upon his company and finally upon the entire Army. It is a fact known to students of human nature that just in proportion as a man is neatly and trimly dressed is he apt to conduct himself with like decency. The worst vagabonds in our communities are the tramps, with their dirty bodies and dirty clothes; the most brutal deeds in all history were those of the ragged, motley mobs of Paris in the days- of the French Revolution; the first act of the mutineer has ever been to debase and deride his uniform. It is also a well known fact that laxity in dress and negligence in military courtesy run hand in hand with laxity and negligence in almost everything else, and that is why we can always look for certain infallible symptoms in the individual dress, carriage and courtesies of soldiers. Should a soldier give care and attention to his dress/ Yes, sir; not only should a soldier be always neatly dressed, but he should also be properly dressed — that is, he should be dressed as required by Regulations. A soldier should always be neat and trim, precise in dress and carriage and punctilious in salute. Under no circumstances should the blouse or overcoat be w^orn unbuttoned, ks CHAPTER vr. ^c or the cap l)ack or on llic sick- of ihc head. His hair should be kept properly trininicd, his face clean shaved or heard trimmed and his shoes polished, his trousers pressed, the 1)elt accurately fitted to the waist so that it does not sag, his leggins cleaned, his brass letters, numbers and crossed rifles polished, and his white gloves immaculate. Should a mail ever be allozved to leave tJie post on pass if not properly dressed f No, sir; never. The Army Regulations require that chiefs of squads shall see that such members of their squads as have passes leave the post in proper dress. Should a soldier ever stand or icalk zvitJi his Jiaiids in his pockets? No, sir; never. There is nothing more unmilitary than to see a soldier standing or walking with his hands in his pockets. The real soldier always stands erect. He never slouches. Is it permissible, while in uniform, to wear picture buttons, chains, watch charms, etc., exposed to view? No, sir; it is not. May the campaign hat or any otJier parts of the uniform be worn with civilian dress? No, sir; this is prohibited by the uniform order, which especially states that when the civilian dress is worn it will not be accompanied by any mark or part of the uniform. May a mixed uniform be worn — for example, a khaki coat and olive drab trousers? No, sir; under no circumstances. Personal Cleanliness. Is personal cleanliness a matter of importance? Yes, and the Army Regulations require soldiers to bathe frequently. in this company soldiers are required to bathe at least a week. They are also required to brush their teeth and comb their hair daily. The Army Regulations require that the hair be kept short and the beard neatly trimmed, and that all soiled clothing be kept in the barrack bag. It is also required that in garrison, and whenever practicable in the field, soldiers wash their hands thoroughly after going to the latrines and before each meal, in order to prevent the transmission of typhoid fever and other diseases by germs taken into the mouth with food .from unclean hands. What may be done to a soldier who persists in being filthy? He may be scrubbed by order of the Captain. TIJE NONCOiM MISSIONED OFFICER IN 49 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. Who is iiiiiiicdidlcly rcsl^niisihlc for the cleanliness of the soldiers? According to the Army Regulations, each chief of squad is held responsible for the cleanliness of his men. FORMS OF SPEECH (The recruit will actually go through the act of addressing an officer, entering an office, delivering a message, etc.) In Speaking to an officer, is it proper to say, "You, etc.," and "I, etc.?" No, sir; in speaking to an officer the third person should be used, as, "Does the Captain want his horse this morning?"; "Private Smith would like to speak to the Captain about his furlough," etc. (Note. After the conversation has commenced, it is not customary for the speaker to use the third person instead of the pronouns "I" and "me." However, an officer is ahvays addressed in the third person and never as "you.") How should an enlisted man refer to another enlisted man when speaking to on ofUcerf He should use the proper title, as "Sergeant-Major Smith", "Ser- geant Jones", "Corporal Richards", "Private Wilson", How should noncommissioned officers always be addressed? They should always be addressed as "Sergeant Smith", "Corporal Jones", etc., and not as "Smith", "Jones", etc. When asked his name, what sJiould a soldier answer? He should answer, for instance, "Private Jones, Sir". What should a soldier do when given an order or instructions by an oificer? He should salute, and say, "Yes, sir". How should short, direct answers be made? "No, sir", "Yes, sir", "I don't know, sir", "I will try, sir", etc., are forms that should be used in answer to direct questions. After one has finished a thing that he has been ordered to do, what should he do^ He should always report to the officer who gave him the order. For instance "The Captain's message to Lieutenant Smith has been delivered". When ordered to report to an officer for any purpose, should a soldier ever go away without first ascertaining if the officer is through with him? No, sir; he should not, as it often happens that the officer is not through with the soldier when the latter thinl^s he is. He may, for instance, report: "Sir, is the Captain through with me?" 50 CHAPTER V]. When an officer calls to a soldier who is some distance away, what should the soldier do? He should immediately salute, and say, "Yes, sir," and if necessary, approach the officer with a quickened step. MISCELLANEOUS A Hczv should a soldier enter an office in which there is an officer? He should give t\vo or three knocks at the door (whether it be open or closed) ; when told to come in, enter, taking off the hat (if unarmed), close the door and remain just inside the door until asked what is wanted; then go within a short distance of the officer, stand at attention, salute and make known your request in as few words as possible. On completion, salute, face toward the door, and go out, being careful to close the door if it was closed when you entered, li it was not closed, leave it open. B Shculd complaints be made directly to flic Captain? Complaints must never be made directly to the Captain unless the soldier has the Captain's permission to do so, or the First Sergeant refuses to have the matter reported. H dissatisfied with his food, clothing, duties, or treatment, the facts should be reported 'to the First Sergeant, with the request, if necessary, to see the Captain. It is also customary for soldiers who wish to speak to the Captain about anything to see the First Sergeant first, and when speaking to the Captain to inform him that he has the First Sergeant's permission to do so. Thus: "Private Smith has the First Sergeant's permission to speak to the Captain, etc''. C How is a soldier paid? As soon as the company is formed in column of files, take off your right-hand glove, and fold it around your belt in front of the right hip. When your name is called, answer "Here", step forward and halt directly in front of the paymaster, who will be directly behind the table; salute him. When he spreads out your pay on the table in front of you, count it quickly, take it up with your ungloved hand, execute a left or right face and leave the room and building, unless you wish to deposit, in which case, you will remain in the hall outside the pay-room, until the company has been paid, when you enter the pay-room. Men wishing to deposit money with the paymaster, will always notify the first sergeant before the company is marched to the pay table. D How is a message delivered? THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 51 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. When an enlisted man receives a message, verbal or written, from an officer for delivery, he will in case he does not understand his instruc- tions, ask the officer to repeat them, saying, for instance, "Sir, Private Smith, does not understand; will the Captain please repeat?" When he has received his instructions, and understands them, he will salute, and say : "Yes, sir", execute an about face, and proceed immediately to the officer for whom the message is intended. He will halt three or four paces directly in front of the officer and if the officer be junior to the officer sending the message, he will say, "Sir, Captain Smith presents his compliments," etc., and then deliver the message, or, "The commanding officer presents his compliments to Lieutenant Smith and would like to see him at headquarters". He will salute immediately before he begins to address the officer and will hold his hand at the position of salute while he says, "Sir, Captain Smith presents his compliments", or "The commanding officer presents his compliments to Lieutenant Smith". If the officer sending the message be much junior to the one receiving it, the soldier will riot present his compliments, but wall say, for instance, "Sir, Lieut. Smith directed me to hand this letter to the Captain"' or "Sir, Lieut. Smjth directed me to say to the Captain", etc. As soon as the message has been delivered, the soldier will salute, execute an about face, and proceed at once to the officer who sent the message, and will similarly report to him, "Sir, the Lieutenant's message to Capt. Smith has been delivered", and leave. Before leaving always ascertain whether there is an answer. A How does a soldier appear as a witness befqre a general court- martial F The uniform is that prescribed, with side arms and gloves. Proceed to the court-room and remain outside. When you are notified that you are wanted enter the room. Then take off your cap and right hand glove, and raise "your right hand above your head, palm to the front, to be sworn. After the judge-advocate reads the oath, say, "I do" or "So help me God". Then sit down in the chair indicated by the judge-advo- cate. Do not cross your legs, but sit upright. When asked, "Do you know the accused? If so, state who he is," answer, "I do; Corporal John Jones, Co. 'B' ist Infantry." Be sure you thoroughly understand every question before you start to reply, answ-ering them all promptly, in a loud, distinct, deliberate voice, and confining your answers strictly to the questions asked and telling all you know. 52 CHAPTER VL When the judge-advocate says "That is all," arise, salute him, execute an about face, and leave the room. At some posts it is customaij' for soldiers to appear in the same manner when summoned as a witness before a summary court, while at other posts side arms and gloves are not worn. SECOND TEN DAYS Individual Instruction with Arms. Bayonet exercises, manual of arms, loadings, firings and marchings. Nomenclature of the Rifle. The names of all the various parts of the rifle and their function? to be explained — also the manner of dismounting and assembling the sam.e (See Chapter XVIII). A Care of Clothing, Arms and Other Equipment. These articles are given the recruit by the government for certain purposes, and he has, therefore, no right to be in any way careless or neglectful of them. Clothing, Ornaments and Buttons. Every article of clothing in the hands of an enlisted man should receive as much care as he gives to his person. Spots should always be removed as soon as possible. Preparations for this purpose can always be obtained from any drug store at small cost.l Turpentine will take out paint. Grease spots can be removed by placing a piece of brown paper, newspaper, or other absorbent paper over the stain, and the pressing with a hot iron. B Chevrons and stripes can be cleaned by moistening a clean woolen rag with gasoline and rubbing the parts and then pressing with a hot iron. Blue clothing should be thoroughly brushed and pressed once a week — two pressing irons and boards in a company, troop or battery will provide for this. C All gilt ornaments and buttons should be polished once a week — one button stick and brush per squad should be provided for this purpose. "Polishine" is recommended as a suitable polish — although there are many others just as good, but none better. Olive drab clothing should also be pressed weekly. This will stimulate a desire in the men to take better care of their clothing, as a wrinkled or soiled article is thrown around care- lessly — while a pressed article is faid away to prevent its wrinkling, thus lasting longer, 1 All cleaning material should be purchased by the soldier from the company, for cash or credit, at cost price. This would give many who have no credit at the exchange a chance to procure such articles as are essential to the proper care and preservation of their clothing and equipment. THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN CHARGE OF RECRUITS. 53 A Soiled khaki clothing and leggings should be washed by the men — they can generally do it better than the laundry. Khaki and leggings require little or no pressing, if not wrung out before being placed out to dry. Khaki so washed wears about twice as long as when washed by a steam laundry. The service hat and blue and olive drab caps require nothing but brushing. The cover for the khaki cap should be washed as often as necessary — not oftener, perhaps, than every two weeks and always in cold water and dried on the cap itself. No article should be worn without first being brushed. Shirts, underwear, socks etc., should be laid away neatly. Articles of clothing soiled from wear or from long standing in the locker should soiled from wear or from long standing in the locker should be sent to the laundry immediately. A special suit of clothing should be set aside for inspections, parades, and other ceremonies and the uniform w^orn at these formations should not be worn in barracks — each man invariably has sufficient old garments for barrack use. A change of clothing after formation will be found to be a great help in preserving clothing. The special suit mentioned should be kept well brushed, pressed and neatly folded. The following list of clothing, the cost of which aggregates $87.97, is considered a liberal allowance and provides a very complete equipment for the first year of enlisted service ; to this allowance $25 should be added for the second year and $20 for the third. A soldier should, therefore, at the end of his first enlistment find himself with approximately $40 to his credit from his clothing allowance. (These figures are based on the present, July, 1909, clothing allowances). List 1 Blanket, heavy weight; 3 Breeches, khaki; 2 Breeches, olive drab; 1 Cap, dress; 1 Cap, khaki ; 1 Cap, olive drab; 1 Coat, dress; 3 Coats, khaki; 2 Coats, olive drab. 6 Collars, linen; 1 Cord, breast; 2 Letters, U. S. gilt, collar; 2 Ornaments, cap, bronze; 1 Ornament, cap, gilt; 2 Ornaments, collar, gilt; 4 Ornaments, collar, bronze; 1 Overcoat; 2 Shirts, olive drab. 2 Shirts, muslin; 2 pr. Shoes, russet; 1 pr. Shoes, calf skin ; 1 Slicker; OF THE UNIVERSITY OF 54 CHAPTER VI. 2 Cords, hat; 3 Drawers, canton flannel; 12 pr. Gloves, white, cotton; 2 pr. Gloves, white, wool; 1 Hat, service; 2 pr. Leggins, puttee; 12 pr. Stockings, cotton, dark brown; 2 pr. Stockings, wool, heavy ; 1 pr. Suspenders; 1 Trousers, dress; 3 Undershirts, cot'ton; 3 Undershirts, wool, light. THE CARE AND PRESERVATION OF SHOES Shoes should at all times be kept polished, by being so kept they are made more pliable and wear longer. Shoes must withstand harder service than any other article worn, and more shoes are ruined through neglect than by wear in actual service. Proper care should be taken in selecting shoes to secure a proper fit, and by giving shoes occasional attention much discomfort and complaint will be avoided. Selection. A shoe should always have ample length, as the foot will always work forward fully a half size in the shoe when walking, and sufficient allowance for this should be made. More feet are crippled and distorted by shoes that are too short than for any other reason. A shoe should fit snug yet be comfortable over ball and instep, and when first worn should not lace close together over instep. Leather always stretches and loosens at instep and can be taken up by lacing. The foot should always be held firmly but not too tightly in proper position. If shoes are too loose, they allow the foot to slip around, causing the foot to chafe; corns., bunions, and enlarged joints are the result. Repairs. At the first sign of a break shoes should be repaired, if possible. Always keep the heels in good condition. If the heel is allowed to run down at side, it is bad for the shoe and worse for the foot; it also weakens the ankle and subjects the shoe to an uneven strain, which makes it more liable to give out. Shoes if kept in repair will give double the service and comfort. Shoe Dressing. The leather must not be permitted to become hard and stiff. If it is impossible to procure a good shoe dressing, neat's-foot oil or tallow are the best substitutes; either will soften the leather and preserve its pliabilit}^ Leather requires oil to preserve its pliability, and if not supplied will become brUtle, crack, and break easily under strain. Inferior dressings are always harmful, THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 55 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. and no dressing should be used which contains acid' or varnish. Acid burns leather as it would the skin, and polish containing varnish forms a false skin which soon peels off, spoiling the appearance of the shoe and causing the leather to crack. Paste polish containing turpentine should also be avoided. Perspiration. Shoes becoming damp from perspiration should be dried naturally by evaporation. It is dangerous to dry leather by artificial heat. Perspiration contains acid which is harmful to leather, and shoes should be dried out as frequently as possible. Wet Shoes. Wet or ,damp shoes should be dried with great care. When leather is subjected to heat, a chemical change takes place, although no change in appearance may be noted at the time. Leather when burnt becomes dry and parched and will soon crack through like pasteboard when strained. This applies to leather both in soles and uppers. When dried, the leather should always be treated with dressing to restore its pliability. Many shoes are burned while on the feet without knowledge of the wearer by being placed while wet on the rail of a stove or near a steam pipe. Care should be taken while shoes are being worn never to place the foot where there is danger of their being burned. Keep Shoes Clean. An occasional application of soap and water will remove the accumulations of old dressing and allow fresh dressing to accomplish its purpose. Directions For Polishing. Russet calf leather should be treated with great care. Neither acid, lemon juice, nor banana peel should be used for cleaning purposes. Only the best liquid dressing should be used and shoes should not be rubbed while wet. Black calf shoes should be cleaned frequently and no accumula- tion of old blacking allowed to remain. An occasional application of neat's-foot oil is beneficial to this leather, and the best calf blacking only should be used to obtain polish. Liquid Dressing. Care should be taken in using liquid dressing. Apply only a light even coat and allozv this to dry into the leather before rubbing with a cloth. When sufficiently dry to rub, a fine powdery substance remains on the surface. This, when rubbed with a soft cloth, produces a high polish that lasts a long time and which is quickly renewed by an occasional rubbing. Too much dressing is useless and injurious. {Quartermaster General's Office, June i6, i88g). 56 CHAPTER VL The rifle. As the bore of the rifle is manufactured with great care in order that a high degree of accuracy may be obtained, it should be carefully cared for. What remains from smokeless powder tends to eat and wear away the bore and should, therefore, be removed as soon after firing as practicable. The proper way of cleaning a rifle is from the breech. For this purpose the barrack cleaning-rod should be used. To clean a rifle use rags, preferably canton flannel, cut them into squares of such size that they may be easily run through the barrel. Remove the bolt from the rifle, place the muzzle on the floor and do not remove it therefrom while the cleaning- rod is in the bore. Wrap a rag that has been thoroughly soaked in a saturated solution of soda and water around the point of the cleaning-rod, insert it into the bore and work back and forth in the bore. Follow with dry rags until the bore is thoroughly dry, then remove the muzzle from the floor and with a small stick and a new rag, soaked in the same solution proceed to clean the muzzle end of the bore. This should find the bore free from dirt, rust etc. Clean again with rags dipped in oil, preferably "3 in i", dry thoroughly and apply a thin coating of the same oil. Repeat the process of cleaning with oil daily and the bore will at all times be thoroughly clean. Five minutes work a day will accomplish this. To clean the bolt, dismount it, clean all parts thoroughly with an oily rag, dry, and before assembling lightly oil the firing pin, the barrel of the sleeve, the striker, the well of the bolt and all cams. The stock and hand guard should receive a light coat of raw lin- seed oil once a month, or after any wetting from rain, dew etc. — this should be thoroughly rubbed in with the hand. The chamber, magazine and other parts require very little care — wiping, drying, brushing and coating with a thin coat of oil, as in the bore, is sufficient to keep these parts clean. Unless the rifle is to be stored away, or not used for any length of time, the use of cosmic oil should be discouraged — it is thick and sticky which makes it hard to remove without the use of gasoline or chloro- form. Pomade is valueless in the tare of the rifle; pomade is of use only in the burnishing and polishing of brasses and coppers, and even then it is not as good as "Polishine", Never, under any circumstances, should a recruit l)e permitted to THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 57 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. use ernory paper on any part of his rifle — the use of the burnisher likewise should be prohibited. In the place of emory paper or the burnisher an ordinary rubl)er eraser will be found very serviceable. The Bayonet. A The bayonet need not be taken apart in order to clean it. With a small stick — small enough to be used inside the cut for the scabbard catch, hook and clearance cut — an oily rag and a rubber eraser, the bayonet can be thoroughly cleaned. The rawhide cover of the bayonet scabbard should be washed once a month with castile soap and water, then rub a small quantity of leather dressing all over and into the leather with a brush, sponge or rag; then wipe with a damp rag or sponge. This will remove all dirt and stains. Allow to dry and next apply a light coat of some cream paste. Wait a moment for this to dry, then polish with a clean brush or rag. The metallic parts require nothing but an occasional wiping off with an oily rag — these parts should then be dried. Are enlisted men allowed to take their arms apart? B No, not unless they have the permission of a commissioned officer, and even then only under proper supervision and in the manner prescribed in the descriptive pamphlet issued by the Ordnance Department. (Except when repairs are needed, the following named parts should never be dismounted by the soldier, and whenever they are taken apart they should be re- moved only by the artificer, or some one else familiar with the handling of tools and delicate mechanisms: Bolt stop, cut off, safety lock, sleeve lock, front sight, front sight movable stud, lower band, upper band and stacking swivel screws. Unless the screw driver is handled carefully and with some skill the screws are sure to be injured either at the head or thread.) Is the polishing of blued and browned parts permitted f C No, and rebluing, rebrowning, putting any portion of an arm in fire, removing a receiver from a barrel, mutilating any part by firing or otherwise, and attempting to beautifj'- or change the finish, are prohibited. However, the prohibition of attempts to beautify or change the finish of arms, is not construed as forbidding the application of raw linseed oil to the wood parts of arms. This oil is considered necessary for the preservation of the w^ood, and it may be used for such polishing as can be given when rubbing in one or more coats when necessary. The use of raw linseed oil only is allowed for redressing and the appli- 58 CHAPTER VL cation for such purpose of any kind of wax or varnish, including heelball, is strictly prohibited, Is the use of tompions 1 in small arms permitted? No, it is prohibited by regulations. Should pieces he unloaded before being taken to quarters or tents? Yes, unless it is otherwise ordered. They should also be unloaded as soon as the men using them are relieved from duty. Should a loaded or unloaded rifle or revolver ever be pointed at anyone in play? No, sir; under no circumstances whatsoever. A soldier should never point a rifle or a revolver at a person unless he intends to shoot him. NOTES. A It is easier to prevent than to remove rust. Oil to be used only to remove rust or after firing or when going out in damp weather. When occasion for its use has passed, it should be carefully wiped off, so as not to collect dust and sand. To remove rust, apply oil with rag and let it stand for awhile so as to soften rust — weapon then wiped clean with dry rag. Emery paper should never be used to remove rust. To prevent dust and rust in bore, a good strong gun string should be fre- quently used. All articles of brass to be kept brightly polished. Never put away arms and equipment before cleaning. Emery paper, burnisher and sand are used only on sabers, bayonets, mess kits and other bright metal. Under no circumstances should they ever be used on blued or browned metal. Cosmic oil and emery paper may generally be gotten from the company quar- termaster-sergeant. Polishine, burnisher, chamois skin, machine oil ("3-in-l") and button stick must be bought by the soldier. (Usually obtainable from the Post Exchange.) B Russet Leather Equipment. To preserve the life of russet leather equipments they should be cleaned whenever dirt, grit or dust has collected on them or when they have become saturated with the sweat of a horse. In cleaning them the parts should first be separated and each part sponged, using a lather of castile soap and warm water. When nearly dry a lather of Crown soap and warm water should be used. If the equipment is cared for frequently this method is sufficient; but if the leather has become hard and dry a 1 Wooden stoppers or plugs that are put into the muzzles of rifles and other arms to keep out dirt and water. THE NONCOMMISSIONED OFFICER IN 59 CHARGE OF RECRUITS. little neatsfoot oil should be applied after washing with castile soap. When the oil is dry the equipments should be sponged lightly with Crown soap and water, which will remove the surplus remaining on the surface. If a polish is desired a thin coat of russet leather polish issued by the Ordnance Department should be applied and rubbed briskly with a dry cloth. Particular care should be taken not to use too much Crown soap or water, as the result will be detrimental to the life of the leather. In no case should leather be dipped in water or be placed in the sun to dry. (Cir. 59, '07). Special care should be taken to use as little water as possible and in applying the lather of soap and warm water to have the sponge moistened only. A Camp Equipment. The shelter tent half should never be scrubbed with soap and brush — the lye in the soap eats the fibre, thus causing the tent to leak. Rinsing in cold water will accomplish all that is necessary and never render the tent unserviceable. All articles of equipment, viz : the shelter tent half, haversack, canteen, field belt and suspenders should be neatly marked, with the letter of the company, number of the regiment and company number of man in whose possession the articles are placed and when turned in and re-issued this number should become the number of the man to whom they are issued. The soldier is thus inspired to neatness by the fact that his eye falls upon a neatly marked set of equipments and he will give accordingly more care to his equipment. The pins and pole should be washed in hot water — never scraped— immediately upon return from a march where they have been used. The mess pan, tin cup, knife, fork and spoon should be sterilized in hot water after each meal in camp and weekly in garrison. Ashes, sapolio etc., should never be used, as this cuts the tin coating; as a con- sequence of which rust will in a short time appear. THIRD TEN DAYS Guard Duty. B Instruction in the duties of sentinels by recitation in the Manual of Guard Duty and practical illustrations of posting sentinels, saluting on post, challenging, eac. (See Chapter XIII, "Guard Duty"). 60 CHAPTER VI. Repetition of such parts of previous instruction as may be necessary. (This Chapter, Chapter XII, "Military Courtesy," Chapter XIII, "Guard Duty," Chapter XVII, "Care of the Health and First Aid to the Sick and Injured," and Chapter XVIII, "The Use, Description and Man- agement of the Rifle," are published in their entirety as parts of "PRI- VATES' MANUAL." Price, 50 cts. a copy. A liberal discount on quan- tity. General Agent for U. S. : The U. S. Infantry Association, Washing- ton, D. C. ; for the Philippines, The Post Exchange, Fort Wm. McKinley). THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 61 CHAPTER VII. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional mattet and changes, if any.) A Relations With the Adjutant. The Sergeant-Major's relations with the Adjutant are close and confidential, and he should give the Adjutant his entire, unqualified support. His loyalty should be abso- lute, and under no circumstances should he ever, by act or word, directly or indirectly, criticise the action of the Adjutant, nor should he ever, under any condition, talk outside about the official business of the office — this is not only unbusiness-like and unmilitary, but it is also a betrayal of official confidence which almost invariably leads to trouble. As the Adjutant is the Commanding Officer's mouthpiece in communicating with the officers and enlisted men of the command, so is the Sergeant-Major the Adjutant's mouthpiece in transmitting orders and instructions through the First Sergeants. Any directions that he may give to the First Sergeants are obeyed just as if they came from the Adjutant himself. Find out how the Adjutant wants the work done and then follow his ideas without question. As the Adjutant should try to anticipate the wishes of the Commanding Officer and then act accordingly, so should the Sergeant- Major try to anticipate the wishes of the Adjutant. B Dress and Bearing. In neatness and correctness of dress and in soldierly bearing, he should be faultless, setting an example to the rest of the enlisted men of the command. He should try to be the most military soldier in the command. He should cultivate soldierly qualities, and be just, pleasant and courteous to everyone. He should be especially careful not to show favoritism in his dealings with the First Sergeants. C Necessary Knowledge. An efficient Sergeant-Major must know the Army Regulations, the Drill Regulations, the Manual of Guard Duty and so much of the Courts-Martial Manual and the other manuals as pertains to his duties. He should read carefully all ^^'ar Depart- 62 ( IIAPTER VII. nieiit, Division, Department and other orders and circulars that may be received. He should try to be the best informed soldier in the command, A General Duties. Under the direction of the Adjutant he pre- pares all orders, makes all reports and . returns, keeps all records and rosters affecting enlisted men and has charge of all correspond- ence pertaining to the office. He is assisted in this work by as many clerks as may be necessary. In the clerks' office he is the representative of the Adjutant and his orders must be obeyed without question. For the duties of Coast Artillery Sergeants-Major, see Sup. Chap. XXni, Par. 56. B Usual Duties. In practice the usual duties of a Sergeant-Major in a well-regulated office are about as follows: He keeps the Army Regulations posted and every Monday morning .places on the Adjutant's desk for signature all books re- quiring the signature of the Adjutant or the commanding officer. Should either of these officers go on leave or be ordered to a new station, he should see that all books are presented to them for signature before they leave. All orders and communications of a routine nature for or ganization commanders are delivered to the First Seargeants at First Sergeants' Call. However, communications, etc., of an important nature or requiring action without delay, are delivered direct to the officer by the orderly and duly signed for. Orders, circulars, etc., of a routine nature that are to be shown to officers are sent around before noon. Officers indicate by writing their initials on back of paper that they have seen same. C A receipt is obtained for all communications delivered to officers, for which purpose a delivery book ruled as follows is "used: SUBJECT WHEN RECEIVED INITIALS OF HOUR DATE RECEIVER Capt. A. Smith, Com- Detail for Officer of missary 24th Inf. the Day, Dec. 9, '03. 12.00 M. Dec. 8, '03 A. S. Lieut. I. C. Jones Com. No. 1219, Par. 9, S. 0., C. S. Post G. 0. 312, W. D. 1906. 1.15 p. M. Dec. 8, '03 I. C. J. D A check is kept on all communications that are to be returned to or through the office, or that are to be answered. This may be THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 63 done by means of the Adjutnat's "Tickler" (see page 92), or a memorandum book, ruled as follows: NUMBER OF COMMUNICATION TO WHOM DELIVERED OR MAILED TO BE RE- TURNED OR ANSWERED BY RETURNED OR ANSWERED 100 Capt. Jones Jan. 5. Jan. 10. Jan. 8 The Sergeant-Major regulates daily all clocks in the office, obtaining the correct time, when practicable, from the Western Union or the Postal Telegraph office. In case of officers casually at post, the dates of arrival and departure are entered on the Morning Report. The daily maximum and minimum temperature, obtained from the Morning Report of the Hospital Corps Detachment, is noted on the Morning Report. In case of change in the uniform in which the old guard is to march off, the Sergeant-Major causes the old and new officers of the day to be notified. A record is kept of all blank forms, pamphlets, etc., sent from the office. Whenever a letter is written, an order published, a communica- tion received or verbal instructions given, requiring future action on the part of the office, or someone else to or through the office, a check is made against such action. All books, pamphlets, etc., should be plainly marked, "Adjutant's Office," or "Office of Commanding Officer," as the case may be, and no books, pamphlets, maps or records of any description should be taken from the office without the permission of the Adjutant, and in every case the article should be charged against the proper person. He has immediate charge of all property at post headquarters that is held on memorandum receipt by the Adjutant, and he takes an inventory of same once every quarter. If soldiers of other commands, especially those of other arms of the service or of the staff corps, are casually at a post, the Sergeant- Major should make it his special business to see that they are properly 64 CHAPTER VII. cared for. Very often there is a tendency to "run it" on casuals, especially if they belong to another branch of the service. (Casuals reporting at a post are assigned to organizations for rations and quarters by the Sergeant-Major. It is a good idea to have a casual company for one month and then change to another company.) "CUSTOMS OF THE SERVICE" AFFECTING THE ADJUTANT'S OFFICE Enlisted men and civilian attaches desiring to speak to the commanding officer, first see the Adjutant. It is also the prevailing custom for officers, except members of the staff, who wish to see the commanding officer at his office, first to address themselves to the adjutant, older officers by usually ask- ing, "Is the commanding officer occupied?", and younger officers, "May I see the commanding officer?" In some commands it is customary for enlisted men who wish to speak to the Adjutant to see first the Sergeant-Major, who informs the Adjutant. The Adjutant wears his saber when placing officers in arrest. Before detailing men on special or extra duty, it is customary to ascertain from their company commander whether there are any military reasons why the details should not be made, and in other cases, unless by roster, orders should not specify individuals by name, e. g., "The Commanding Officer, Co. 'A', 24th Infantry, will send a detachment consisting of one noncommissioned officer and six privates, etc." Officers not under arms usually remove their caps upon entering the Adjutant's Office. This is proper not only because one gentle- man should always remove his cap upon entering the office of another, but the Adjutant's Office is, in effect, the commanding officer's office. Regarding officers returning from drills, courts-martial, etc., with side arms, the prevailing custom seems to be for them to remove their caps upon entering the office of the Adjutant. It is not usual for the officer of the day to remove his cap while in the Adjutant's Office on business not connected with his duties as officer of the day, although some officers make it a rule to do so. If in the commanding officer's office and the official relations are relaxed, the prevailing custom is to remove the cap. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 65 The expression often used in orders to "report to the com- manding officer" means to "report to the Adjutant," regardless of the relative rank of the officer reporting and the Adjutant. When an officer of the command is appointed Brigadier- General, a sergeant (in some regiments a corporal) is ordered with- out delay to report to him for duty as orderly as long as he is in the post. When a general officer comes to a post, a sergeant is at once ordered to report to him for duty as orderly. (In some regiments a sergeant reports as orderly to a Major General and a- corporal to a Brigadier-General). Whenever an inspector visits a post, a private reports to him as orderly. BUSINESS ROUTINE OF THE OFFICE Everything about the Adjutant's Office should be indicative of system, order and neatness, and the business of the office should be transacted in a prompt, systematic and business-like manner. The duties of the sergeant-major, the clerks, the telephone orderly, the janitor, and all others connected with the office should be clearly defined and everyone made to live up to the requirements thereof. While the Sergeant-Major should not try to do everything himself, he should not trust too much to his clerks. He should systematize the work of the office and so distribute it among his subordinates, that all will have an equal share, overseeing and verify- ing everything himself as far as possible. Hold each man strictly responsible for the work assigned him. Regulations similar to the following should be printed or typewritten, posted in the office and strictly enforced: CLERKS 1 All clerks and other persons on duty in the Adjutant's Office are prohibited from furnishing any information whatever on subjects pertaining to the business thereof. 2 The office hours for the clerks will be from 7:30 a. m. to 12 M., and from 1:30 to 5:00 p. m. All clerks will report promptly at 7:30 a. m. and 1:30 p. m. In case of emergency the work will be pushed through without regard to hours. 66 CHAPTER VII. 3 Only the necessary office work for that day will be done on Sundays and holidays, and in the absence of work requiring immediate attention, the clerks will be excused on holiday afternoons. 4 No clerk will leave the office without first obtaining per- mission from the senior noncommissioned officer present, reporting his destination and probable duration of absence. 5 All bells will be answered promptly. In case of the absence of the clerk rung for, the next junior in rank shall answer the call. The bell calls are as follows: 6 Loud talking, whistling, singing and other unnecessary noises are forbidden. While the Sergeant-Major should be firm with his clerks and other subordinates, he should always treat them with proper consideration. Do not make drudges of them. By being considerate, fair and courteous, yet firm, you will get more work and better service out of them. MUSICIAN OF THE GUARDi I Immediately after marching on guard the musician of the new guard will proceed to the Adjutant's Office, reporting to the Adjutant: "Sir, Musician, , Company, , re- ports as musician of the new guard." After having received his in- At some posts, all calls are sounded through a megaphone, resting on a ver- tical, revolving axis. 1 The Musician of the Guard, especially at small posts, is often employed as orderly in the Adjutant's Office.' THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 67 structions from the Adjutant, he will relieve the musician of the old guard, receiving from him any special instructions that he may have. 2 After having been relieved by the musician of the new guard, the musician of the old guard will report to the Adjutant, "Sir. Musician, , Company, , reports having been re- lieved as musician of the old guard". J The musician of the guard will sound the first call for all formations, schools of instruction, etc., except for reveille, as follows: First On the parade ground, about fifty yards in front of the Adjutant's Office. Second At such place or places as those concerned can hear the call. The Assembly will be sounded about fifty yards in front of the Adjutant's Office. 4 The musician of the guard will remain at the Adjutant's Office from the time he marches on until taps, and from breakfast until the time he marches off. 5 The sounding of all calls will be regulated by the clock in the Adjutant's Office. 6 The bells will be answered promptly and in case the musi- cian of the guard be absent, his bell will be answered by the janitor. In the absence of the janitor, his call will be answered by the musi- cian of the guard. The musician's call is one long ring; the janitor's one long and one short. 7 All communications will be delivered promptly, and the ini- tials of the receiver obtained in the delivery book, with the hour and date of receipt. 8 Except in urgent cases, communications will not be delivered to officers in the afternoon or at any time while they are at meals. 9 The musician of the guard will at all times wear the uniform of the guard. 10 The instructions of the commanding officer's orderly re- garding the receipt and delivery of messages will also be observed by the musician of the guard. See "Musicians of the Guard," page 195. TELEPHONE CLERK / The telephone clerk will sleep in the telephone office. 2 He will be in the office from immediately after breakfast until noon, and from 1 :00 p. m. until supper. 68 CHAPTER VII. 3 The musician of the guard will remain in the telephone office and answer all calls, from supper until taps. (Between taps and rev- eille, the main telephone should be connected with the telephone in the guard house, so that the post may be gotten at once any time during the night). 4 Just before going to dinner, the telephone clerk will report to the sergeant-major who will designate one of the clerks to remain in the telephone office until 1:00. 5 In case of going on pass, the telephone clerk will give the sergeant-major due notice, to the end that one or more of the clerks may be designated to look after the telephone. 6 All the metal parts of the telephone instruments will be pol- ished and kept bright. 7 All official messages received will be repeated back to the sender, and all messages sent will be repeated back to the telephone clerk. 8 The names of all persons receiving official messages at the other end of the line will be noted on the messages. 9 In case of any trouble with the line or the instruments, the Signal Officer will be notified at once. 10 In case anyone wishes to speak to some member of the gar rison, the telephone clerk will fill out a notification slip and turn the same over to the sergeant-major for delivery. (FORM) TELEPHONE OFFICE Fort Harrison, Mont. Time Mr Telephone No wishes to speak to // Telephone calls will be answered promptly and all business, official and unofficial, will be transacted with courtesy. 12 Enlisted men are prohibited from smoking in the telephone office. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 69 13 The telephone clerk will leave the office and close the door when the telephone is being used by an officer, or a member of an officer's family. 14 His bell call is two short rings. JANITOR I He will look after the furnace and have general charge of the policing of the Administration Building, keeping the offices of the com manding officer, the adjutant, the quartermaster and the sergeant- major in a clean and orderly condition. ..^ The desks in particular will be kept in a neat and orderly condition, and care will be taken not to misplace any papers that it may be necessary to move. J The offices will be in proper condition by 7:30 a. \r. 4 The lavatory and water closet will be thoroughly cleaned daily; special attention being given to the urinals. Brass door knobs, metal parts of urinals, etc., will be kept polished, and the window panes will be kept clean. 5 Great care against accident will be exercised in operating the furnace. 6 The temperature will be noted frequently, and the offices and other rooms will be properly ventilated, lowering the windows from the top. 7 The janitor will go to his meals 30 minutes before mess call. 8 His bell call is one long and one short ring. PAPER WORK AND CORRESPONDENCE (See "Paper-Work," page 154). A / Keep your Army Regulations posted up to date^ and get into the habit of referring to them whenever there comes up a new matter, or one concerning which the slightest doubt exists, always analyzing the paragraphs involved and taking special care to see that all their requirements are fulfilled. For instance, in case of an application for appointment as ordnance sergeant see: (a) Whether the applicant has served at least eight years in the army; including four years as a noncommissioned officer. 1 It is suggested that you subscribe to "ARMY ALTERATIONS," a quarterly publication published by the Franklin Hudson Publishing Co., Kansas City, Mo., which will keep posted up to date your Army Regulations, Manual of Guard Duty, Drill Regulations and fourteen other War Department publications. 70 CHAPTER VII. (b) If he is less than 45 years of age. (c) That the appHcation is in the applicant's handwriting. (d) That the application states the length and nature of mili- tary service, and for what time and in what organization service has been rendered as a noncommissioned officer. (e) That the company commander has indorsed on the ap- plication the character of the applicant and his opinion as to his intelligence and fitness for the position. 2 When a communication has been returned through the Adju- tant's Office to an officer for certain data, analyze carefully all indorse- ments and see that all the information called for is furnished before the paper is returned to higher authority. 3 Whenever reference is made to certain paragraphs in the Army Regulations or to certain orders, invariably look up the para- graphs or orders referred to. 4 In the case of correspondence with officers under the com- mand of the commanding officer, papers are always signed by the Adjutant, and if some such expression as "The Commanding Officer desires," etc., or "I am directed by the Commanding Officer," etc., does not appear in the body of the communication, then the letter should end, for example, "By order of Major Jones: John A. Smith 1st Lieut., 1st Infantry, Adjutant. Communications to superiors or to other post commanders are signed by the commanding officer. 5 In practice, whether communications forwarded, referred or transmitted to civilians, especially the civil authorities, are signed by the commanding officer or the Adjutant, depends upon circumstances. In case of ordinary inquiries, etc., from civilians, the Adjutant usually signs the answer, omitting "By order," etc. Communications ad- dressed to the civil authorities are generally signed by the command- ing officer — answers to clerks or other subordinates being signed by the Adjutant, omitting "By order," etc. Some commanding officers, however, follow the rule of signing all communications addressed to parties not under their command or direction. A recruiting officer so far as his rendezvous and party are con- cerned exercises command correlative with that of a post com- mander — consequently, communications forwarded, referred or trans- mitted to recruiting officers not under the direction of the commanding officer, should be signed by the commanding officer. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 71 6 While Adjutant of the Post of Manila, with a permanent garrison of about two thousand soldiers, the author used rubber stamps extensively and followed with great success the excellent, business-like provisions of G. O. 39, Headquarters Division of the Philippines, 1902: "In referring papers the usual form of indorse- ment will be omitted, except when special instructions are necessary. For example, a communication indorsed by stamp or in writing, *To the Quartermaster,' 'To the Surgeon,' To the Commanding Officer, Co.' — ',' etc.,' preceded by the usual caption, showing source from which it emanates or comes, and date, is sufficient indication, direc- tion and authority without signature, for action by the officer to whom it is referred, the presumption being that it would not be sent to him unless the subject matter was within his knowledge and he is able to promote the inquiry, furnish the information or explain the facts indicated by the character and context of the communication. When reference is merely for the purpose of giving information, 'the paper to be returned,' the notation will be framed accordingly and the paper may be 'Returned, contents noted,' without signature, the office stamp or caption being presumptive evidence that the communi- cation has been seen by the proper officer." By following this system in all routine indorsements of trans- mission, return, etc., the clerical work of an office can be greatly re- duced and simplified. Instead of saying, for example. Respectfully forwarded to the commanding officer, 24th Infantry, for transmission to the Commanding Officer, Co. 'A,' 24th Infantry. By order of Col- onel McKibbin: Jas. A. Moss, Adjutant, 24th Infantry. Adjutant," (31 words), say "To the Commanding Officer, 24th Infantry, for trans- mission" (8 words), using two rubber stamps — "To the Commanding Officer, 24th Infantry" and "for transmission." Have rubber stamps reading "for remark," "for necessary action," to note and return." However, whenever special instructions are to be given, the in- dorsement should be signed "By order," etc. 7 Never submit any paper to the Adjutant for his signature or that of the Commanding Officer: First Unless you have carefully scrutinized the same and have famaliarized yourself with every paragraph in the Regulations and every order that may be referred to in the communication. Second Unless you know that all orders and Regulations on the subject have been complied with. The safest plan is to look up 72 CHAPTER VII. invariably the Regulations on the subject, and see that all conditions required have been fulfilled, especially regarding allowances, etc., in case of estimates and requisitions. 8 Never assume that reports, returns and other papers that may be submitted to your office, are correct — always check them up. Especially should the company morning reports be carefully checked up, so that errors can not get into the consolidated report. 9 In case of requisitions, estimates, clothing schedules, etc., see that all dates have been filled in and that the Commanding Officer's rank has been entered below where he is to sign. 10 Never correct mistakes over an officer's signature. 11 Attend personally to the distribution of all orders and to the mailing of all orders and communications. (In large posts this is not practicable). Keep lists of the individuals and the organizations that should receive copies of various orders and so systematize the process of dis- tribution as to eliminate the possibility of errors. 12 Have a good, common-sense system for filing papers; keep- ing books, blanks, etc., so that you can always place your hand, at once on any paper, book or blank desired. It is astonishing how much time is lost in hunting for papers. 13 It often happens that minor errors in reports, returns and other communications from organization commanders can be corrected by the First Sergeants at First Sergeants' Call. Not only does this save paper-work for both the Adjutant's Office and the company office, but it also expedites the transaction of business. 14 The Sergeant-Major should never delegate to anyone else the running of the duty roster — he should always attend to that himself. 75 A Mailing Book, in which cverythmg mailed from the office is recorded. A blank book of suitable size, ruled like this, will answer: Date Communication To Whom Feby. 3 Muster rolls, Post N Hospital Corps Det., N. C. S. and Band C and D. . C. S. Regtl. and Cos. A, B, A. G., U. S. A. Feby. 4 Doc. 40 A. G., Dept. Feby. 5 G. 0. 10, Regtl. A. G. Dept., and all companies and officers away from headquarters. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 7Z All mailing matter should be mailed the same day as signed b}^ the Adjutant or the Commanding Officer. The mailing book should be kept in connection with, and as a check on, the Document File. In large posts where communications are numerous, the only entry made in the column ''Communication,'* of the mailing book, is, "Doc. 40, 41, etc.," the nature of the conmiuni- cation being ol)taincd by reference. i6 Record of Officers and Enlisted Men. In large pc>sts a system of having a card, with ])r()per remarks, for every officer, has been found to be an excellent means of keeping a handy record of the commissioned personnel of the command. These cards are kept in a box, alphabetically arranged, and are grouped as follows: (a) Present; (b) Casuals; (c) On leave; (d) On D. S. They are "posted" from day to day. The same plan may be used for keeping a record of the enlisted personnel in a large post, except that the cards would not be grouped. Whenever a soldier leaves the command by death, discharge, deser- tion or transfer, his card is transferred to another box — the "dead business" box. A system of this kind in a large post is especially convenient in answering the numerous inquiries that are continually received about soldiers. (Sample of Card) (3x5 inches) NAME ^^ Groot, Cornelius. [Surname first] R^G'T 13th Infantry qq ^^G^^ REMARKS: Discharged (purchase) March 4, 1909, per Par. 20, S. O. 45, W. D. 1909. 7/ And last, but not least, always keep your work up to date, never putting off until tomorrow what you can do today. 74 CHAPTER VII. The following compact, handy, business-like arrangement of desks, trays, etc., with some slight modifications, and the methodical way of transacting business, were devised by Regimental Sergeant-Major George H. Middagh, 5th U. S. Cavalry, and is used by him in his work. The ofiice is handled in every detail by three men, and each attends all the drills that his position demands, all of which shows what can be accomplished by system and the use of labor-saving devices. X- XX- XXX- XXXX- XXXX-a- A- B- C- CC- D- DD- E- EE- G- H- I- J- K, K', K", K"'- L- M- N- O- P- Q- -Regimental Sergeant-Major's desk. -Squadron Sergeant-Major's desk. -Clerk: (delivery. Summary Court and copying). -1st Sergeant's table (for morning reports). -Bulletin Board. -Drawer (hold-over). -Drawer (pens, ink, rubber stamps, etc.) -Order file rack (Regt'l., W. D., Dept. etc.) -Same for post. -Typewriter table (Regimental Headquarters). -Typewriter table (Post Headquarters). -Typewriter (Regimental Headquarters). -Typewriter (Post Hearquarters). -Telephone receiver and transmitter. -Telephone. -Calendar. -Adjutant's "Tickler." -Wire baskets. -Revolving chairs. -Delivery tray. -4 tray cabinet (muster rolls, officers' records, .etc.) -4 tray cabinet (Regimental returns). -4 tray cabinet (Doc, A. R. and Manuals). -Index of all current orders and circulars. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 75 In the morning, on arrival at office, 8 a. ni., X arranges cards in J, then changes dates in stamps. XX arranges cards in J', removes papers from morning reports to K, then consolidates the reports, places troop reports on XXXX, makes out detail, posts on XXXX-a. Then he takes up unfinished work, i. e., arranging data for the monthly returns, reports, etc. (This position demands a good steady man, with interest in his work. In this case it is filled by a squadron sergeant-major.) X goes over papers in K, placing them in their different positions for action — for stamping date of receipt and briefing, on D; for entry, with correspondence book; and when finished returns them to K, when he goes over the hold-over, A, containing work he finished after de- parture of the Commanding Officer and the Adjutant, on previous day, and places it in K. When the morning report is consolidated XX places it on X. X checks the report,- noting changes of officers, etc. on cards kept for the purpose, places the papers in K with the consolidated morning report, which he then takes to the Adjutant's desk, receives his orders and empties the "out basket" and returns to X. 15 minutes before First Sergeants' Call, X removes the delivery tray, M. to XXX, who makes out the delivery slip (book is not used) and places it for signature of the ist Sergants. At 4.00 o'clock p. m., XXX opens all doors and windows, and thoroughly sweeps and dusts the office. The other offices are cleaned by trumpeters. There should be an additional noncommissioned officer detailed as regimental clerk, and to remain permanently with headquarters as a kind of "understudy" to X and XX, so as to take the place of either in case of absence. XXX should be the teacher of enlisted men's school, so as to be paid for his labor. THE CORRESPONDENCE BOOK The Correspondence Book is the book used by all administra- tive units and officers below department headquarters* for the purpose of making a record of every item of correspondence that should be recorded. *The card-record system is authorized for Department and Division Headquar- ters and is explained in a pamphlet issued by the War Department, January 7, 1904. Upon application, the card system is, under certain conditions, authorized for a post headquarters. — G. O. 92, '09. 76 CHAPTER VII. A In connection with the Correspondence Book is kept a Docu- ment File which contains: / The original documents or communica- tions that may be retained, and carbon, letter-press or other copies of all letters, indorsements or telegrams that may be or may have been sent in regard to the same. 2 Copies of all letters, indorsements or telegrams originating in the office. B General Remarks. First of all, the printed instructions on the inside front cover of the Correspondence Book should be carefully read and digested and an understanding of the system involved should be acquired. It should be borne in mind the object of this book is to enable the future seeker for information to obtain it with ease, exactness and completeness. C Entries in the Correspondence Book. Each entry consists of: / The seriel book number. 2 The date of receipt. S The name of the writer. 4 A very brief synopsis of the subject. 5 Notation of number of inclosures, if any. (If any inclosures are added, withdrawn or filed in the office, the fact should be stated. In case of very important inclosures, copies should be made and filed.) 6 The action taken on the paper. D In recording the names of commanding officers or staff officers • only the official designation, and not the personal name, should be en- tered. Thus, "The Adjutant General, Dept. of California," not "Major John R. Jones, Adjutant General, Dept. of California." The synopsis includes the date and place, but the location of Division, Department Headquarters, etc., whose locations are fixed, need not be entered. "HQ Dept Calif," for instance, would be suf- ficient. The location of a regimental headquarters, however, would be entered, as it is not a fixed place. E Good briefing is very rare. As a rule, the tendency is to in- clude too much in the synopsis. It is impossible to lay down any exact rules as to what should or should not be included in the synop- sis — judgment must be used in deciding, but much can be done by thought and care. The action always shows the disposition made of the paper and includes the date of reference, transmission, forwarding or return. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 77 No communication should he entered a second time, unless, for special reasons, it should become necessary or desirable to transfer a remote entry to one of current date, or unless additional space should be required to continue the record. If a communication that has al- ready been entered be returned, "Received Back (such date)," and other necessary data should be added to the previous entry. How- ever, should it become necessary to enter the same communication a second time, the second entry should be headed, "Continued from page " Indorsements must not be entered in the Correspondence Book, but merely a notation ("Doc") of fact of entry in the Document File should be made, copies of the indorsements being entered in this file. To enter in full in the Document File all indorsements on a paper reaching the office, would be a useless cumbering of records and a waste of labor. Only indorsements of an important nature should be entered in full. Common sense and good judgment must be used. For instance, mere routine indorsements of reference that have no material bearing on the case, should not be entered, and, as a rule, even indorsements bearing on the case, can be greatly condensed. Example: 4th Indorsement War Department, Washington, 1 January, 1906 Respectfully returned to the Commanding General, Dept of Dakota, approved. By order of the Secretary of War: H. P. McCain, Adjutant General. 5th Indorsement HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF DAKOTA, St. Paul, Minn., 3 Jany., 1906. Respectfully transmitted to the Commanding Officer, Fort Missoula, Montana. By command of Brigadier-General Bubb : ALBERT TODD, Major and Adjutant General. 6th Indorsement POST OF FORT MISSOULA, MONTANA, 6 Jany., 1906. Respectfully transmitted to the Commanding Officer, Co. "A," 24th Infantry. By order of Major Smith: JOHN A. MOORE, 1st Lieutenant, 24th Infantry, Adjutant. 78 CHAPTER VII. Simply the following entries would be necessary in the Post Correspondence Book: Reed back 4 Jany '06. Transmitted C O Co "A," 24 Inf 5 Jany '06. "Doc." The following entries in the Document File would be sufficient: W D 1 Jany '06, Appd; HQ D Dak 3 Jany '06, Transmtd. However, copies of indorsements of a material nature should be filed in full in the Document File whether or not they originate in the office and proper notation of fact of filing made in the Corre- spondence Book. A Cross Reference. By cross reference is meant the notation of records so that all other records connected therewith will be indicat- ed sufficiently for reference, each as to all others. B Annotation is the noting of numbers, dates, memoranda, etc., of other records and other data as to inclosures, action, etc., necessary to a complete chain of reference. Inclosures to certain indorsements are marked, 'Tnc. 1, 1st Indt.," "Inc. 1, 2nd Indt.," etc. Every inclosure received with a paper is stamped with the same office mark and number as the paper itself. If any inclosures are added, withdrawn or filed, the proper notation should be made below the indorsement of the office making the addition, abstraction, or filing. The office numbers of letters, or of important indorsements re- ceived from the AGO, Auditor's Office, Dept. HQ, etc., should be noted. C Every office should be provided with a rubber stamp for stamp- ing papers with date of receipt and office number. The stamp of an office inferior to that of a department headquarters should be simple in design. The following, for instance, is suggested for a company: No. Co. "A" 24th Infty. Rec'd Received Back (Actual Size.) ("Received Back," is a separate stamp which is used, of course, only when the paper has been received back.) These office marks should follow the indorsement made in the company office and not be placed at the top of the first fold or some THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 79 other conspicuous place, such places being reserved for the AGO Div. HQ, Dept. HQ, etc. Whenever a paper is received back, "Received back (such date)," is noted at the bottom of the indorsements which sent it out. In case of any inclosures, the "Received Back" notation should show definitely what original inclosures are received back with the paper and also what new inclosures, if any. Thus, "Received Back, 5 Jany., '06. Original Inclosures 1 and 3 — 2 inclosures 1st Indt. and 1 Inc., 2d Indt." Abbreviations. In order to save labor and space, abbreviations, with periods generally omitted, should be used as much as possible, but proper judgment must be exercised and care taken not to sacrifice clearness to abbreviation. AGO USA— AGO D Dak— Ch Stf P Div— Ch QM Dept Dak — HQ 24 Inf — are correct, because clear. D Cal may be mistaken for D Col and vice versa — hence D Calif and D Colo should be used. In this as in all other matters pertaining to records, it should be borne in mind that the entries should be perfectly clear to those delving into them in the future. ORDERS Orders are numbered serially beginning with the year or the establishment of a new command. It is customary to note on the first number of a new series the last number of the preceding series. Thus "G. O. No. 192 is the last of the 1904 series," would be noted on the first of the 1905 series. Whenever a corrected order is issued, the following should be written at the top of every copy, "Corrected Copy; please destroy copies previously sent." If for any reason a serial number should be skipped — i. e. the order be not issued — it is customary to publish a skeleton order so as to make the file complete. For example, if G. O. No. 52, Headquar- ters Department of California, should not be issued, the following would be published: HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF CALIFORNIA, San Francisco, California, 12 May, 1906. General Orders, No. 52. Not Issued. 80 CHAPTER Vll. For the general principles regarding orders see the Field Service Regulations. The following are the usual forms of garrison orders: Assuming Command Fort Missoula, Mont., 1 January, 1906. General Orders, No. 1. The undersigned hereby assumes command of Fort Missoula, Montana. JOHN R. SMITH, Major, 1st Infantry. (In case a stafif is to be announced, the order would continue, "and announces the following staff: Adjutant , Quartermaster " etc.) Fourth of July Fort Missoula, Mont., 3 July, 1905. General Orders, No. 16. 1. To-morrow, July 4th, being a national holiday, all duty except the guard and necessary fatigue will be suspended. 2. At reveille the band will play national airs and the garrison flag will be hoisted to the top of the flagstaff, during which the national salute of 21 guns will be fired. 3. At 9 o'clock A. M. the command will be paraded in the form of a square and the Declaration of Independence read, after which the band will play "The Star Spangled Banner." 4. At noon the salute to the Union will be fired, consisting of one gun for every state, during which the band will play "America," "Hail Columbia" and other national airs. By order of Major Smith: JAMES A. ROSS, 1st Lieutenant, 1st Infantry, Adjutant. (For Declaration of Independence, see page 409.) Funeral. The funeral of the late John Smith, Private Co. "A," 1st Infantry, will take place to-morrow. 1st .Call, 9.50 A. M. Assembly, ten minutes later. Uniform The commanding officer Co. "A," 1st Infantry, will furnish the necessary pall- bearers and escort and is charged with all other details relating to the funeral. All officers* and enlisted men not on duty will attend. The companies will be marched to the hospital by the first sergeants and the sergeant-major will then assume command of the battalion. The flag will be displayed at half-staff from 9.50 A. m. until the remains are taken fro mthe post. *Sometimes the order reads, "All ofificcrs are invited to attend." THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 81 Inspection. The troops of this command will be paraded for inspection to- morrow, the 2nd instant. P'ormation: Battalion, on the general parade. 1st Call, 8.20 A. M. Assembly, 8. 30 a. m. Uniformf The inspection will be preceded by a review. Immediately following the in- spection, the barracks will be inspected by the commanding ofificer. Memorial Day. To-morrow being Memorial Day, all duty except the guard and necessary fatigue will be suspended. The command will be formed at 9 o'clock a. m. and marched to the cemetery, where the following exercises will take place : 1 Dirge, by the band. 2 Prayer 3 "My Country, 'Tis of Thee," by the band. 4 "Nearer, My God, to Thee," by the band, during which the graves will be decorated with flowers. 5 "The Star Spangled Banner," by the band. 6 Benediction. 7 Taps. Uniform Muster and Inspection. The troops of this command will be inspected and mustered to-morrow, the 30th instant. Formation:* Battalion. 1st Call, 8.20 A. M. Assembly, 8.30 a. m. Uniformt All enlisted men will attend except the guard, the sick, the overseer of pris- oners, the clerks in the adjutant's office, the baker and one cook and one room orderly in every company. tin case of Cavalry, add : Arms (Rifle, saber, revolvers). Saddles (Full pack or stripped). *Or, by companies on their respective parades. The Post Noncommissioned Staff will be mustered in front of the adjutant's office and the Hospital Corps Detachment in front of the hospital. Payment. The troops of this command will be paid by Captain Smith, pay- master at 1 o'clock p. M. to-day, in the following order: 1 Hospital Corps Detachment. 2 Post Noncommissioned Staff. 3 N. C. S. and Band, 24th Infantry. 4 Company "B," 24th Infantry. 5 Company "A," 24th Infantry. 6 Company "C," 24th Infantry. 7 Company "D," 24th Infantry. Uniform tin case of Cavalry, see Inspection order. 82 CHAPTER VII. Practice March. 1 The troops of this command, except the band, the Post Noncommissioned Staff and one noncommissioned ofificer and six privates from each company to be left as guard) will proceed with ten days' rations at 7 o'clock a. m. 16 August, 1905, on the practice march prescribed by Par. 1, G. O. 2, 1905, Hdqrs. Department of Dakota. 2 The following tentage and field equipage will be allowed : 3 The surgeon, the assistant hospital steward and privates of the Hospital Corps will accompany the command. 4 The following officers will constitute the staff on the march : , Adjutant and Recruiting Officer, , Quartermaster and Commissary. , Signal Officer, Ordnance Officer and Engineer Officer. Surgeon. 5 Captain , Lieutenant , the butcher, the chief baker and the exchange steward will remain at the post. 6 For purposes of messenger service, courier duty, etc., the following named men, at their own request, will be mounted on bicycles and armed with revolvers : etc. Their blanket rolls will be carried on the wagons. 7 All men to be discharged while the troops are on the march and who do not intend to re-enlist will be left behind. Their names will be submitted to this office without delay. 8 The descriptive lists of all men remaining at the post, including those in the hospital, will be submitted to the adjutant not later than noon, August 14. 9 Men remaining behind will be attached to the band for rations. To provide for the better subsistence of the men left behind, it is suggested that company com- manders turn over to the adjutant 75 cents for each man. 10 The adjutant, quartermaster, commissary, exchange officer, post treasurer and officer in charge of the post garden will submit to this office without delay the names of the men in their respective departments who should remain at post. 11 The barracks and premises will be left .in a clean and orderly condition, and the non-commissioned officers left behind will be charged with the care and preservation of all property. Relief and Appointment of Quartermaster. Lieutenant John A. Smith, 1st Infantry, is relieved as quartermaster and will transfer all records, funds and prop- erty pertaining to that office to Captain Samuel Jones, 1st Infantry, who is hereby appointed quartermaster. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 83 Relinquishing Command. The undersigned hereby relinquishes command of the post of Fort Missoula, Montana. Washington's Birthday. Tomorrow, the 22d instant, being the Anniversary of the Birth of George Washington, all duty except the necessary guard and fatigue will be suspended at this post. The troops of the command will be paraded at 10 o'clock a. m., when the Declaration of Independence will be read. First Call, 9.50 a. m. Assembly, ten minutes later. Uniform : Habitual. CIRCULARS Fire. There will be fire drill at 3 o'clock p. m. to-day. The band quarters will be the objective. SPECIAL ORDERS. Extra Duty, (a) Detail. Private William Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, is detailed on extra duty as teamster in the Quartermaster's Department and will report at once to the quartermaster for duty. (b) Relief. Private William Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, is relieved from extra duty as teamster in the Quartermaster's Department and will report to his company commander for duty. (c) Detail and Relief. Private William Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, is detailed on extra duty as teamster in the Quartermaster's Department, vice Private Samuel King, Co. "B," 1st Infantry, who is relieved. Private Jones will report without delay to the quartermaster and Private King to his company commander. id) Retroactive. 1 Artificer Samuel Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, having been employed continuously as mechanic in the Quartermaster's Department since 1 January, 1905, is hereby detailed on extra duty as mechanic in that department, to date from that day. 2 The verbal orders of the commanding ofificer of 1 January, 1905, detailing Private Samuel Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, on extra duty as butcher in the Subsistence Department, vice Smith, relieved, are hereby confirmed and made of record as of that date. Leave of Absence, (a) Leave of absence for three days, effective 3 Octo- ber, 1905, is hereby granted 1st Lieutenant Paul Jones, 1st Infantry. (b) Leave of absence for ten days, efTective about 3 October, 1905, with permission to apply to the proper authority for an extension of ten days, is hereby granted 1st Lieutenant Paul Jones, 1st Infantry. Post Council of Administration, (a) In compliance with Par. 313, A. R., the Post Council of Administration, consisting of Captain H. C. Moon, 24th Infantry, Captain R. O. Beene, 24th Infantry, and Captain N. K. Ross, 24th Infantry, will meet at 10 o'clock a. m. to-morrow, 31 December. 84 CHAPTER VII. (b) The Post Council of Administration, consisting of, etc., will meet at 10 o'clock A. M. to-morrow, 15 December, to recommend a scale of prices at which tailoring shall be done at this post. Remittance of Summary Court Sentence, (a) The unexpired portion of the confinement part of the Summary Court sentence in the case of Private Samuel Jones, Co. "A," 1st Infantry, approved March 4, 1903, is hereby remitted and he will report to his company commander for duty. (b) The sentence in the case of Artificer Henry W. Page, Co. "C," 24th In- fantry, approved 16 October, 1902, being in excess of the maximum punishment al- lowed by law, one dollar and fifty cents (.$1..S0) of the fine imposed is hereby remit- ted and will be refunded to the soldier on next pay roll of his company. Travel, (a) In compliance with authority contained in an endorsement dated Headquarters Department of Dakota, 10 January, 1905, Corporal Charles Pickle, Company "M," 24th Infantry, will proceed to join his company at Fort Missoula, Montana. The Quartermaster's Department will furnish the necessary transportation and the Subsistence Department the necessary subsistence. The travel enjoined is necessary in the military service. (b) Pursuant to telegraphic instructions from The Adjutant General, U. S. Army, under date of 6 September, 1902, Recruit Hans Hansen, Company "I," 22nd Infantry, now at his post, will proceed to Fort Crook, Nebraska, reporting upon arrival to the Commanding Ofhcer at that post. The Quartermaster's Department will furnish the necessary transportation and the Subsistence Department will furnish in advance commutation of rations for one day at $1.50 per day, it being impracticable to furnish cooked or travel rations after the first day. The travel enjoined is necessary in the military service. (c) Pursuant to instructions from Headquarters Department of Dakota, dated January 10, 1905, Captain John A. Smith, 1st Infantry, will proceed to join his company at Fort Missoula, Montana. The travel enjoined is necessary in the military service. Fire Orders 1 The fire brigade at this post will be composed as follows: Fire Marshal AssiSTANi Fire Marshals 1 2 First Detachment Charged with extinguishing fire. Four (4) N. C. O.'s and thirty privates Co. "— ." Ladder Detail One (1) N. C. O. and fourteen (14) privates Co. "— ." THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 85 Axe and Bucket Detail One (1) N. C. O. and twelve (12) privates Co. "— ." 4 Axe men. 6 Bucket men. 2 Lantern men. Hose Carriage No. 1 Detail One (1) N. C. O. and fourteen (14) privates Co. "— ." 2 Tongue men, who act as nozzle men. 8 Drag rope men. 2 Hydrant men. 2 Couplers. Hose Carriage No. 2 Detail One (1) N. C. O. and fourteen (14) privates Co. "— ." 2 Tongue men, who act as nozzle men. 8 Drag rope men. 2. Hydrant men. 2 Couplers. Secoxd Detachment (Under the immediate command of Lieut ) Charged with preventing spread of fire to neighboring buildings. Six (6) N. C. O.'s and thirty (30) privates Co. "— ." Third Detachment (Under the immediate command of Lieut ) Charged with the rescue of property from burning or endangered buildings. Six (6) N. C. O.'s and fifty (50) privates Co. "— ." First Aid Detachment (To report to the Fire- Marshal) Two (2) members of the Hospital Corps, with litter and first aid pouches. II. The fire marshal is charged with the management of all fires which may occur at his post, and will be respected and obeyed accordingly. He will make a careful inspection of his post at least once a month, with the object of making sure that the following precautionary measures have been carried out. All chimneys thoroughly cleaned before setting up stoves and starting fires in. them for the winter. All flues and pipes examined, to see that woodwork is not exposed, that the stove-pipe apertures have proper thimbles ; that proper protection is pi"ovided where pipes pass through or into lathed and plastered walls ; that walls are protected with tin or zinc where stove-pipes pass near them and that stove- pipe joints are not drawn apart or loosened. No fire or lights (other than the stable lanterns) allowed in any stables. No fires in unoccupied buildings. That the fire apparatus is kept in good order. In case of the absence of the fire marshal, the senior assistant present will act as fire marshal and in the name of the commanding officer will call upon officers present to act as his assistants. 86 CHAPTER VII. Ill the event of the absence of the fire marshal and both assistants, the senioi officer present will act as fire marshal and in the name of the commanding officer will call upon officers present to act as his assistants. III. In case of fire the alarm will be given immediately by the person dis- covering it ; if a sentinel, by discharging his piece and calling "Fire," and adding the number of his post; if not a sentinel, by calling "Fire! Fire!" The musician of the guard will at once sound fire call, which will be taken up by the musician of the garrison. The retreat gun will be discharged by the commander of the guard. The adjutant will report to the commanding officer, the quartermaster will repair to the Q. M. Storehouse ; Post N. C. Staff officers to their respective store- houses ; sergeant-major and clerks in adjutant's office to post headquarters. The offi- cer of the day will proceed to the guard house and give such instructions as may be necessary. The post plumber, supplied with wrench and plumber tongs, and all field musicians will at once report to the fire marshal. IV. The fire marshal will be held responsible for the discipline, drill and equipment of the entire fire brigade ; he will inspect the fire apparatus once every two weeks, and will have a "Fire Drill" on or about the fifteenth of every month. V. When fire call is sounded all prisoners who may be at work under sen- tinels will at once be returned to the guard house, and, if fire is not in immediate vicinity, locked in their cells. If the fire is at the guard house, or in immediate vicinity, so that the guard house is in danger, all prisoners will be at once taken to the company barracks farthest from the fire and left there under guard. The guard, except one N. C. officer and three privates, will proceed at once to the scene of the fire and report to the fire marshal, who will instruct them as to their duty. All organizations or portions of same not mentioned above will form at their respective parade grounds and stand at ease. All organizations at such a time are subject to the orders of the fire marshal. The Quartermaster's Department will furnish the necessary equipment. All instructions necessary for the execution of this order not herein specially mentioned will be given by the fire marshal. VI. The fire apparatus will be kept at the hose house and when the alarm is given, the various details will proceed to that place immediately, obtain their appro- priate apparatus, and report to the fire marshal at the fire. Service and Roll Calls Reveille 1st Call 5.15 A. M. March 5.25 a. m. Assembly 5.30 a. m. Mess Call 5.45 a. m. (Police of barracks and premises immediately after breakfast.) Sick Call 6.30 a. m. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 87 Drill (Daily except Saturdays and Sundays) 1st Call 6.35 A. M. Assembly 6.45 a. m. Recall 7.15 a. m. Setting-up, calisthenic, athletic and gymnastic exercises under the immediate charge of the noncommissioned officers and under the superintendence of 2nd Lieu- tenant 24th Infantry. Fatigue Call ^ 7.30 a. m. Guard-Mounting Drill 1st Call 8.20 a. m. Assembly 8.30 a. m. (Daily except Saturdays and Sundays) 1st Call 9.20 a. m. Assembly 9.30 a. m. Recall . 10.15 A. M. (From Par. 114 to Par. 150, Infantry Drill Regulations, 1901.) Drill (Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays) 1st Call 10.35 A. M. Assembly 10.45 a. m. Recall 11.30 a. m. (From Par. 179 to Par. 248, Infantry Drill Regulations, 1901.) Recall from Fatigue 11.30 a. m. Drill (Tuesdays and Thursdays) 1st Call 10.35 A. M. Assembly 10.45 a. m. Recall 11.45 a. m. (From Par. 249 to Par. 367, Infantry Drill Regulations, 1901.) All company officers, except the Officer of the Day, will attend the 9.30 and the 10.45 A. M. drills and the parades. One officer will attend retreat with every company. 1st Sergeant's Call 12.00 M. Mess Call 12.15 p. m. Fatigue Call. 1.00 p. m. Recall from Fatigue S.OO p. m. Mess Call 5.30 p. m. 88 CHAPTER VII. Parade, daily except Saturdays and Sundays, 1st Call, 40 min- utes before sunset. Assembly, 30 minutes before sunset.* Retreat, Satitrdays and Sundays. 1st Call, 15 minutes before sunset. Assembly, 10 minutes later. Retreat at signal from the Adjutant. Tattoo 9.30 p. m. Call to Quarters 10.45 p. m. Taps 11.00 p. M. Saturday Inspection 1st Call 8.20 A. M. Assembly 8.30 a. m. Beginning Saturday, ,and every alternate Saturday thereafter, Inspection will he in the heavy march- ing order. Guard Mounting on Saturdays, 1st Call immediately after In- spection and Assembly 10 minutes later. Fatigue Call on Saturdays, immediately after First Call for Guard Mounting. All Extra and Special Duty Men will attend two drills each week and all inspections and ceremonies, unless excused by the commanding officer. During the drill hours the company musicians will practice under the direction of the Adjutant. Officers' School — Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, 1.30 to 2.30 p. M. Machine Gun Drill — Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, 2.40 to 3.30 p. M. Signal Drill — Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, 2.40 to 3.30 p. M. Noncommissioned Officers' School (under one of the company officers) — Mondays, Wednesdays and Fridays, 2.40 to 3.30 p. M . Church Call — Sundays, 10.30 a. m. * "Paragraph 440, Army Regulations, 1904, construed in connection with para- graph 202, Anny Regulations, means that a parade is required to be held daily, except Sundays, unless, in the opinion of the commanding officer, the weather is so inclement, or other conditions are such as to make it impracticable ; and that a parade will he held on Sunday, only when, in the opinion of the commanding officer, there is a special necessity for doing so. "The word 'parade,' as used in paragraph 440, Army Regulations, means the ceremony of parade as prescribed in the authorized drill regulations." (War Dept. Decision, May 26, 1906.) It may be added, the custom of the service is not to hold parades on Saturdays. THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 89 LABOR SAVING DEVICES AND CONVENIENCES Not only can much time and labor be saved, but also the work of the office can be greatly simplified and systematized by the use of conveniences in the way of rubber stamps, mimeographs, wire bas- kets, file cases, pigeon-hole boxes, etc. Rubber Stamps. Self-inking stamps (that is, those mounted on metal frames) are considered the most satisfactory, the impressions always being clear, clean-cut, uniform and well aligned. A clerk should be especially charged with keeping the frames oiled, the let- ters clean and the pads inked. Rubber Stamps Usually Used in an Adjutant's Office. (Required for on Form 60, Q. M. D., — Estimate for Regular Supplies.) 1. HEADQUARTERS 24TH INFANTRY, Fort Harrison, Mont. Received 2. Respectfully forwarded to the Adjutant General, Department of Dakota. 3. Respectfully returned to the Adjutant General, Department of Dakota. 4. Respectfully returned to the Chief Quartermaster, Department of Dakota. 17 SEPT., 1906 14. Fort Harrison, Mont. (Dating Stamp) Received. Respectfully forwarded to the Chief Quartermaster, Department of Dakota. Rec'd back, Hdqrs. 24th Inf. Indorsement. Fort Harrison, Mont. Colonel 24th Infantry, Commanding. Captain and Adjutant, 24th Infantry, Adjutant. APPROVED. HEADQUARTERS 24TH INFANTRY, 21. DISAPPROVED. Fort Harrison, Mont. 22. WAR DEPARTMENT 5. To the Quartermaster. 15 6. To the Commissary. 7. To the Surgeon. 16 8. To the Commanding Officer, Co. " — 24th Infantry. ," 17 9. For remark. 18 10. For transmission. 11. For necessary action. • 19 12. To note and return. 13. Indorsement. 20 Official Business. Penalty for private use, $300. Note: Rubber stamps and seals are sometimes used by some for authenticating orders at post and regimental headquarters, but there is no- authority for this and it should not be done. (Indorsement, A. G. O., Nov. 2, 1907.) 90 CHAPTER VII. The Four Basket System consists of four ordinary wire or wicker office baskets kept on the Adjutant's desk and marked: "In," "Commanding Officer," "Hold," and "Out." All mail, pass lists and other incoming matter are placed in the "In" basket. All papers requiring office marks, the typewriting of indorse- ments, or other action in the sergeant-major's office, as well as all communications ready for mailing, delivery, etc., are placed in the "Out" basket, which is emptied by the sergeant-major from time to time during office hours. The sergeant-major places in the "In" basket all papers requir- ing the signature of the commanding officer or the Adjutant. Papers for the signature or other action of the commanding of- ficer are placed in the "Commanding Officer" basket by the Adjutant. Communications which can not be acted on at once, first have entered upon them the proper office marks and are then placed in the "Hold" Basket. The contents of this basket must be examined daily. Under no circumstances should papers be allowed to lie around loose on the Adjutant's desk — each and every paper should be placed in its proper basket and made fast with a paper weight. Memorandum Slips. Whenever the Sergeant-Major thinks of something requiring action but which can not be done at the time, he should at once note the same on a piece of paper which should be placed in the "hold-over" drawer or basket. It is a very good thing for the Sergeant-Major to get into the habit of devoting two or three minutes each morning immediately after reaching his desk to think of, or recalling, things that should be done that day or at some future time and then making out the proper memorandum slips. Envelopes With Printed Addresses. If there is a printing press available, have envelopes printed with the address of The Adjutant General, U. S. A., the Adjutant General Dept., and others with whom the office has very much correspon- dence. The envelopes should be kept in a rack with properly labeled compartments. If there is no printing press available, rubber stamps may be used for the purpose. An Adjutant'r;^"Tickler." A card-system "Tickler," designed by the author to be used : Prhnarily, in connection with the prompt THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 91 rendition of all reports, returns, estimates and requisitions required of post commanders by Army Regulations and War Department Orders; Secondarily, as a suspended file, to recall at the proper time things to be done or matters to be considered at any time in the future. For example: (a) Periodical and other reports and returns to be rendered to or by the office. (b) Communications that should be returned to or f By by the office. \ a (c) Information that should be furnished to or by / certain the office. \ time. (d) Orders, letters and verbal directions requiring action by the office or by subordinates. If, for instance, communications number 100, that should be returned to the office not later than the 20th of the month (Novem- ber), is mailed Captain John A. Smith, on the 10th, then fill out and file in front of the '"20" guide card, a card like this: Number of Communi- cation 100 To Whom sent Capt. John A. Smith When Nov. 10 To be returned by Nov. 20 Remarks On the morning of the 20, when the "19" guide card is re- moved from in front and placed in rear, the check card will show up. If the communication has not yet been returned, just keep on advancing the filing date of the check card until the paper does return. An alphabetical list of the names of the persons to whom communications are sent should be kept (preferably by means of cards), with the filing dates of the check cards opposite each name. For instance, after Captain Smith's name would be noted, "November 20." In this manner, should the communication be returned before Nov. 20, by reference to the alphabetical list the filing date can be ascertained at once and the check card found and removed from the file without having to look over the check cards of several dates. A supply of check cards with proper heading^ should be printed, mimeographed or hectographed. 92 CHAPTER VII. (ADJUTANT'S TICKLER.) (Obtainable from the Quartermaster's Dept. See Cir. 1, Q. M. G. O., '08, page 75). r JUIY VAl]GUST\^TFMBF^^^QCTQBER^NQVFMR ^ ^ JANUARY\fEBRUARYN( march >( ARRIL \ MAY\JUN FCPMRFf January 1 Nature Requisition for Stationery for I'ost Hdqrs. K^linidte of CloUiiiif; uiiil K(iniii:i}i:c from Quartermastur. FORM. 41, Q. M D 53, Q. M. [). AUTHORITY. A K. WMi. A. R. 1287 & 12S8, nineniifiJ by G. 0.8-2, A. G. ()., 190-2. REMARKS. To.Quarteriiin. (Border is made of 1 inch mater- ial and partitions \ inch material ; receptacles 2\ in- ches deep; the rods "A" and "B" extend out i inch from face of case ; the grooves are 2 inches deep and li inches wide.) 94 CHAPTER VII. Indices of Current Orders and Circulars. A convenient and satisfactory way of keeping indices of all current orders and circulars is by means of cards, as shown in this cut: Falcon and Other Files with Alphabetical Indices. Papers fre- quently referred to are made readily accessible by being filed in Falcon or other files with alphabetical indices, and kept in convenient places. Pigeon-hole Box. A box with a number of pigeon-holes labeled, for instance, as follows, is a great convenience: 1 Memorandum Receipts 7 Personal Orders 2 Receipted Bills 8 3 Money Matters 9 4 Answered Letters 10 5 Unanswered Letters 11 6 Li Abeyance Catalogues, Price Lists, etc. Newspaper Clippings Memoranda Miscellaneous THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 95 Useful Forms. The following- forms can be used to great ad- vantage in an Adjutant's Office: Foii Harrison, Mont. — 190 Detail: For OfBc«r of th* Day to-morrow: 34th lofantry. By ordtrof tsU LituL 24 Ih Infantry, AJfuianl. ^}6' Opened Half Folded Folded 96 CHAPTER VII. (1) Fort Harrison, Mont., 1908. The Cojnmanding Officer, Co. ' ," 24th I7ifant7'y. The following absentees were reported on the guard report this date. Retreat Eleven p. m. inspection. Reveille By order of the Commanding Officer (2) Captain and Adjutant, 24th Infty., Adjutant. ^ ^ MEMORANDUM. For the Information of Company Commanders.. NAME. RANK. -£^' -%- •OK) DELINQUENCY. D4TE. %- H%: Fort Harrison, Montana. To the Commanding Officer, Co. ... , 24th Infantry, 190 , By order o( • 1st Lieut d. Batt. Adjt. 24th Infy., Adjutaht. (Used to report absentees from reveille, retreat, 11 p. m. inspection — also for other purposes.) THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 97 Fort Harrison, Mont., 1906. Officer of the Day. Sir: The commanding officer directs you please send Prisoner to the" hospital at 9 a. m. to-morrow for examination. Very respectfully, Captain and Adjutant 24th Infantry. Adjutant. Note: Some officers do not consider it good form to use the word "please" in giving directions, especially if by order of a superior. However, the author, when adjutant and when aide-de-camp, always used the term. It detracts in no way from the force of the orders given and it leaves an agreeable impression of politeness in the mind of the officer addressed, especially if he be senior to the officer giving the order by his chief's authority. FOHT HARRISON. MONT. _ I906. The Surgeon. Port Hairisoa Sir: The commaDdiDg officer direcis me to inforiD you ihat >oiL..' J. *n alleged deserter from ^^ „. will be sent to the hospital at 9 a m.. (o-roorrow. for examinatioo under paragraph 124, A R Very respectfully. Capiaifi and Adjutant 24th Infantry, Adjutant ^t5^- 98 CHAPTER VII. Fort Harrison, Mont., 1906. The Officer of the Day: — The Commanding Officer directs that you please have Pvt Co. " ," 24th Infantry, sent to Summary Court Room at M. to-day. 1st Lieut., 24th Infantry, Adjutant. K Fort Harrison, Mont., • 1906. Commanding Officer, Co. " ," 24th Infantry:— Private of your company was this day tried by the Summary Court, and sentenced to forfeit $ of his pay, and to be confined at hard labor under the charge of the Post Guard for days. He is hereby confined by order of the Commanding Officer. 24th Infantry, Summary Court. (Form used when the Summary Court has authority to confine soldiers.) Fort Missoula, Mont., 1908. The Commanding Officer, Co. " ," 24th Infantry, The Summary Court having awarded confinement in the case of Private of your Company, you are directed to confine him. By order of Colonel Smith : Captain and Adjutant 24th Infantry. Adjutant. (Form used when the Summary Court has not authority to confine soldiers.) THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 99 Fort Harrison, Mont., 1906. Officer of the Day: — Private Co. " ," 24th Infantry, has been tried and not having been awarded any confinement, the Commanding Officer directs that he be released from the guard house and reported to his company for duty. th Infantry, Summary Court. (Form used when the Summary Court has authority to release soldiers from confinement.) Fort Missoula, Mont., 1908. Officer of the Day: — The Summary Court having awarded no confinement, you will release Private Co. " ," 24th Infantry, and have him reported to the 1st Sergeant of his company for duty. By order of the Commanding Officer: Captain and Adjutant 24th Infantry. Adjutant. (Form used when Summary Court has not authority to release soldiers from confinement.) 100 CHAPTER VII. 1st Sergeant. Co. " ", 24th Infty.:- The following-named men of your company will be sent to the Sum- mary Court at 9 o'clock A. M. to-morrow. For Trial. Rank. Witnesses. Rank. 1^ nl/.' Le-:^^ .. 246" > * .^ J Y- ^ ,£/*♦ . ' • ^ • » Fort Harrison, Mont.. 190....: Sergaant-Major, 24th Infty., Fort Harrison, Mont. 1908 FIRST SERGEANT, CcmiPany " r" 24th Inantry: IfS affached to your company for rations and quarters. Last rationed to include rped Sergeant Major 24th Infantry. 4> THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 101 DETAILS FOR TO-MORROW, 1906 CO. FOR GUARD. SERGEANTS. h /r CORPORALS. MUSICIANS PVTS. Z^" FATIGUE. SGTS. CORPS. PVTS, /• *K — "9 — * Signature of Isi 6ergeani Remarks : Sergeant-Major, 24th Infantry. 102 CHAPTER VII. CO Check Card FOR \i' /. N. C.S.fiB*nd. '4o * 2. Co. "A": i. '•■ "B-.: *. " "C: , s. ■■ "tr^ _. i. ■■ "E" A •• "f '. s. ■• ■■^" 104 CHAPTER VII. A 00 OFFICERS WILL PLEASE SIGN THEIR INITIALS OPPOSITE THEIR NAMES, THUS INDICATING THEY HAVE READ THE PAPER HEREWITH V < 3>^" Major Harris ^* Jones '' Smith Captain Adams '' Barker etc. First Lieut. Anderson Baxter etc. Second Lieut. Allen '■' '' Booze etc. To contain in rank groups and alphabetically arranged the names of all the officers in the Post. This slip is attached to circulars, etc, to be shown to the officers of the command.) THE SERGEANT-MAJOR. 105 Port Harrison, Montana, „....-.... , 190 . -«-..-*-— ~->-mc Co. ." ", 24th Inrty.. owes the amounts indicated and has made satisfactory arrangements for the payment thereof:— Post Exchange, $rr.:s..T*t t..-^ ^^ * * ^ Eichiioj!c Officer. •olc Post Laundry. $ ,, Po«t Laaadr)n]ao Company Tailor. $.._ Company Barber, % Corapaoy Tailor Compao) Darbcr To the best of my knowledge and belief _„._ „ owes no other launaryman, tailor or barber. Ist Sergl. Co " ". 2-llh Infty. NOTE; This clearance slip must be atlachet) 10 the Certificate of Discharge bty fore it is siihinitted to tlie Commanding OHioer for signature ^rfL" 106 CHAPTER VII. Fort Harrison, Mont., The Chief Paymaster, Dept. of Dakota, St. Paul, Minn. Sir: In compliance with A. R. 12JJ, igo8, I have the honor to inform you that I have this day transferred my pay-account for the month of. , I go to •■•- Respectfully, igo 24th Infty. A 00 V <- 3K" -> (For the convenience of the officers of the command, printed envelopes, addressed to X\\e Chief Paymaster of the department, shonl^^- 'J a. ni. Noon. :^ ">k %" > '^x'^" useA from all intervening duties. By Order of Colonel Captain 24th Infantry. .\djutant. THE SERGEANT-AIAJOR. Ill Vass List, Hospital Corps, U S Army. Fori Harrison. Montind ...,„ „ 1904. Ho Name.! Bank. AuihoriitJ Absence- Departed. Returned. Remarks. -Z'A- -^ «.-^- .-^- ft^' 5t : ApprQved: Granled:^ By order of Colonel...^ „ «.. Capita nd Asst. Surg, U._S._A. Captain 24th Infantry, Adjutant.) NOTE. Men on Pa»3 are"7iot"9xcii8ed Irom in terven ing du ties unl csa so sttteJ in lh8£olunin of remark. Co. '' EXTRA and SPECIAL PASS LIST 24th Infantry. t f I'ort 1-f arrison. Montana, T0O7 No. Name Rank Authorized From Absence ■ To Departed Returned Remarks Granted : By order of No objection : Captain, 24th Infantry, (Quartermaster. Approved. Capt. 24th Infy., Comdg, Co. " ." NOTE Men on Pass are not excused from intervening duties unless so stated in the column of remarks (Same Pimensions as company pass list.) 112 CHAPTER VII. Fort Harrison, Mont. APPROVED By Older of the Commanding Officer: Captain and Adjutant, 24th Infty., Adjutant. To Visil 8 n o 3 3 3 cu 5' »q n o 3 ■a 3 .^ Si t-5 ">. 8 o 1-3 S O n o p c > I— I o K3 4:^ P 2; o > c/i THK SERGEANT-MAJOR. 113 Extra and Special Duty List. Company " ," 24th U. S. I nfaniry. Extra Duty. Special Duty. No. - Name. Rank. How Employed. Authority. , «!•• « i&r" » I -* '^' > t **?/•■* 1 »-<■* «— ^— ^ ^ C/4 » • <^ 2 ^O V S 4 5 • 1 s • s - 4 5 6 7 8 fort Harrison, Mont., 190. Respectfully submitted to the Adjutant. 24th Infantry, Comd'g Company. (Post Commanders usually require a list of extra and special duty men to be submitted to them weekly— generally every Sunday morning.) 114 CHAPTER VII. I Report of Non-(^mmis8ioiied Officers* School, Coj, ** t? 24th Infantry, Periodf From ............. ,.v...../to:. r-^'-'il'llJ . ■v*- .... IttO DATE. 190: . = •5 §■ . Manual of (Guard .Duty.j '(Paragraphs.) If ill -1 Nam«g of men wkotc work it Etpecixlly Meritorioal, From To From To From To From ■ To From To J— J- tii* *» [•— /• . ^^ k- .i>*^ -~ '"", *. /• ■ » /' • . ""r* . . . _, '^ '.. ^ - 1 ""■ V-.- ^ y ' ■ • ■ ^ V^^' ^ ; ^-^ •v. '- r *— ^AVERAGE ATTENDANCE^URING PERIOD • _Noi);Cpm:ni99ioned OfficeiiiV -Privates. R'os^cUuTl^ Siibniiwed 0jh* Adjuu'nC> For) HA.rrut)n. Monii{inr. •u^ . kl^Ukj.** >« lOi asVOeiiva ^ 24tHJ«f4fllfy^ CotiifnanSfSj Company; a rr o o ^ 50 C n> 1 . - 3 : a a " vM K:^ 1 o i n s" 1^ li «« p ^. •■ i' V) (* ^ 1 i § 1 1 p. -t 1 K5! s ; g a ■S- > ft cu< r Z^ 'n Tl ^ 2 a < f» (/) c o- ^<»' 03 ^ c «_l. " n C t9 S" o. V Ht> S' " CIO a. n X C a. t/3 1-1 ii S.S.3 3 -1 ! r 1 ? 3 *■* r- ^o ^ ■Ji a 1 w H hj 50 Si o 5S ^1 ^ c-2 2 » 3 w 2 3 O 2; CT) ^g n to 2.» P 3 K as ^ •5^^ ■* O to 3° ^ o - 3 ^ 3-! r ir r. = ?r g? o p c 2- X 1 3- 1 P9 g 1 o o 1 s Si :^f a 5 g3 c^ 32 •T 3 Cfl cra- ft -• 2 S ^ _ c er S ti ii 3 ^ w> -. s M a. 2 £-^ n V 3 E-^ ET 0- 5-| 3> O VI o ^ S" :r rt ^ o A o •^ •< >• a. ^ ff K 1 P 3- 93 a: o a w p ^ r Books of Reference, Maps, etc., to be kept in the Adjutant's Office; Blank Forms to be kept on hand; Reports, Returns, Requisi- tions, etc., to be made by, to or through the Adjutant. See Supple- ment, Chap. VTI. CHAPTER VIII. THE POST QUARTERMASTER SERGEANT General Duties.^ The Post Quartermaster-Sergeant assists the Quartermaster in the performance of his duties, and in this connection he is Hable to be required to perform, under the supervision of the Quartermaster, any or all of these duties: To have charge of the money, papers, correspondence, prepara- tion of estimates, reports, returns, requisitions, bills of lading, trans- portation requests, etc.; To receive and check all property, entering and accomplishing the bills of lading for same, and to be in charge of the memorandum receipts, issuing all property and checking up and examining any that may be turned in; To have general charge of the care and preservation of the means of transportation and of all Quartermaster property in the store- house, and the care of all animals; To issue clothing and other Quartermaster supplies; To have general supervision over the routine work of the office, distributing the work among the office force, seeing that his assistants perform their duties properly, etc. In this respect the Post Quarter- master-Sergeant bears the same relation to the Quartermaster as the Sergeant-Major does to the Adjutant. (See page 61 A). Things That The POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT Should Take Special Care To Do.i Pay close attention to all Q. M. G. orders, circulars and decisions and to all War Department orders and circulars afifecting the Quarter- master's Department. Look after details as much as possible, correct all errors and irregularities that you observe, and prevent unauthorized issues. Examine critically and check every paper before it goes to the Quartermaster for signature — see that all the notes on the form and (l)The collated experiences of eight Post Quartermaster-Sergeants. The post quarteraiaster-sergeant. 117 that all orders, circulars and regulations on the subject have been complied with. Be courteous, obliging and tactful with everybody — it will cost you nothing and will gain you the confidence, esteem and goodwill of all with whom vou come in contact. As far as possible learn the names of the various tools supplied by the Quartermaster's Department and familiarize yourself with their use. Things The POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT Should Take Special Care NOT To Do.i Never get behind in your paper-work, but always keep your work up to date — get all your estimates, returns, reports and requisi- tions in on or before the time they are due. Never issue property without proper authority — that is, without the authority of the Quartermaster. Do not lose sight of the fact that the Quartermaster's Depart- ment exists for the convenience of the troops and not the troops for the convenience of the Quartermaster's Department, and also remem- ber that the property does not belong to you, but that it belongs to the Government and that it is intended for the use of the troops. Do not depend on others to do work that you are justly ex- pected to do. Do not entrust too much to the extra and special duty men — while being considerate with them be firm also, and exercise a close supervision over their work — see yourself that they do their work promptly, properly and efficiently. Whatever you do, do not "play favorites", and never issue property as a matter of favor — supplies are furnished for the good of the service and not to satisfy personal whims or to enable Post Quartermaster-Sergeants to gain friends. In exchanging unserviceable for serviceable property, do not discriminate between different organizations — treat them all alike and thus save yourself trouble and unpopularity. Do not talk outside about the business of your Department. (l)The collated experiences of eight Post Quartermaster-Sergeants. 118 CHAPTER VIII. "Customs of the Service" Affecting The POST QUARTERMAS- TER-SERGEANT. (See par. A, page zil)- How Can The POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT Make Himself Most Useful to the Quartermaster? By making the interests of the Quartermaster his interests; and by safeguarding them as he would his own; by knowing what to do and by doing it without being told; by being loyal to the Quartermaster; by carrying out what has been said under the headings, "Things The POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT Should Take Special Care To Do", and "Things The POST QUARTERMASTER- SERGEANT Should Take Special Care NOT To Do". "Pointers" Regarding the Care, Preservation and Responsibility t of Property. Too much attention can not be given to the proper care, pre- servation and accountability of property, and the Post Quartermaster- Sergeant should be on his constant guard to see that it is given proper care and protection. Always look after the keys of the storerooms personally and never entrust them to anyone except one of the regularly detailed storekeepers, and even then never turn a key over to more than one man — in case anything goes wrong it is much easier to fix the respon- sibility on one man than on two. The key to the clothing room should always be in the personal possession of the Post Quartermaster- Sergeant, with a duplicate in the Quartermaster's safe. In fact, it is a good plan to keep in the Quartermaster's safe duplicates of keys to all storehouses. The greatest possible care should be exercised in the selection of storekeepers, so that none but thoroughly honest and reliable men are detailed; and these men should be carefully instructed in their duties. In each storeroom there should be kept a memorandum book, in which is entered every issue for temporary use, together with the name of the noncommissioned officer or other person to whom issued, and the date; and then, when the articles are returned, nota- tion of the fact and the date should be made. It is a good plan to charge the storekeeper with the duty of see- THE POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 119 ing that such tools as axes, pickaxes, scythes, etc., are kept sharpened and in good, serviceable condition. A separate room or place where property awaiting condemnation can be stored is almost a necessity, and in this room should be kept a memorandum book in which is entered every article at the time it is put in the room. This book can then be used to make up Inventory and Inspection Reports and lists for surveying officers — it will also be found useful when checking up your return. A Under no circumstances ever allow property to leave the store- house without getting a memorandum receipt or some other kind of receipt for it. Remember, it is generally easier to get a receipt for property before it is delivered than afterwards. Of course, under orders from the Commanding Officer or the Quartermaster, property would be issued without getting a receipt for it, but the Post Quartermaster-Sergeant should make it his first duty to obtain the receipt as soon as possible. In a case like this, however, a receipt of some kind should be obtained from the enlisted man or other person to whom the property is given. If this be not practicable, the Post Quartermaster-Sergeant should make a list of the property, noting the name of the officer responsible, the purpose for which it is to be used, the authority under which issued (if written, attach it to list), the name to whom the property was personally turned over, and the date. A memorandum receipt should be complete in all particulars — it should always show condition of property, and in the case of type- writing machines, the kind and serial number, also when and from whom received — this data is necessary in connection with the rendition of the semi-annual reports on typewriters. A memorandum receipt for the company tool chest should enumerate all the articles, although they do not appear separately on the return. Although it is customary to carry articles of the same general nature on the return as "assorted", this designation should never ap- pear on a memorandum receipt, but each item should be briefly described. Thus, for example, "1 Wrench, Stilson, 24 inch, 1 Wrench, Stilson, 8 inch", etc. In addition to this precaution, all tools should be branded "U. S." as soon as they are received. 120 CHAPTER VIII. A memorandum receipt should be taken for the keys to every set of quarters and other public buildings. Receipts for public animals should show such notations as will facilitate reference to the descriptive cards. When an article is issued of which more than one pattern is handled, the kind issued should be carefully stated, and if issued with keys, as in the case of padlocks, etc., the number of keys should be stated. Keep your storehouses clean and in order — keep everything systematically arranged, having a place for each thing and keeping each thing in its place. If practicable, unserviceable property should be kept in a separate room — in any event, it should be kept separate from serviceable property. Count and verify property personally as often as possible. Examine carefully all property received, and see whether it agrees with the invoice in quantity, quality and condition, and see that it is immediately taken up on the return and that receipts are signed and forwarded without delay. The best way to be thoroughly familiar with the amount and the condition of the property on hand, is to see it frequently. Frequent inspections of the storerooms should, therefore, be made, and in- ventories should be made as often as practicable. In order to have your property well in hand and know just exactly where it is and how the Quartermaster stands, an abstract should be kept of all memorandum receipts, or the plan suggested in the following paragraph should be followed, and the requirement of Par. 276, A. R. ('08), that quarterly settlement shall be made for all supplies in use on memorandum receipts, should be strictly enforced. A An excellent method of keeping track of property out on mem- orandum receipt as well as that which is on hand (except clothing, which should be kept by itself), is by means of a loose leaf file, a sample sheet of which is given on page 131. These files as a part of the Moss-Dalton records, are handled by the U. S. Infantry Associa- tion, Washington, D. C. In case of transfer, the use of this loose leaf file, in the form of a small, handy book 8^ x 4 inches, facilitates the work very much, by enabling the numbers of the various articles to be checked off as the storerooms in which they are kept, are reached. THE POST OUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 121 The comparison of the various entries on the different sheets with the corresponding memorandum receipts, is also very simple. It is a good plan for the Post Quartermaster-Sergeant to try and keep himself posted as to the state of the property at the post, and he should take special car'e to see that the post is always well supplied, or at least that estimates are made for a proper supply, so that he can not be blamed in case articles desired are not on hand for issue. Always be present when original packages are opened. The accumulation of surplus property should be avoided. Aside from the violation of orders that this involves, it also tends to en courage carelessness in the care and accountability of property. Do not be. wasteful with expendable property just because it is expendable. Do not store canvas while damp, nor weigh coal while wet. When tentage is turned in, have it spread out in the sun and dried, replacing worn out ropes and otherwise putting the tentage in proper condition for re-issue. ' . Supplies longest on hand should be issued first — keep all new property in the background until the old is exhausted. See that all movable public property is, if practicable, conspi- cuously branded "Q. M. D.," before put into use, and also that tables, benches, screens, etc., made at the post are branded likewise and immediately taken up on the return and accounted for as manufactured at post. Whenever property is delivered by team or otherwise, have the driver or other person who delivers, get a receipt from the person to whom the propert}'- is delivered. Do not exchange propert}- just because it is worn — only un- serviceable articles should be exchanged. Store ink where it will not freeze, and oil in a dry place, where the cans will not rust — the rust will eat through the cans and cause them to leak. Examine every box in the storeroom that is supposed to be empty and watch it until it is removed — dishonest subordinates have been known to steal clothing and other property by hiding it in empty boxes and then getting it therefrom when the boxes were removed from the storehouse. 122 CHAPTER VIII. Examine carefully all sides of original packages and if there is any indication that the package has been tampered with, notify the Quartermaster at once. Store all hardware in a dry place, and do not expose refrigerators to the sun — it will soon draw the joints apart. Veterinary and drawing instruments will not rust if coated with cocoa-nut butter. Veterinary and drawing instruments and other valuable instru- ments and tools should be kept under lock and key. Never store any property unless it is dry and clean. When stoves and pipe joints are turned in, have them thoroughly cleaned, blackened, and if necessary, repaired, at once, and then stored in a dry place. Require that cooking utensils, axes, hatchets, picks, shovels, etc., be well cleaned before being turned in. Give them a coating of oil before storing. Do not accept bed sacks, sheets, pillow cases, barrack bags and shelter-tent halves, unless they are clean and in condition for re- issue — there is no allowance for laundry and it is very difificult to re- issue these articles, if dirty. When you receiye oil, examine every box — an empty box looks just like a full one. Clothing should be stored in a dry place, with lots of moth balls. Harness that has been used should be thoroughly cleaned before stored, when it should be hung on pegs. If practicable, all small articles should be stored in a separate storeroom, which should be given special care and attention. Do not allow mechanics access to tools, except in your presence. Tools are the most diflficult of all property to keep track of. When a box or package is opened and a part removed, tag it so as to show the remaining contents. Miscellaneous "Pointers" and Suggestions. Requests for minor repairs to quarters, etc., should be entered in a book kept for the purpose, and same attended to in its turn. Numerous questions and frequent interruptions will be avoided by posting in a conspicuous place in the issue room, a large price list of the clothing and such articles of equipage as are usually purchased. THE POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 123 In drawing checks, and in the absence of a check protector, a good way to guard against alterations of amounts, is, to write the amount in red figures, in the place for the Quartermaster's signature. The Quartermaster signs his name right over the red figures. When anything which is exhausted, or which lias never been on hand, is asked for, it is a good plan to make a note of it in a book kept for the purpose. Such a book is very useful for reference in making up estimates. If your clothing room be small, pack all surplus clothing in boxes with plenty of camphor balls; mark the contents of the boxes, by sizes, on slips of paper and paste the slips over the edge of the cover and the box, so that the opening of the box would break the paper; give each box a number, and enter the numbers in a book kept for the purpose, showing the contents of each box, with sizes. If you have room, make separate stalls for each organization at the post, putting in each stall the allowance of field equipage for that organization, with a memorandum receipt already made out, tacked over the stall, so that any organization commander can get his equipment at a moment's notice. With this arrangement the entire command, as far as the Quartermaster's Department is con- cerned, could take the field in fifteen minutes. If you hear of an officer at the post, who is ordered away, and who is holding property on memorandum receipt, advise the Quarter- master so that settlement may be made before he leaves — it sometimes entails considerable correspondence and trouble to make settlement after the officer leaves. Should such an officer, or an officer going on leave, owe the Quartermaster's Department for supplies, a bill should be sent him a few days before he leaves. Paper-Work. See Chapter XI, 'Taper ?work." A Loss of Funds. The usual and accepted course to be pursued by a Quartermaster, commissary or other disbursing officer, in the event of loss by fire, theft or otherwise, of public funds for which he is accountable, is to promptly make request of the proper authority for the appointment of a surveying officer to investigate and report upon the circumstances of such loss and to make any suggested recommendation. One copy of the report, duly approved by the commanding officer, is then forwarded to the Adjutant-General, U. S. Army, with all other available data, with the request that the matter 124 CHAPTER VIII. be submitted to the Secretary of War with the view that the neces- sary steps be taken to secure Congressional relief. Where funds have been destroyed by fire and the ashes can be collected, it should be done and the same forwarded to the U. S. Treasury for the possible identification and redemption of some por- tion. If identification should be found possible, a check for the amount so redeemed would be sent the accountable officer. LABOR-SAVING DEVICES, CONVENIENCES AND TIME- SAVING METHODS At the instance of the Quartermaster, the Commanding Officer should designate one or two days out of each week for the issue of clothing and other supplies, and certain hours of certain days should be designated for the exchange of clothing and all articles of equipage. Rubber Stamps Usually Used in the Quartermaster's Office; (Required for on Form 60. Q. M. D. — Estimate for Regular Supplies.) OFFICE POST QUARTERMASTER, Fort Harrison, Mont., 190 Iransportation furnished on this order for from to Via (Indorsement on travel orders.) (Routing nearly always shown on order; required when transportation issued to officers). THE POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 125 2 (a) WAR DEPARTMENT Post oj Fort Harrison, Mont. OFFICIAL BUSINESS. (b) Penalty for private use to avoid payment of postag-e $300 (For penalty envelopes, etc.) 3 'a) REGULAR SUPPLIES. (b) INCIDENTAL EXPENSES. (c) Army Transportation. (d) BARRACKS AND QUARTERS. (e) Shooting Galleries & Ranges. (f) Clothing & Equipage. (g) Hospitals. (h) Military Post Exchanges. (i) WATER & SEWERS, MILITARY POSTS. (j) Hospital Stewards Quarters (k) Roads, Walks, Wharves & Drainage (On money papers to show appropriations.) 4 Tariff (Rate stamp, for bills of lading.) 126 CHAPTER VIII. No stop over privileges permitted to holder of this request. (On transportation requests.) FORT DES MOINES, IOWA. 7 Item No. 8 Appropriation Fiscal Year 19 For use on Vouchers A and B F'iscal year ending June 30, igo6. (On face and brief of cash papers.) I 9 PUBLIC PROPERTY Q. M. Dcpt., U. S. A. (On all Q. M. property, before issue.) THE POST OUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 127 10 OFFICE OF QUARTERMASTER, RECEIVEO ISSUED (Showing dates of receipt and issue of property.) 11 (B=L. to Agent Loist Carrier igo Shipping office notified igo (Used on property received book.) 12 Public Property (or U. S. Property.) (Used on alPB-L except shipment of personal effects.) 13 In addition to the above, the stamps shown in Pars. 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 9 {a&h) 11, 14, 15, 16, 18 and 23, beginning page 143, changing "Com- missary" to "Quartermaster" wherever necessary. 128 CHAPTER VTTT. BLANK FORMS THAT MAY BE USED TO ADVANTAGE. No FORT LEAVENWORTH, KANSAS, 1909. Post Quartermaster: Please deliver to quarters No. cord Hard Coal, Furnuce cord Hard Coal, Egg cord Hard Coal, Nut cord Soft Coal cord Hard Wood, sawed and split cord Hard Wood, sawed only cord Kindling .gallons Mineral Oil Note.— THREE DAYS must be allowed for filling FUEL orders. 2687 lbs. soft coal, or 1700 lbs. hard coal equal ONE cord HARD WOOD. (For table of allowances, see other side.) THE POST OUARTERMASTKR-SKRr.KAXT. 120 A REQUEST Fort Leavenworth, Kas., 190 To the Quartermaster: OFFICE of the QUARTERMASTER 190 Referred to; Quartermaster. Fort Leavenworth, Kas., 190 Returned to the Quartermaster: -3«4 ins. Fort Leavenworth, Kans , 190.... Received from Post Q. M the following articles, same to be added to memorandum receipt, on file: V <- -Zy^ ins. (These forms are intended for use m a very large post). Note: These are two different forms. 130 CHAPTER VIII. FORT LAWTON, WASHINGTON 19 Quartermaster: Please issue to me and charge on my memorandum receipt the follow- ing articles for use of Credit Slip. Quartermaster's Office, Fort Lawton, Wash. Sir: You have this day been credited on 3'our memorandum receipt as follows: £fi a Captain and Qnarter?iiaster Uiird Infa)it)-y, Quarft'n/iaster. 34 ins. 3^ ins. THE POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 131 1 6 26 SI 76 On Hand. 2 6 27 52 n 3 6 28 53 78 4 6 29 54 79 5 30 55 80 6 4 31 56 81 7 6 32 57 34 82 8 33 58 34 83 9 12 34 59 34 84 10 35 60 30 85 11 2 36 61 86 12 4 37 62 87 13 4 38 63 88 14 5 39 64 16 89 IS 7 40 65 90 16 4 41 66 91 17 4 42 67 92 18 3 43 68 93 19 5 44 69 94 20 45 70 95 21 46 71 96 22 47 72 97 23 48 73 98 24 49 74 99 25 SO 75 100 On Mem- orandum St. A Article : Chairs, barrack. <- 5 ins. (A loose leaf file to be kept in connection with the memorandum receipts which are numbered 1, 2, 3, etc., according to the numbers of the build- ings in which the articles are. A separate sheet to be kept for each article out on Memo, receipt.) V (Attach to trunk) Q. M. DEP'T. FORT LAWTON, WASH. No. .98 (Given to owner) Q. M. DEP'T, FORT LAWTON, WASH. CO S No.. .98 2^ ins. -> V (Where posts are distant from a city, and baggage of ofificers and men has to be delivered at a large station, a baggage check like this, used by agreement with the baggage agent, is a great convenience in checking bag- gage from post to baggage room.) MEMORANDUM RECEIPT FOR SUPPLIES IN USE. """• • 1 I acknowledge to have received from the Quartermaster, at 1 the following articles for use of I am responsible for said supplies and will produce the same when called upon to do so by proper authority. Axes. Hods, coal. Pots, iron with cover. Axes, fire. Hoes, garden. Tots, mustard. Bags, Barrack. Holders, card. Racks, pen. Barrels, ash. i Hose, assorted, feet. Ranges, cooking. Bars, Mosquito. Inkstands. Rakes, steel. Baskets, assorted. Inkwells. Refrigerators. (Bedsteads, iron, com- Kettles, tea. Saltcellers. mon. Blowers, grate. Knives, bread. Saucers. Boats, gravy. Knives, butcher. Saws, meat. Boilers, assorted. Knives, table. Scales and weights. Bowls. Ladders, fire. Screens, door. Bowls, chopping. Ladles, soup. Screens, fire. Bowls, sugar. Lamps, desk. Screens, porch. Boxes, pepper. Lanterns. Screens, window. Brushes, dust. Litters, hand. Scuttles, coal. Buckets, fire. Lockers, box. Sets, carving. Buckets, G. I., as- Lockers, wall. Shades, window. sorted. Carts, hand. Mats, cuspidor. Sheets, bed. Cases, pillow. Mats, door, cocoa. Shovels, fire. Cases, telescope. Mats, door, wire. Shovels, L. H. Chairs, barrack. Mattresses. Shovels, scoop. Chairs, office. Cleaners, flue. Mills cofTee Shovels, S. H. Sieves, flour. Nozzles, hose. Cleavers. Openers, can. Skillets. Clocks, office. Padlocks. Skimmers. Cords and Tassels, Pans, bake. • Spades. trumpet. ( Covers, mattress. Pans, dish. Spittoons. Cots, G. M. Pans, dust. Spoons, basting. Cruets, vinegar. Pans, frying. Spoons, mustard. Cups, sponge. Pans, sauce. Spoons, table. Cups, tea. Paulins. Spoons, tea. Cutters, meat. Pickaxes. Steel, carving. Desks, field. Pillows. Squares, assorted. Desks, office, assorted. Pins, tent, large. Pins, tent, small. Stands, fire. Steamers, with covers. Dippers, assorted. Dishes, pickle. Pins, shelter tent. Stools, mess. Dishes, vegetable. Pipe, stove, joints. Stoves, tent. Elbows, stovepipe. Pitchers, syrup. Stoves, heating. Extinguishers, fire. Pitchers, water. Stoves, laundi'y. Flies, wall tent. Plates, dinner. Tables, assorted. Forks, meat. Plates, meat. Tables, mess. Forks, table. Plates, soup. Tables, office. Graters, assorted. Pokers, fire. ' Tents, common. Griddles. Guards, spark. * Poles, ridge wall tent. Tents, conical wall. Tents, hospital. Poles, ridge, common tent. 1 Hatchets, assorted. Poles, ridge, hospital tent. Tents, shelter halves. 1 Heaters, iron. Poles, shelter tent. Tents, wall. Poles, conical wall Tongs, fire. tent. Poles, upright wall tent. Tripods, conical wall tent. Poles, upright com- Trumpets. mon tent. [ Poles, upright hospi- tal tent. Tumblers Pot coffee. irticles are). THE POST QUARTERMASTER-SERGEANT. 133 , 19. Quartermaster Department, Dr. To Clothing . Equipage gals. •Mineral Oil Total amount It is requested that you call at this office on or before the last day of the month, pay your bill and sign the sales vouchers Received Payment, (Actual size, about 6x4 ins.) (Statement sent to officers about 27th of each month — also sent when an officer is about to depart from the post on leave or otherAj;ise). A War Dept. Orders, Books of Reference, Maps, etc., and Blank Forms to be kept on hand, and Reports, Returns, Estimates and Re- quisitions to be made by the Quartermaster. See Supplement, Chap. tcr VIII. 134 CHAPTER IX. CHAPTER IX. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT General Duties.! Under the supervision of the Commissary Officer he has charge of all paper-work pertaining to the office, and he is also charged with the immediate supervision of the receipt, sale and issue of all subsistence stores, and the care and preservation of all stores and property. He also supervises the policing of the office, sales and issue rooms and the storerooms. Things The Post Commissary-Sergeant Should Take Special Care To Do.i Special attention must be paid to the care and preservation of perishable stores. Make a special study of the probable needs of the command, so as to assist the Commissary Officer in submitting estimates and re- quisitions for such articles and in such quantities that the command will be properly supplied without overstocking the commissary. Nothing is more unsatisfactory than trying to dispose of old stores. By being honest, truthful, accommodating, courteous and attentive to business, endeavor to gain the confidence and esteem of everyone, especially the Commissary Officer, the company mess-sergeants and others with whom you are thrown in constant contact. By care and attention be absolutely correct in your figures when rendering returns, estimates and requisitions, and especially should you be absolutely correct in your figures when rendering officers' bills. Mistakes in the former oftentimes cause considerable correspondence with the War Department, while errors in the latter may arouse suspicion as to your honesty. Keep your storehouse clean, neat, orderly and well ventilated, keeping each kind of stores together. Onions and potatoes should be carefully watched, and sorted as often as may be necessary. Your office should be a model of system and neatness. Have (l)Tlie collated experiences of nine Post Commissary-Sergeants. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 135 proper and separate places for each kind of papers, such as letters, invoices, receipts, etc. Brief all papers as soon as received. After receiving stores enumerated on an invoice, enter them without delay on your Abstract, and after making an issue of stores, enter them at once in your Abstract of Issues. In other words, keep your Abstracts up to date, so that at the end of the month they will need only to be added up. All stores received should be carefully checked from the invoice as to contents of each box or case. See that each box or case is intact — if it is not, it should be immediately opened and the contents verifed. Discrepancies should be reported at once to the Commissary Officer. Arrange stores upon their receipt so that those longest on hand will be the first issued or sold. Before closing each day make a tour of the building to see that all doors and windows are properly secured. Keep all your work up to date, and always render all reports, returns, estimates and requisitions on time. Always have your business well in hand, so that you can tell at any time just exactly what you have on hand, what is needed, etc. This can be accomplished by keeping a daily record of all issues, sales, savings, shipments, stores received, stores shipped, fresh beef received by hind and fore-quarters, fresh vegetables. Keep a check of all money transactions to conform with Form No. 3, Inspector General's Dept., so that when an inspector comes, you will merely have to close it up in order to have a ready check for him. Things The Post Commissary-Sergeant Should Take Special Care NOT To Do.i Never let your work accumulate — clear your desk daily — keep your work up to date. Indeed, keep ahead of your work, if possible. Between the 10th of the month (the date of mailing your returns) and the 25th (the date of taking inventory), you will often find leisure time which you can profitably devote to filling in bill-heads and addressing envelopes to persons making purchases on pass-books during the month — you may rule out books that are used for recording savings of companies, bakery accounts, etc. As soon as the monthly returns have been mailed, the preparation of all returns and vouchers (l)The collated experiences of nine Post Commissary-Sergeants. 136 CHAPTER IX. for next month should be started. All these papers can be so far completed that at the end of the month only quantities and amounts will have to be entered. All of these things count for a great deal on the end of the month, when you will have more work than usual. Do not have your stores scattered about the storehouse, but keep each kind together — this will facilitate the taking of inventory and will also serve to avoid making mistakes in counting. Do not open any more boxes than is absolutely necessary shortly before taking inventory as this will make the taking of the inventory more difficult. Do not trust any of your subordinates any more than you can help and depend upon no one but yourself to do your work — see to it yourself that it is done and that it is done well for you alone are responsible for the manner in which your work is performed. Do not bring any intoxicants in the commissary and do not permit any of your subordinates to do so. Do not depend on your memory for everything — the best mem- ories sometiriies fail. Use scratch pads and other forms of memoranda freely. (It is suggested that you use a "Tickler." See page 92). When a sale is made, make a record of it at once, either on your blotter or on a cash sales slip. In fact, never allow any article to leave the place until you have made a record of it. Should instructions be received that for any reason can not be carried out at the time, make a note of same somewhere where you can not fail to notice it at the proper time. Do not delegate to others duties that you should yourself per- form in person. Never allow a subordinate to perform his work in a careless manner. Never be late beginning a day's work — it is better to be a little ahead of time. Never allow stores that are deteriorating to remain near good ones — deteriorating stores should be at once separated from the rest of the stores, and, if possible, even placed in a separate building. Never permit onions or decayed vegetables of any kind to be stored near flour, coffee or any other article that is liable to jabsorb the smell. Whatever you do, don't show any favoritism in issuing stores — treat everyone alike. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 137 Don't forget that the primary business of the Subsistence Department is to supply the troops — and remember that the Sub- sistence Department exists for the convenience of the troops and that the troops do not exist for the convenience of the Subsistence Department. Never assume any authority which properly belongs to the Commissary Officer. Never make a sale without a pass-book, to persons who have them. This will save j^ou misunderstanding and trouble. Never get into argument with company mess-sergeants, or with the families of officers — in a firm but courteous manner always report such cases to the Commissary Officer for him to argue and settle. Do not take up the time of the Commissar}'- Officer by consulting him about trivial matters. How Can A Post Commissary-Sergeant Make Himself Most Useful to the Commissary Officer And What Are the Usual Ways of Doing So? By devotion to duty; by knowing what is to be done and by doing it without being told; by feeling that any reflection on the Subsistence Department or on the Commissary Officer is a reflection on the Sergeant himself; by faithfully carrying out the things enjoined under "Things That The Post Commissary-Sergeant Should Take Special Care To Do" and "Things That The Post Commissary Sergeant Should Take Special Care NOT To Do". "Customs of the Service" Affecting The Post Commissary-Sergeant. Discrepancies or differences in sales and issues are usually referred directly to the Post Commissary-Sergeant by the party con- cerned. (See page 2>17 A). LABOR-SAVING DEVICES, CONVENIENCES, TIME-SAVING METHODS. Necessary Knowledge. Time and trouble will be saved by being thoroughly familiar with the Subsistence Manual, the Issue and Conver- sion Table and such paragraphs of the Army Regulations and such War Department orders and circulars as affect the Subsistence Department. Record of Savings. As a protection against the loss or mis- placement of issue slips, some Post Commissary-Sergeants record in 138 CHAPTER IX. a blank ruled book the savings made by the companies, giving one page to each company. This plan also serves to facilitate the completion of Form No. 17 (Savings Purchased) at the end of the month, as it shows the total savings of each company during the month. SAVINGS OF CO. *'A," 24TH INFANTRY. •4-1 C o .2 V Ah o u M U3 V o s V C u Ah en -M Ah Aug. 99 99 Total Sep. J? Total 1-10 11-20 21-31 1-10 11-20 21-30 Practical "Pointers" Regarding the Care of Property And Stores. The storehouse should be kept well ventilated and swept daily, as its cleanliness is a matter of great importance. The entire storehouse should be inspected daily, and all stores should be moved and restacked once every quarter, generally when the quarterly supply of new stores arrives. Whenever field ranges and other cooking utensils are turned in they should be carefully examined and each article should be repaired, if necessary, and then cleaned and slightly greased, and stored in a dry place. The individual articles comprising the range should be checked and eacli range stored as a complete range, so as to be ready for instant issue. Knives, auger bits, saws, hammers, hatchets and other articles of hardware should be inspected occasionally and rubbed with an oiled rag to prevent rusting. Keep a number of good cats in the store-room — they are much better than poison and traps for making away with mice. Arrange the stores, especially those in sacks, so that the cats can pass everywhere. Not only should the stores be so arranged that there shall be ventilation and light between them, but there should also be enough room to sweep. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 139 Salmon, lobsters, olives, olive oil, cheese, etc., should be kept away from stoves and other heating apparatus. However, while these articles should he kept in a cool place, tliey should not be allowed to freeze. As far as practicable stores should be arranged in tlie same order in which they appear on the return. This facilitates the taking of the monthly inventory, which should be taken on the same date every month and everyone authorized to deal witli the commissary should be notified two or three days ahead of the time tliat the com- missary will be closed on that date. New potatoes and dried fruit in summer months often cause a great deal of trouble. When new potatoes are delivered, not more than 10 days' supply should be asked for and then there should be no "piling up" — if so, the potatoes are likely to get overheated' and rot quickly. A good deal of dried fruit is lost in late summer months by becoming "wormy." The fruit should be carefully examined when received and two or three times weekly when in the store-room. At the first sign of a worm, the fruit should be put at once in a cold refrigerator, which will kill the worms and keep the fruit ir; good condition. Breakfast bacon and hams should be removed from crates as soon as received and hung up on rafters. Never ask for more sales articles of a perishable nature than are actually required — it is better to run short for a few days than to have a lot of spoiled stores on hand. Keep dunnage at least 12 inches high under all stores. By this method floors can be kept clean and dr}^ while any leakage becomes noticeable at once and can be located without loss of time. Never pile stores against a wall. As stores longest on hand are first for issue or sale it is well to mark each lot with the date of receipt. This is readily done with a date stamp, for cases or boxes. Choose some particular spot on each, so that it can be easily found — for example, the space between the cusps of the cresent stenciled on them. For sacks, use a marking brush. In storing flour, or other stores which come in sacks, pile the sacks one aboA^e the other as high as necessary or convenient, making each pile by itself. Leave a space between piles about four inches. 140 CHAPTER IX. This will prevent cutting by mice, as they can have no foothold and no place to build nests. The sacks must be laid perfectly flat and piled carefully or they will topple over, but the absence of loss and trouble more than repays one for the extra labor. In storing vegetables for winter a root-cellar is the best place, but if not available a dry basement will answer very well. The vegetables should be sacked — 120 to 150 pounds each — and placed on dunnage. Three tiers is a good arrangment. Mark weights on ends of sacks — it will save trouble and handling when making inventory. In cold weather watch the thermometer (there should be one in every place used for storage) and if there is danger of freezing, fill all water buckets available and set around among the tiers. The water will freeze, perhaps, but it will protect the vegetables against all but the most severe cold. Bottled and canned goods can be treated the same way. If serving in the tropics the Post Commissary-Sergeant should be especially careful to see that all stores are protected from dampness and that there is a good current of air in the store-rooms. Vinegar barrels should be frequently examined and the hoops kept tight to avoid leakage. If there are no hydrants, or sufficient fire apparatus at the post, he should be careful to see that fire buckets and barrels filled with water are kept in the store-rooms, or in their immediate vicinity, for use in case of fire. Miscellaneous "Pointers" And Suggestions. When rations are issued always give the mess-sergeants or other persons in charge, a carbon duplicate of your issue slip. This usually saves a lot of questions and affords the organization com- mander a handy means of knowing the quantities of the various articles received and saved. The following is a convenient impro- vised form for an issue slip: THE POST COMMISSARY SERGEANT. 141 ISSUE SLIP OF Co. " ," til Infantry From to 1909. Number of Rations Articles Fresh Beef Bacon Corned Beef Roast Beef Corned Beef Hash.. Dried Fish Canned Fish Flour Hard Bread Corn Meal Baking Powder Hops Beans Rice Baked' Beans Potatoes, Fresh Onions, Fresh Tomatoes , Apples, Evaporated. . Peaches, Evaporated Prunes Jam Coffee Tea Sugar V^inegar Pickles Salt Pepper Soap Candles Toilet Paper Salt, coarse Matches Rations Bulk Drawn I Saved Price Amount (These two columns are for the convenience and use of the com.pany mess sergeant, if he desires to use them). Total saved Received the rations as indicated in column "drawn." Mess Sergeant, Co, Inf'y. (Note: These issue slips, whose actual size is 9 x 5 inches, should be put up in pad form so as to facilitate the making of carbon copies for the company mess ser- geants). 142 CHAPTER IX. The Army Regulations (Par. 1257, '08) prescribes that sales of subsistence shall be made to officers on their certificate that the stores are for their personal or family use, etc. The regular blank containing this certificate is Form No. 54, Sub. Dept. However, instead of officers' signing this form every time a purchase of sub- sistence stores is made, it is customary to issue them pass-books on which they order during the month, and then at the end of the month have them sign a certificate in this or similar form: Fort Leavenworth^ Kansas, 190. We, The Undersigned do hereby certify that during the month of 190. ., we have purchased from the Subsistence Department, Fort Leaven- worth, Kansas, Subsistence Stores for the exclusive use of ourselves and families and the organizations we command, to the amounts set opposite our respective names. Name and Rank; or Organization Amount Signature $ Cts. (Actual size, 7^^ x 12 inches.) Some Post Commissary-Sergeants, in the case of returns and other papers that are made out in duplicate, never copy from the original, but make out two separate and distinct papers and then compare the result on the bottom lines, and if they are the same, a mistake is hardly possible. This plan may take a little more time, but it really saves time in the long run, as it afifords an excelleni means of detecting and correcting errors, and obviates future correspondence with the War Department. The cash sales slip. Form 54, can be used for more than one person by having each purchaser sign immediately under his purchases All the slips used during the day can be fastened together, the top one dated and the totals of sales to each class of purchasers (officers, enlisted men, civil enployees), entered in the upper right hand corner. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 143 These totals are then entered in a ruled record like this: Cash Sales for 1909. Date Officers Enlisted Men Civilian Employees 10 Per Cent Total $ Cts. $ Cts. $ Cts. $ Cts. $ Cts. , (This columu may be used for the initials of the Commis- sary Officer to show that the cash has been turned into him from day to day.) Total Remember that the presence in the commissary of a Regimental Commissary-Sergeant no more relieves you of 3^our responsibilities than your presence there relieves the Commissary Officer of his responsibilities. Neither the Army Regulations, the Subsistence Man- ual or War Department orders, gives a Regimental Commissary - Sergeant any status in a post commissary, and he is, therefore, to be viewed in the light of a special duty man, pure and simple. Paper -Work. See Chapter XI, 'Taper-work. A Loss of Funds. For action to be taken in case of the loss of public funds, see 'Toss of Funds," page 123. B Books of reference, Maps, etc., and blank forms to be kept on hand, and Reports, Returns, Estimates and Requisitions to be made by the Commissary. Sup., Chap. IX. B Rubber Stamps Usually Used in the Office of the Commissary. (Required for on Form 50, the same stamps desired being described on back of requisition, under "Remarks.") €ffice of the QommUzavq, ^opt flee tmioinee, $oma. (Letter Head) 144 CHAPTER IX. Indorsement, OFFICE OF THE COMMISSARY, Fort Wright, fVash.j , 190 Mespectfully (For indorsements.) (a) No. OFFICE OF THE COMMISSARY, Fort Wright y Wash,, Received (b) Mo. Ojffice of Commissary, JUN 2 4 1906 Ft. (Das Moines, Iowa. , (On all commnnications received.) THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 145 (a) (b) THE COMMISSARY. FORT HARRISON, MONT. (To fill in blanks, etc.) 5 (a) FEB 1 - 1903 (Dater.) 7 (a) Fort Harrison, Mont Commutation of rations paid in cash on this order from to inclus ive Amount : $ Commissary. 146 CHAPTER IX. (b) Fact noted on order retained by soldier. (^^ Commutatioji of rations paid to men on this order days from I go to I go both days inclusive, at per day each. Total amount paid $ Paid by Paid , I go ^^^ Travel rations issued to men o?i this order for days from, I go to I go both days inclusive. Funds for the purchase of liquid coffee paid to same number of men for like num- ber of days at 21 cents each per day. Total amount paid $ Paid by cash. Paid igo , (^> No Subsistence furnished. (Indorsements on travel orders.) . THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 147 8 (a) (b) RECEIVED PAYMENT: Comiius.mry Sergt., U. S. A. (Some officers make it a practice to sign all formal money receipts themselves, ailowiug the Commissary Sergeant to give, when necessary, what might be termed a temporary or memorandum receipt.) (C) PAID (For use on bills, pass boolis, blotters, etc.) V (^) Colonel 2ist Cavalry^ Coinmanding. (b) Captain & Commissary, 11th Cavalry, Commissary. W Commissary Sergeant 24th Infantry. (For signature.) 148 10 CHAPTER IX. SAVINGS OF For the month of. igo -o c Articles $ c , PORK dh BACON e(, FLOUR @ BEANS . . . @> PEAS @ RICE @ COFFEE @ ' SUGAR ... . m VINEGAR @, SOAP @ SALT (CI) PEPPER . @ 0, 0\ 0, TOTAL VALUE Commissary Sergeant 24th Infantry. For u«e in Company pass books at end of each month. THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. 149 11 ^^^ Commissary General^ U. S. Army^ Washington^ D. C. ^^^ Chief Commissary ^ Department of Missouri^ Omaha^ Nebr. (Addi'esses.) 12 (a) Currency (^^ Subsistence of the Army 1903 (Money Papers.) 13 filed herewith (Aiithority.) 150 CHAPTER IX. 14 A TR.VE COPY: (For true copies of orders and other papers.) 15 Duplicate (On iuvoices. receipts and otlier paper; 16 (a) Carried forward (^) Brot. forward (Pass books, etc.) 17 CHIEF COMMISSARY DEPT. OF DAKOTA. ST. PAUL - MINN. 18 ' . STORES (Invoices and receipts of stores.) 19 Property (Property Papers.) 20 21 THE POST COMMISSARY-SERGEANT. Sub Voucher JVo , to Voucher JVo ^ Abstract of (Disbursements^ pertaining to Account Current of ist Lieut. , ^^gt- of. ...' ^ Commissary ^ for the month of. ^ igo (Indorsement on sub-vouchers.) The rate of pay to Civilian Employees does not exceed ^60.00 per month, the circum= stances of their service make issue of rations necessary, and the terms of their engage= m.ent provide for such issue. (Remark on abstract of Issues to Civilian Employees.) 151 22 23 JUNE 21 1906 (For marking on boxes or packages date of receipt of stores.) In addition to the above, a stamp of the name of the commissary and a set of month stamps, on a band similar to a dater. 152 CHAPTER X. CHAPTER X. THE ORDNANCE SERGEANT ^ General Duties.l Under the supervision of the Post Ordnance Officer, the Ordnance Sergeant has charge of the care and preservation of all ordnance stores and equipment for the general use of the post (except the modern armament and equipment of Coast Artillery posts) and of such surplus ordnance and ordnance stores as are not in the hands of troops. He is also charged with the preparation of the Ordnance returns and requisitions, and such other paper-work as may be connected with the office of Post Ordnance Officer. When necessary he also repairs arms in the hands of troops. Things The ORDNANCE SERGEANT Should Take Special Care To Do.i He should be prompt and attentive in the performance of his duties, and should always keep his work up to date. He should see that the proper amount of amunition, spare parts and target material is at all times on hand. He must carefull}^ verify all stores received and shipped See that receipts are received for all articles issued, both regular issues and on memorandum receipt. Things The ORDNANCE SERGEANT Should Take Special Care NOT To Do.i Not to issue Ordnance property without proper authority. Not to permit smoking in the, vicinity of the magazine by work- ing parties, or any other person, when the magazine door is open. Not to attempt to remove ammunition or explosives from the magazine when there is a fire in the vicinity of the magazine, but to close all doors, windows and ventilators, covering them with damp cloths. Not to allow explosives to be dragged from a car and thrown a The expression Post Ordnance Sergeant" is not used in the Army Regula- tions — only "Ordnance Sergeant" is used. 1 The collated experiences of four Ordnance Sergeants. THE ORDNANCE SERGEANT. 153 into wagons, but in all cases they are to be handled with the greatest care. There are a number of other things he should not do — they arc mostly covered by regulations, such as not attempting to put a primer in a cartridge case when it is loaded wnth powder. "Customs of the Service" Affecting ORDNANCE SERGEANTS. See Par. A, page t^'/'j. "Pointers" Regarding The Care and Preservation of Property. The Ordnance Sergeant should give special attention to the care and preservation of such ordnance and ordnance stores as are in his immediate charge. (For the proper way of preserving same, see page 56). An inventory of property on hand should be taken at least once every six months. All powders and ammunition should be kept separate from other stores — in the magazine, if one is provided, which should be opened and ventilated at least once a week. In issuing ammunition, or its components, that longest on hand should be issued first. Miscellaneous "Pointers" and Suggestions. When transferring property to someone away from the post, make an extra copy of the invoice and keep it on tile until the return of the receipts, properly signed. See that requisitions are made on time and that the quantities requested are sufficient to supply the command properly. Stencils cut out of paper — one with the name of each Arsenal you deal with — are a great convenience. Nearly all, if not all, the arsenals have machines for cutting such stencils, and it is more than likely that any one of them would gladly furnish stencils upon appli- cation. Returns, War Dept. Orders, etc. See Supplement, Chap. IX. 154 CHAPTER XL CHAPTER XL PAPER-WORK (See "Paper-Work and Correspondence," page 69). (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) In 1896 the major-general commanding the army remarked, "There is but one safe rule for military correspondence and the transmission of orders, and that is through military channels." A most important rule for company clerks, sergeants-major and others who are charged with the execution of paper-work, is, Be systematic and ahvays do your work as it comes up — never postpone it. A Correspondence between the line and the various staff bureaus should pass through the Adjutant General's Department. Communications are signed as follows: (a) Between officers exercising correlative commands, e. g., post commanders — by the officers themselves. (b) Between an inferior and a superior — by the inferior, the communication being addressed to the Adjutant General or the adjutant of the superior. (c) Between a superior and an inferior in the same com- mand — by a staff officer of the former. B Directions, instructions, orders, etc., signed by the staff officer of a general officer are signed, for example, "By command of Brigadier- General Smith;" those signed by the staff officer of an officer below the rank of brigadier-general, are, "By order," etc. C The expressions "Calling attention to," "Your attention is called to," etc., "The commanding officer directs that your attention be called," etc., are admonitive in character. The expressions "Inviting attention to," "Your attention is invited to," etc., "The commanding officer directs your attention be invited," etc., are not of an admonitive nature. D The expressions, "The commanding officer desires," etc., "The commanding officer wishes," etc., are tantamount to "The command- ing officer directs," etc. PAPER-WORK. 155 A Official communications and envelopes should be addressed to the office and not to the individual, thus: "The Adjutant General, Headquarters, Department of Dakota," "The Adjutant, Fort Missoula, Montana," "The Commanding Officer, Company A,' 24th Infantry," etc., and not to "Major John Smith, Adjutant General," etc. So likewise should checks and postal money orders pertaining to official matters be made payable to the office and not to the individual, thus: "Pay to the order of the Chief Paymaster, Dept. of Dakota," or to "The Paymaster, Kansas City, etc." The envelope containing G. C. M. proceedings to be forwarded to the convening authority, should be plainly marked "G. C. M. Pro- ceedings." All communications intended for the action of the War Depart- ment should be addressed to "The Adjutant General, War Depart- ment, Washington, D. C." A letter to any officer in the army addressed, "Care The Adju- tant General, U. S. A., Washington, D. C," will be duly forwarded. B Stamps for foreign official mail and official registered mail can be obtained from the quartermaster. C There is a tendency in the army to burden letters and official documents with the rank and regiment of the officers referred to in the text. It is rarely necessary in ordinary official correspondence to give more than the officer's rank and name. Thus, "Captain Smith has frequently invited attention to the needs," etc. There is no use writing, "Captain John A. Smith, 15th Cavalry, has frequently," etc. If, however, it be not perfectly evident who the officer is, his full name, rank and regiment should be mentioned once; after that his title and last name alone need be given. In writing to a post com- mander concerning one of his officers, it is hardly necessary to desig- nate the latter (certainly never more than once) by full name and regiment. In other words, ordinary official correspondence should not be burdened with the repetition of titles usual and necessarj^ in a formal order or in court-martial proceedings. Thus it seems almost ridiculous to write in the body of a letter: Major Frank A. Edwards, 4th Cavalry, Militar}' Attache, Rome, Italy. The address on the envelope might bear all of this; the letter itself might better commence: Major Frank A. Edwards 156 CHAPTER XL and after that, Major Edwards is quite sufficient to designate this officer. A It is not uncommon for officers of experience to begin an offi- cial letter addressed to another officer, with the title of the latter in- stead of with "Sir," Thus, an official communication to Lieutenant John R. Smith, would begin, Lieutenant;" one to Captain Jas. A. Corbin, ''Captain," and so on. B Formerly it was quite common for officers to begin official let- ters to the Adjutant General of the Army, the Quartermaster General or the head of any other War Department bureau, as "General," in- stead of "Sir," and some few of the older officers still do so. C Some officers, and also certain editors and writers in civil life, always write out in full military titles, using the forms "General," "Colonel," etc., instead of "Gen.'l," "Col.," etc., on the ground that the full spelling possesses a certain suggestion of courtesy and good form that is lacking in the abbreviation. According to the practice of The Adjutant General's Office it is considered better form to spell out titles in full in all formal com- munications, although sometimes, on account of their length, the words "Brigadier-General," "Major-General," "Lieutenant-Colonel," and "Lieutenant," are abbreviated "Brig.-Gen'l.," "Maj.-Gen'l.," "Lieut. -Col.," and "Lt.," or "Lieut.," but it is preferable to spell them out in full. Except colloquially, or sometimes in the body of a com- munication where the formal use of the full title would seem un- necessary, the office never uses the term "General" alone, but it is always "Lieutenant-General," "Major-General" or "Brigadier-Gen- eral." The abbreviation "Gen." is never used — it is always "Gen'l." D It is also the practice of The Adjutant General's Office to omit the hyphens in the designations "Adjutant General," "Quartermaster General," "Commissary General," "Inspector General" and "Judge Advocate General" (not Adjutant-General, etc.) However, in the Army Regulations these terms are sometimes found hyphenated and are so spelt in standard dictionaries. In the expression "The Adjutant General, U. S. A.," the "The" is spelt with a capital "T." E Make it an invariable rule to keep carbon or other copies of all letters, telegrams, and other official communications sent. PAPER-WORK. 157 In forwarding letters from enlisted men, officers should verify the statements made therein. Keep your Army Regulations posted up to date and before for- warding any paper read carefully the paragraphs on the subject and then see that all requirements are fulfilled. Letters and endorsements requiring answers should be carefully analyzed and the constituent parts requiring answers should be an- swered categorically. A A faithful compliance with the two foregoing paragraphs takes time, patience and labor, but in the long run saves much extra paper- work and trouble. It is really astonishing how many communications are returned to officers for compliance with certain indorsements or with certain paragraphs in the Army Regulations. In this connection, it may be remarked the paragraph in the Regulations that is violated the most is the one requiring officers who forward communications to indorse thereon their approval or disapproval, with, remarks. See Supplement, Chap. XVI, Par. 112. . B The following are some of the errors most frequently committed in paper-work: / Persons who are the first ones to receive communications fail- to brief them as required by Army Regulations. 2 Fourth-fold indorsement slips are added in the wrong place. 3 Papers that should be compared are carelessly compared or not compared at all before being submitted. 4 Court-martial charges are laid under the wrong Article of War. 5 Reports, returns, estimates, requisitions and other blanks that are prepared for an officer's signature, do not contain his rank, regiment and office held after the place for signature. Return promptly all papers that should be returned. If directed to complete a paper, return a communication or do anything else without delay or by a certain time, if it be impossible to do so, then the office concerned should be so notified without delay, with a full explanation. Thin, transparent paper should not be used in writing letters on which indorsements are to be placed, but should such letters be re- ceived, then before indorsing paste stiff paper on fold. C Returns, Reports, Estimates and Requisitions, i Before filling out a blank form read carefully all notes thereon, and all Army Regu- lation paragraphs and orders on the subject. 158 CHAPTER XL 2 All columns on forms must be filled in. When, owing to the absence of the necessary information or for any other reason, columns or headings can not be filled in, "Unknown" or a dash should be entered. J When periodical reports are required they should be ren- dered whether or not there be anything to report. 4 One or more diagonal lines should be drawn through the blank space after the last entry on estimates, requisitions and pass lists. 5 Signatures to returns, estimates and other papers should agree with the name as given in the heading. For instance, if "John R. Moore" appears in the heading, the paper should be so signed and not "J. R. Moore". A Miscellaneous., i "INDORSEMENT" and "INCLOSURE" (not "Endorsement" and "Enclosure") are the forms used in the Army Regulations. 2 The term "Through Military Channels" Is really not a definite, exact statement and should be used very rarely on papers going up. "The Military Channel" to The Adjutant General, U. S Army, for example, may be direct or through Department Headquarters. There are cases, of course, where the use of the term would be proper, but they are rare. If a paper is forwarded through military channels, saying so is useless. 5 A letter is always briefed in the first office in which it is received. The brief is always on the first fold, which, beginning at the top, is apportioned about as follows: (a) About V/i inch space for office stamp of A. G. O. Div., Dep't., etc. (h) Office, place and date of letter; (c) About 1 inch space; (d) Name of writer and rank (in case of commanding officers and staff officers, only the ofiicial designation should appear); (e) About 1 inch space; (f) Briefest synopsis of contents (only a general idea of the subject) ; PAPER- WORK. 159 (g) Remaining space, upper part for enumeration of in- closures — lower, for office marks. The inclosures should be noted serially, by number and indorsement. When the brief is typewritten, ruling is unnecessary, but when a pen is used, a and f should be followed by a red line clear across, and c and e spaces should have a short, red line across the middle. A 4 In making out Descriptive Lists, the following should be borne in mind: (a) In case a noncommissioned officer is to be dis- charged during his absence on detached service, the company commander should note on the Descriptive List whether it is desired his warrant be continued in force upon re -enlist- ment. (b) When a man is transferred to another organization, evidence of previous convictions by court-martial within the last year and during the present enlistment, if any, should • accompany the Descriptive List. Also, if he has been absent without leave, the number of days absent should be noted, as not only does he forfeit his pay and his clothing allowance during such absence, but the time must be made up, and nor does the time absent count in computation of time for retirement. (c) When men on extra or special duty are transferred to another organization at the same post, the fact, with num- ber, date, etc., of order, should be stated. (d) Special care should be taken to note with detail and accuracy all former service, especially foreign service. This information should also be noted with equal care and detail on a soldier's discharge certificate, for it affects directly a soldier's retirement after thirty years' service. B 5 Papers made out in duplicate, triplicate, etc., are marked in the lower left-hand corner, 'Tn Duplicate," "In Triplicate," etc. 6 In case an original paper has been lost and it becomes neces- sary to make another, the new one is marked "Duplicate." C 7 Whenever a signature is copied, "(Sgd.)" is written before the same. D 8 When practicable, true copies of papers should be made by another officer than the one interested. A "true" copy may be made 160 CHAPTER XL by any one, but an "official" copy can be made only by the officer having authority to issue the order, or by an officer through whom the issuing authority may issue orders, e. g., chiefs of staff, adjutants general, aids and adjutants. 9 Interlineations and corrections should be initialed by the one wlio makes them. 10 Papers submitted for signature should always contain the rank, regiment and official designation below the place where the officer is to sign. 11 A clerk or anyone else who typewrites anything, should al- ways read the paper carefully before submitting it. 12 Always compare carefully before submitting them, all papers requiring comparison. THE MUSTER AND THE PAY ROLLS A Read carefully and intelligently and then comply with oil the notes on the rolls. Enter on the Muster Rolls, everything affecting in any way the status or record of every member of the company during the period covered. (Note: However, only in case of sickness at date of muster, is the fact noted on the muster rolls). Enter on the Pay Rolls, only such facts as affect the soldiers' pay. These rubber stamps can be used with advantage in the prepara- tion of the Muster and the Pay Rolls: J. Stop $ per S. C. 6. Fort Leavenworth, Kan. 2. Pay due sharpshooter. (Station of Company.) 5. Pay due as marksman. 7. 30 MAY 07 (Dates for date of last payment, etc.) 4. Co. B, 24th Infty. 8 Capt., 24th Infantry. 5. Captain Smith. Commanding Co. B. (Name of Paymaster.) See "Rubber Stamps," in index. For instructions regarding the preparation of the Mustkk and the P w Rolls. see Supplement, Chap. XI. MILITARY COURTESY. 161 CHAPTER XII. MILITARY COURTESY Its Importance. The recruit does not see the necessity for saluting, standing at attention, and other forms of courtesy, because he does not under- stand their significance, — their object. It is a well- known fact that military courtesy is a very import- ant part of the education of the soldier, and there are good reasons for it. General Orders No. 183, Division of thp Philip- pines, 1901, says: "In all armies the manner in which military cour- tesies are observed and rendered by officers and soldiers, is the in- dex to the manner in which other duties are performed." The Army Regulations tells us, "Courtesy among military men is indispensable to discipline; re- spect to superiors will not be con- fined to obedience on duty, but will be extended on all occasions." THE NATURE OF SALUTES AND THEIR ORIGIN. (a) The Civilian Salute. When a gentleman raises his hat to a lady he is but continuing a custom that had its beginning in the days of knighthood, Avhen every knight wore his helmet as a protection against foes. However, when coming among friends, especially ladies, the knight would remove his helmet as a mark of confidence and trust in his friends. In those days failure to remove the helmet in the presence of ladies signi 162 CHAPTER XII. fied distrust and want of confidence — today it signifies impoliteness and a want of good breeding. (b) The Military Salute. From time immemorial subordinates have always uncovered be- fore superiors, and equals have always acknowledged each other's presence by some courtesy — this seems to be one of the natural, nobler instincts of man. It was not so many years ago when a sen- tinel saluted not only with his gun but by taking off his hat also. However, when complicated headgear like the bearskin and the hel- met came into use, they could not be readily removed and the act of re- moving the hat was finally conventionalized into the present salute — into the movement of the hand to the visor as if the hat were going to be removed. Every once in a while a man is found who has the mistaken idea that he smothers the American spirit of freedom, that he sacrifices his independence, by saluting his officers. Of course, no one but an anarchist or a man with a small, shrivelled-up mind can have such ideas. Manly deference to superiors, which in the Army is merely recognition of constituted authority, does not imply admission of inferiority any more than respect for law implies cowardice. The recruit should at once rid himself of the idea that saluting and other forms of military cour tesy are un-American. The salute is the soldier's claim from the very highest in the land to instant recognition as a soldier. The raw recruit by his simple act of saluting, commands like honor from the ranking general of the Army — aye, from even the President of the United States. While the personal element naturally enters into the salute to a certain extent, when a soldier salutes an officer he is really saluting the office rather than the officer personally — the salute is rendered as a mark of respect to the rank, the position that the officer holds, to the authority with which he is vested. A man with the true soldierly instinct never misses an oppor- tunity to salute his officers. MILITARY COURTESY. 163 As a matter of fact, military courtesy is just simply an application of common, every-day courtesy and common sense. In common, every-da}' courtesy no man with the instincts of a gentleman ever thinks about taking advantage of this thing and that thing in order to avoid paying to his fellow-man the ordinary, conventional cour- tesies of life, and if there is ever any doubt about the matter, he takes no chances but extends the courtesy. And this is just exactly what the man who has the instincts of a real soldier does in the case of military courtesy. The thought of "Should I salute or should I not salute" never enters the mind of a soldier just because he happens to be in a wagon, in a post office, etc. In all armies of the world, all officers and sol diers are required to salute each other whenever they meet or pass, the subordinate saluting first. The salute on the part of the subordinate is not intended in any way as an act of degradation or a mark of inferiority, but is simply a military courtesy that is as binding on the officer as it is on the pri- vate, and just as the enlisted man is required to salute the officer first, so is the officer required to salute his superiors first. It is a bond uniting all in a common profession, marking the fact that above them there is an authority that both recognize and obey — the Country! Indeed, by custom and regu- lations, it is as obligatory for the ranking general of the x\rmy to- return the salute of the recruit, as it is for the latter to give it. Let it be remembered that the military salute is a form of greeting that belongs exclusively to the military arm of the Government — to the soldier, the sailor, the marine — it is the mark and prerogative of the military man and he should be proud of having the privilege of using that form of salutation — a form of salutation that marks him as a member of the Profession of Arms — the profession of Napoleon, Wellington, Grant, Lee, Sherman, Jackson and scores of others of the greatest and most famous men the world has ever known. The military salute is ours, it is ours only. Moreover, it belongs only to the soldier who is in good stand- ing, the prisoner under guard, for instance, not being allowed to salute. Ours is a grand fraternit}^ of men-at-arms, banded together Needed : A Week of extra fatigue. 164 CHAPTER XII. for national defense, for the maintenance of law and order — we are bound together by the love and respect we bear the flag — we are pledged to loyalty, to one God, one country — our lives are dedicated to the defense of our country's flag — the officer and the private be- long to a brotherhood whose regalia is the uniform of the American soldier, and they are known to one another and to all men, by an honored sign and symbol of knighthood that has come down to us from the ages— THE MILITARY SALUTE! WHOM TO SALUTE Do Regulars salute officers of the Navy and Marine Corps? Yes, at all times and in all situations they salute them the same as they salute all officers in their own regiment and all other regiments of the Regular Army. (A. R. 396). Are officers of the Organized Militia sainted? If in uniform they are saluted the same as Reg- ular officers. (A. R. 396). However, they are saluted by sentinels only when in the service of the United States. At maneuvers and camps of in- struction it is thought they are, for saluting purposes, in the service of the United States. Are retired Army officers saluted? Yes, they are saluted like all other officers. Are military and naval foreign officers saluted? The Manual of Guard Duty requires sentinels to salute them but there are no instructions about other enlisted men saluting them. However, as an act of courtesy they should be saluted the same as our own officers. RESPECT TO BE PAID TO THE NATIONAL AIR AND SALUTING THE FLAG (The recruit will actually go through the act of rendering the salutes). What should he done when the Star Spangled Banner is played by the band on a formal occasion (except retreat)? Every man should stand at attention, such position being retained until the last note of the music. No salute is rendered. Should the same respect he observed toward the national air of any other country, when it is played as a compliment to official repre- sentatives of such country? MILITARY COURTESY. 16 :jD Yes, but only when it is played as a complimejit to the official rep- representatives of the country. When the flag is lowered at retreat and the band plays "The Star Spangled Banner," or the field music sounds "To the Color/' what should be done? All soldiers out of ranks face toward the flag, stand at attention and render the prescribed salute at the last note of the music. NOTES 1 In practice "all soldiers out of ranks" means all soldiers in the vicinity of where the ceremony is taking place — it does not mean, for instance, soldiers in another part of the post, who can hear the music but can not see the flag. 2 By "the prescribed salute" is meant, if unarmed, the "right hand salute;" if armed with the rifle, the "rifle salute;" if armed with a drawn saber, the "present salute;" if wearing a sheathed saber or other side arms, the "right hand salute." 5 Some officers when in civilian clothes follow the sensible and patriotic custom of standing and uncovering whenever the band plays "The Star Spangled Banner." SALUTES TO COLORS AND STANDARDS What should be done when passing the national or regimental color or standard uncased? The prescribed salute should be rendered. \\'ith no arms in hand, the salute is made by uncovering and holding the headdress, top outward, in the right hand, opposite the left shoulder, right forearm against the breast. If armed with the rifle or drawn saber, the hat is not removed, but the prescribed rifle or saber salute is rendered. Cased colors and standards, that is to say, those that are in their waterproof cases, are not saluted. Nor are the flags on flag staffs and other permanent poles saluted. (Note: By "Colors" and "Standards" is meant thri national flags and the regimental flags that are carried by regiments and also by engineer battalions. They may be of either silk or btmting. In the Army Regulations the word "color" is used in referring to regiments of Infantry, batta- lions of Engineers and Philippine Scouts, and the Coast Artil- lery, while "Standard" is used in reference to regiments of Cavalry and Field Artillerj'. By "Flag" is meant the national emblem that waves from flag-staffs and other stationary poles. They are always of bunting. They are not saluted). ^% 166 CHAPTER XJI. ij'' ''"' * i t .-- -a c CO o £ >H >> o CO u 3 -*-> o CO o (U c Cfl 3 CO CO CO a CO 0) 2 -C a c -r; ^ is o CO CO a; 0) > _c o 'i— » o c 2 3 3 CO O CO CO ^ o CO CO _o CO p 1 •^•^ o ■ ~co -fi -4-1 CO CO O -C _j-- ^D o . •4^ o '*— • CO o ■ * 1 ij too i) - "co o _c -J^ •♦^ (U - —4 f/i -c: o CO •*-* a < CO CO -o • c-^ a; »^ _o o MILITARY COURTESY. 167 WHEN AND HOW TO SALUTE What is "saluting distance" f It is the limit within which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily recognized ; it is assumed to be about thirty paces. No salutes, except as otherwise prescribed, are made at a greater distance than thirty paces. Are salutes ever rendered when marching in double time or at the trot or gallop? No, sir; a soldier must first come to quick time or walk before saluting. Should a soldier salute an officer zvho is passing in double time or at a trot or gallop f Yes, sir ; he should. How does an enlisted man salute an officer? If the enlisted man is without arms, he salutes with the hand farthest from the officer. If mounted, he salutes with the right hand. However, when imme- diately facing an officer it is customary to salute with the right hand. If the officer and soldier are approaching each other on the same walk, for instance, the hand is brought up to the headdress when six paces from the officer. If they are on opposite sides of the street, the hand is brought up when about ten paces in advance of the officer. If the officer and soldier are not going in opposite directions and the officer does not approach within six paces, the salute is rendered when the officer reaches the nearest point to the soldier. If a soldier passes an officer from the rear, the hand is raised as he reaches the officer; if an officer passes a soldier from the rear, the soldier salutes just as the officer is about to pass him. The salute with the hand is rendered as follows : Raise the hand smartly until the tip of the fore-finger touches the lower part of the headdress (if uncovered, the forehead) above the eye, thumb and fingers extended and joined, palm to the right (or left), forearm inclined at about 45 degrees, hand and wTist straight; looking tozvard the person 168 CHAPTER XII. sainted. This position is maintained until the salute has been acknowl- edged or the officer has passed, when the hand is brought down with snap. IVJwt are the mistakes usually made by soldiers in saluting F I They do not begin the salute soon enough ; often they do not raise the hand to the headdress until they are only a pace or two from Notice hozv tJie head is turned toward the officer saluted. the oflficer — the salute sJwiild alivays begin zvlicn at least six paces -from the officer. 2 They do not turn the head and eyes toward the officer who is saluted — the head and eyes should always be turned toward the officer saluted and kept turned as long as the hand is raised. S The hand is not kept to the headdress until the salute is acknowl- edged by the officer — the hand should ahvays be kept raised until the salute has been acknowledged, or it is evident the officer has not seen the saluter. MILITARY COURTESY. 169 4 When standing the heels are not brought to- gether liefore saluting — tlie heels should always he hrought together. 5 The salute is often rendered in an indifferent, lax manner — the salute should always he rendered witli life. siKif^ and vim; the soldier should alzvays render a salute as if he MEANT IT. Is it uumilitary to salute zvith iJie other hand in the pocket, or a cigar, cigarette or pipe in the mouth f Yes ; it is most unmilitary and a soldier who so salutes is sure to be reprimanded or punished. Should officers be saluted zvhen in civilian clothing F Yes; they are saluted whether in uniform or not. Do enlisted men in civilian clothing salute? Yes; and they salute whether the officer is in uni- form or not. // an officer is accompanied by a lady that the sol- dier knows, should the soldier remove . his cap or render the military salute? He should render the military salute. A soldier never tips his hat to an officer, it matters not by whom the soldier or officer may be accompanied. How does the enlisted man, armed witJi the saber or rifle, out of ranks, salute? He salutes with the saber, if drawn ; otherwise with the hand. If on foot, and armed with the rifle, he renders the prescribed rifle salute. What has been said about distances, raising the hand, looking toward the person saluted, etc., in the case of the hand salute, also applies when the salute is rendered with saber or rifle. When does a soldier salute zvith the "present arms?" Only when on post as a sentinel. At all other times when armed with the rifle, he gives the pre- scribed rifle salute. Do prisoners under charge of sentinels salute officers? This soldier is hear- ing something that's "making a noise" like a Summary Court. 170 CHAPTER XII. No, sir; they do not. They merely stand at attention. It is custom- ary for paroled prisoners and others who are not under the immediate charge of sentinels, to fold their, arms when passing or addressing officers. What should a mounted soldier do before addressing an officer who is not mounted^ He should always dismount. // accompanying an officer, where should a soldier walk? About two paces to the officer's left and rear. If riding this dis- tance is about doubled. Hozv do noncommissioned officers or privates in command of de- taclunents, salute officers? If marching, and if the detachment is not at attention, it is called to attention as the officer approaches, and the command "i. EYES" is given in time to add "2. RIGHT (or LEFT)" when about six paces from the officer, at which time the noncommissioned officer or private in com- mand of the detachment salutes — if unarmed, with the hand ; if armed with the rifle or saber, the prescribed rifle or saber salute is rendered. The command "FRONT" is given when the officer has passed. . If the detachment is in column at a halt, the ^^Kt salute is rendered as described, except that "EYES P>i * RIGHT (or LEFT)" is omitted. Only the commander salutes. If the detachment is halted in line, and armed, arms are presented. Unarmed troops salute as prescribed for armed bodies, except that when halted the present is omitted. What should he done when an officer passes in rear of troops? They are brought to attention and so kept until the officer has passed, but no salute is rendered. Do troops under arms salute other armed bodies? Yes; the same as they salute officers. The junior commander, if known, salutes first. // an enlisted man is seated, what should he do upon the approach of an officer? He should rise, face toward the officer, and sa- lute. If standing, he faces the officer for the same pur- pose. H the officer remains in the same place or upon the same ground, such compliment need not be re- peated. MILITARY COURTESY. 171 // indoors, what should an enlisted man do upon the approach of an officer? If unarmed, he uncovers and stands at attention ; he does not salute unless he addresses or is addressed by the officer. A soldier with side arms, (pistol, saber or bayonet) is considered armed. If armed with the rifle, and either covered or uncovered, he sa- lutes from the position of the order or the trail. If un- covered, he should, if practicable, cover before saluting.l It is customary to salute from the order, unless there is mud or fdth on the floor. Do soldiers actually at luorh cease work to salute an officer? No; not unless addressed by him. What should a soldier always do before address- ing an officer? He should always salute with the weapon he is armed with; or, if unarmed, whether covered or un- covered, with the hand. He also makes the same salute after receiving a reply, or when leaving the ofificer. What should lie do zvhen addressed by an officer? He should salute. He also salutes at the end of the conversation. When an officer enters a room where there are soldiers, zvhat should be done? The word "ATTENTION" is given by someone who perceives him, when all rise and remain standing 1 The Army Regulations says: "Indoors, an unarmed enlisted man uncovers and stands at attention upon the approach of an ofificer ; he does not salute unless he addresses or is addressed by the ofificer." According to custom, the term "indoors" is interpreted as meaning military ofifices, barracks, quarters and similar places — it does not mean such places as stores, storehouses, riding halls, stables, post exchange build- ings, hotels, places of amusement, depots and exhibition halls, etc. In such places an unarmed soldier remains either covered or uncovered, according to the custom of the place, and whether or not he salutes depends upon circumstances, the occasion for saluting being determined by common sense and military spirit. For instance, an enlisted man riding in a street car, or in the act of purchasing goods in a store, or eating in a hotel, would not salute unless addressed by the ofhcer. However, in the case of a soldier occupying a seat in a crowded street car, if he recognized a person standing to be an ofificer, it would be but an act of military courtesy for him to rise, salute and offer the officer his seat. W^ ^ 172 CHAPTER XII. in the position of a soldier until the officer leaves the room. If unarmed, they uncover and no man salutes unless spoken to ; if armed, they salute. However, soldiers at meals do not rise — they merely cease eating and remain at attention. But if any man were addressed by the officer, he would rise and salute. When an officer approaches a number of enlisted men out of doors and not in ranks, what should he done? The word "ATTENTION" should be given by someone who per- ceives him, when all stand at attention and all salute. i It is customary for all to salute at or about the same instant, taking the time from the soldier nearest the officer, and who salutes when the officer is six paces from him. // several soldiers are walking together, what should he done upon the approach of an officer f The word "ATTENTION" should be given by someone who perceives him, and all should salute as described in the preceding answer, without hailing. Should a soldier riding in a wagon salute f Yes; but if seated he would salute without rising. There is no more reason why a soldier riding in a wagon or carriage should not salute than there is why a soldier on horse back should not salute. Should a soldier who is driving a wagon or car- riage salute? Yes, if both hands are not necessarily occupied. There is no more reason why a soldier driving a wagon or a carriage should not salute than there is why he should not speak to passing friends or raise his cap to lady acquaintances. In either case it is merely a ques- tion of courtesy. (This Chapter, Chapter XII, "Military Courtes3^" Chapter XIII, "Guard Duty," Chapter XVII, "Care of the Health and First Aid to the Sick and Injured," and Chapter XVIII, "The Use, Description and Management of the Rifle," are published in their entirety as parts of "PRIVATES' MANUAL." Price, 50 cts. a copy. A liberal discount on quantity. General Agent for U. S. : The U. S. Infantry Association, Washington, D. C. ; for the Philip- pines, The Post Exchange, Fort Wm. McKinley). Who said, "Extra squad drill, eh?" 1 In some regiments it is customary for only one (a noncommissioned officer, if there be one present) to salute for the group, but this is contrary to Regulations and should not be done. GUARD DUTY. 173 CHAPTER XIII. GUARD DUTY (See corresponding cliapier in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) A Guard duty is one of the soldier's most important duties, and in all armies of the world the manner in which it is performed is an index to the discipline of the command and the manner in which other duties are performed. Upon the guard's vigilance and readiness for action depend not only the enforcement of military law and orders, but also the safety and pro- tection of the post and the quelling of sudden disorder, perhaps even mutiny. The importance of guard duty is increased durhig times of war, when the very safety of the army depends upon the vigilance of the sentinels, who are required to watch that others may sleep and thus refresh them- selves from the labors of the day. The sentinels are the guardians of the repose, quiet and safety of the camp. Respect for Sentinels. •B Respect for the person and office of a sentinel is as strictly enjoined by military law as that required to be paid to an officer. As it is expressed in the Manual of Guard Duty, "All persons of whatever rank in the service are required to observe respect toward sentinels". Invested as the private soldier frequently is, while on his post, with a grave responsibility, it is proper that he should be fully protected in the discharge of his duty. To permit anj'-one, of whatever rank, to molest or interfere with him while thus employed, without becoming liable to severe penalty, would clearly establish a precedent highly prejudicial to the interests of the service. (Davis' Military Law). Duty of sentinels. C A sentinel, in respect to the duties with which he is charged, repre- sents the superior military authority of the command to which he belongs, and whose orders he is required to enforce on or in the vicinity of his post. As such he is entitled to the respect and obedience of all persons who come within the scope of operation of the orders which he is required to carry into effect. Over military persons the authority of the sentinel is 174 CHAPTER XIII. absolute, and disobedience of his orders on the jjart of such persons consti tutes a most serious military offence and is prejudicial in the highest degree to the interests of discipline. (Davis' Military Law). Privates of the Guard. Is a member of the guard allowed to remove his accoutrements or clothing, or to leave the immediate vicinity of the gaurd house without permission? He is not. From whom should he get the necessary permission? From the commander of the guard. During his tour of guard duty to whose orders is a soldier subject? . To the orders of the commanding officer, the officer of the day, the officers and noncommissioned officers of the guard only. // a sentinel should receive an order from an officer who is not authorized to give him orders, what should he do? He should at once call for the corporal of the guard and report the fact to him. H directed by the corporal to obey the order, the sentinel will do so ; otherwise he will not. Does a member of the guard salute when not engaged in the perform- ance of a specific duty? Yes, if the proper execution of a duty does not prevent it, he will salute all officers that pass. Whenever the guard or relief is dismissed, what does each man do with his rifle? He will place his rifle in the armracks and not remove it therefrom unless he requires it in the performance of some duty. After a private has been assigned to a relief and a post what must he take care to do? To remember the number of his relief and the number of his post and under no circumstances to change from one relief or post to another relief or post. When the guard is formed, what does a member of the guard do? He will fall in promptly, in his proper place, with his rifle. When the roll is called, what does lie do? As his name or his number and relief are called, he answers "Here", and comes to order arms. What does a member of the guard do when his relief is formed? At the command "1. (Such) relief, 2. Fall in", he falls in at once, / GUARD DUTY. 175 in his proper place according to his number, 2, 4, 6, and so on in the front rank, and 1, 3, 5, and so on in the rear rank, or in the order of their respective posts from right to left, according as the relief is in double or single rank. At the command, "Call off", commencing on the right the men call off alternately rear and front rank, "one", "two", "three", etc; if in single rank they call off from right to left. May a soldier hire another to do his duty for himf No, sir; under no circumstances. Should a soldier be found drunk while on guard duty, what punish- ment will he suffer? This is considered a very serious offence and the offender will suffer such punishment as a courtmartial may direct. ORDERS FOR SENTINELS ON POST A Orders for sentinels on post are divided into two classes, general orders and special orders. • Special orders define the duties to be performed by a sentinel on a particular post, and are prescribed by the commanding officer. The number and limits of his post invariable constitute part of the special orders of every sentinel on post. General orders are those that apply to all posts in the Army and they are prescribed by the War Department. Sentinels are required to memorize the following : My general duties are: To take charge of this post and all Government property in view; To walk my post in a military manner, keeping constantly on the alert, observing everything that takes place within sight or hearing; To report every breach of orders or regulations that I am in- structed to enforce; To repeat all calls from posts more distant from the guardhouse than my own; To quit my post only when properly relieved; To receive, transmit, and obey all orders from and allow myselt to be relieved by the commanding officer, officer of the day, an officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard only; To hold conversation with no one except in the proper discharge of my duty; In case of fire or disorder to give the alarm; To allow no one to commit nuisance in the vicinity of my post; 176 CHAPTER XIII. In any case net covered by instrjctions, to call the corporal of the guard; To salute all officers and cclcrs or standards not cased; At night to exercise the greatest vigilance. Between retreat (cr o'clock, naming- the hour designated by the commanding officer) and broad daylight, (cr o'clock, naming the hour desicr- nated by the commanding officer), challenge all persons seen on or near my post, and allow no person to pass without proper authority. In addition to the foregoing, sentinels posted at the guardhouse or guard tent will be required to memorize the following : For the orders of a sentinel on outpost duty, see 254 A. Between reveille and retreat, to turn out the guard for all persons entitled to the compliment, for all colors or standards not cased, and for all armed parties approaching my post, except troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the guard. At night, after challenging any person cr party, to advance no one but call the corporal of the guard, repeating the answer to the challenge. What is meant by taking charge of a post and all Government property in view? A sentinel on post represents the Government, and he is placed there to look after its interest. A sentinel's post is not merely the line on which he walks, but extends to the next posts on either end. Not only is the sentinel required to look after all property on his post, but he is also required to see that all Government property in the immediate neighbor- hood suffers no injury of any kind. Explain the vicaning of, and the reasons for, the second general order. "To walk my post in a military manner", means to maintain the bearing and appearance of a soldier, keeping the uniform orderly and clean and avoiding careless or slouchy movements. The reason for this is that a sentinel on post usually occupies a position where he is generally seen by the officers and soldiers of his own organization as well as by those of others and by civilians, and under such conditions, a sentine' walking his post in a careless and slouchy manner would be an unmilitary performance that would naturally create a most unfavorable impression, even, in some cases, to the extent of bringing scorn and discredit upon the entire command. "On the alert" means on the lookout or watch against attack or danger; ready to act, and "Keeping constantly on the alert, observing GUARD DUTY. 177 everything that takes place within sight or hearing" means that the sentinel shall keep his mind all the time upon his duty and not fall into any day-dreams. In this manner he may often observe things that would otherwise pass unnoticed, and though they may seem to him to have no bearing upon his duty, yet from the answers of an alert sentinel an officer may sometimes obtain valuable information. What is meant by "Breach of orders or regulations"? A "Breach of orders or regulations" means the breaking or violating of orders or regulations. What is meant by "Quitting post" and by "Properly relieved"? "Quitting post" means to leave, to go away from a post. "Properly relieved" means to be relieved by someone who has the authority to relieve a sentinel, that is to say, the commanding officer, the officer of the day, an officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard, only. What is the punishment for a sentinel leaving his post before being properly relieved? This is considered a very serious offence and may be punished by death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. What does "Transmit orders" mean? It means to turn over orders to the next sentinel. Explain zvhat is meant by "Disorder"? A disorder is a disturbance, or breach of public order of any kind, such as loud and boisterous conduct on the part of a drunken man, or two or more men fighting or otherwise misbehaving themselves, etc. What is meant by "Nuisance" and by "Vicinity"? "Nuisance" means anything that is disagreeable or offensive or that annoys or worries, such as urinating, etc. "Vicinity" means near or close to. What are "Colors" and "Standards" and when are they "Cased"? Colors are the national flag and the regimental flag carried by the Infantry and other foot troops. Standards are the national flag and the regimental flag carried by the Cavalry and Field Artillery; they are smaller than those carried by the Infantry. Colors and Standards are "Cased" when they are rolled and covered with a water-proof case. Explain the meaning of "To exercise the greatest vigilance". It means to use the greatest watchfulness, to be on the keenest- lookout. Upon reaching the end of his post is a sentinel required to halt and 178 CHAPTER XIII. change the position of his rifle, or to execute to the rear march, pre- cisely as prescribed in tlie drill regulations? No, sir; he faces about while marching in the way most con- venient to him, and either to the right-about or left-about. Must he always go to the end of his post before turning? No, sir ; he may turn at any part of his post, as may be best suited to the proper performance of his duties. Hew may a sentinel carry his rifle? On either shoulder, and in wet or severe weather, when not in a sentry box, he may carry it at a secure. How do sentinels stand in sentry boxes? At ease. When are sentry boxes used? Only in wet weather, or at other times when specially authorizcl by the commanding officer. May sentinels ever stand at ease en their posts? Yes, sir; in very hot weather, provided they can in this positioi effectively discharge their duties. However, they will never take advantage of this privelege without the express authority of the commander of the guard or the officer of the day. II hen calling for any purpose, challenging, or Jiolding cininninicatiou zvith airy person. In zv docs a sentinel hold his weapon? A dismounted ser.tinel, armed with the rifle or saber, takes the posi- tion of port arms or saber. At night a dismounted sentinel armed with pistol, takes the position of raise pistol in challenging or holding communi- cation. A mounted sentir.el in the daytime does not ordinarily draw his weapon in calling or in holding communication, but, if drawn, he hold.-^ it at advance rifle, raise pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed with the rifle, pistol or saber. At night, in challenging and in holding communication, he has his weapon at advance rifle, raise pistol, or port saber, according as he is armed. May a uicuntcd scniincl disnu nut while < n duty i/.v (/ sentinel? No, sir; not without authority. Should a sentinel ever quit his piece? Only on an explicit order from the commanding officer, officer ot the day, an officer or nt)ncommissioncd officer of the guard. Under no circumstances should he ever yeald it to anyone else. GUARD DUTY. 179 (Note: Unless necessity therefor exists, no person should require a sentinel to quit his piece, even to inspect it). What sJiould a sentinel do zcitJi suspicions persons seen prowling about Jiis post, with parties to a disorder occurring on or near his post and with unauthorised persons who attempt to enter camp at night? He will arrest them and turn them over .to the corporal of the guard. What should a sentinel do in case he should notice anytliing unusual or suspicious? He should at once call for the corporal of the guard and report the facts to him. If, by reason of sickness or other cause, it becomes necessary for a sentinel to call for relief, how would he do so? "Corporal of the guard. No. ; Relief," giving the number of his post. How does a sentinel call for the corporal of the guard for any other purpose than relief? "Corporal of the guard, No. ", adding the number of his post In no case will the sentinel call, "Never mind the corporal"; nor will the corporal heed such a call, if given. // a sentinel is to be relieved, what does Jie do on tJie approach of the relief? When the relief is thirty paces from him, he halts and faces toward the relief with arms at right shoulder. He comes to port arms with the new sentinel. He then gives in a low voice, in detail, his instructions to the new sentinel. At the command "Post", both sentinels resume the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal and step back so as to allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then commands. 1. Forward, 2, March; the old sentinel takes his place in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position as those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at right shoulder until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he begins to w^alk his post. ORDERS FOR SENTINELS EXCEPT THOSE AT THE POST OF THE GUARD What should a sentinel, except the one at the post of the guard, do in case of fire? He should call, "Fire, No. ", adding the number of his post; if possible, he should extinguish the fire by his own efforts. If the danger be great, he will discharge his piece before calling. 180 CHAPTER XIII. What should be done in the case of a fire in a stable? First the proper alarm given ; then the door toward the wind closed, immediately after which the sentinel should begin to take the horses oui", commencing with those nearest the fire. If the fire is not burning fast, the horses are turned into one of the corrals, not near the fire, or they are tied to the picket line ; for, if merely turned loose they are liable to run back into the fire. If a horse refuses to lead out or away from the fire, his head should be covered with a sack, coat or something else and he should then be led out. If the fire is making such headway that there is not time to take the horses out, the sentinel should then merely loosen them all and trust to their getting out. What should a sentinel, except the one at the post of the guard, do in case_ of disorder? Call, "The guard, No. ", adding the number of his post. If the disorder be great, he will fire his piece before calling. NIGHT ORDERS Between retreat (or the hour designated by the commanding officer) and broad daylight (or the hour designated by tJie commanding officer), what slwuld a sentinel do, if he should see any person or party on or near his post? He should advance rapidly along his post toward such person or party and when within about thirty paces, challenge sharply, "Halt, who is there?" The sentinel will take care to place himself in the best position to receive or, if necessary, arrest the person or party. How is a mounted party challenged? "Halt, Dismount. Who is there"? To whom may a sentinel make known the countersign? Only the sentinel who relieves him, or to a person from whom he properly receives orders — that is to say the commanding officer, the officer of the day, or an officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard. What is the penalty for making known the countersign to a person who is not entitled to receive it? Death, or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. Are privates of the guard allowed to use the countersign when not posted as sentinels? No, sir; this is strictly forbidden. They are authorized to use the GUARD DUTY. 181 countersign only in the performance of their duties while posted as sentinels. How near should a sentinel permit a person to approach before recognising such person or receiving the countersign? He should not permit any one to approach so close as to prevent the proper use of his own weapon before recognizing the person or receiving the countersign. The usual distance is about ten feet. It should never be less, and in the case of mounted parties it should be more. When two or more persons approach in one party, how are they challenged and advanced? Illustrate with "Friends". Sentinel: "Halt, Who is there"? Answer by one of party: "Friends". Sentinel: "Advance one to be recognized". Sentinel (after recognizing party) : "Advance friends". H one or more of the party are entitled to the salute, the sentinel will then salute. What must a sentinel always do before passing a person? He must satisfy himself beyond a reasonable doubt that the person is what he represents himself to be and that he has a right to pass. // the sentinel be not satisfied, what should he do? He should cause the person to stand, and the sentinel should call the corporal of the guard. // the coiuinanding officer, the officer of the day, or some other person who is supposed to have the countersign, can not give it or gives an incorrect one, zvJiat should the sentinel do? He should hold the person and call the corporal of the guard. // tzvo or more parties approach a sentinel's post from different directions at the same time, zvhat does the sentinel do? They are challenged in turn and then advanced according to rank, the senior first. For example, if the answer to the first challenge were "Friend", to the second "Officer of the Day" and the third "Commanding Officer", the sentinel would advance them in this order : Commanding Officer, Officer of the Day and friend. A "Friend with the countersign" would be advanced before "Friend". // after having advanced one party, any of the others should attempt to move azvay, zvhat should the sentinel do? Halt them, and call the corporal of the guard. 182 CHAPTER. XIII. 'I? Would the sentinel advance the Officer of the Day while the Com- manding Officer ivas in conununication with him, the sentinel? No, sir; not unless told to do so by the Commanding Officer. If not told to do so, he would wait until, the Commanding Officer left. // a sentinel be in communication zvitli a party already advanced and another party should approach, wliat should the sentinel do? , He will at once challenge the approaching part}'- and if the party chal- lenged be senior to the party already on his post, the sentinel will advance such party at once. Otherwise, the sentinel will not advance the party unless told to do so by the senior, or until the senior leaves. Should a sentinel who has advanced a junior and a senior, speak to the junior while the senior is still on his post? He should first get the permission of the senior before addressing the junior. ' What order of rank should be observed in advancing different persons? 1. Commanding Officer; 2. Off.cer of the Day ; 3. Officer of the Guard ; 4. Officers ; 5. Patrols; 6. Reliefs ; 7. Noncommissioned officers of the guard in order of rank; 8. Friends. JVhat persons are advanced zvitli the countersign? All persons who announce themselves as having the countersign, such as "Officer with the countersign", "Friend with the countersign", etc., and all persons whose answer to the challenge indicate that they are entitled to the use of the countersign. For example, the Commanding Officer, the Offifficer of the Day, the Officer of the Guard, Patrols, Reliefs, and Noncommissioned Officers of the Guard. JVhat is a countersign? It is a word given daily from the principal headquarters of a com- mand to aid guards and sentinels in identifying persons who may be authorized to pass at night. The countersign is usually the name of a battle. JVhat is a parole? . It is a word used as a check on the countersign in order to obtain more accurate identification. It is imi)artc(l only to those who arc GUARD DUTY. 183 entitled to inspect guards and to commanders of guards. The parole is usually the name of a general or some other distinguished person. // no countersign be used, hozv does a sentinel advance the Com- manding Officer, tJie Officer of the Day and others who are entitled to the use of the countersign? They are advanced in accordance with the rules just given, except that instead of sajnng, "Advance (so and so) with the counter- sign," the sentinel will say, "Advance (so and so) to be recognized". Upon recognition the sentinel will say, "Advance (so and so)". About what tzvo things shculd a sentinel always be most careful? Never to allow himself to be surprised, nor to permit two or more parties to advance upon him at the same time. What is meant by "Calling the hours"? Between the time when challenging begins and reveille, when not in the presence of the enemy, sentinels may be require-d to call the hours. They call successively in the numerical order of their posts, beginning at the guardhouse, each one giving the number of his post, repeating the hour and then adding "All's well". Thus. "No. 2, Half past ten o'clock. All's well". The call should be made in a clear and distinct manner, without unduly prolonging the words. In case any sentinel fails to call off, what should the one next preceding him do? He should repeat the call, and if it is not taken up within a reasonable time, he should call the corporal of the guard and report the facts. What punishment ■z^.'ill be given a sentinel zclio is found sleeping upon his post? This is a most serious offence and is punishable with death or such other punishment as a court-martial may direct. What punishment ivill be given a member of the guard u'ho quits his guard? Such punishment as a court-martial may direct. ORDERS FOR SENTINELS AT THE POST OF THE GUARD. Between what hours does tlie sentinel at the post of the guard turn out the guard at the approach of persons entitled to the compliment? Between reveille and retreat. The guard is never turned out as a compliment after retreat. Jf'hat is meant by "Between reveille and retreat"? 184 CHAPTER XIIL < - T3«n be (U O 3^ .2 =« 00 ) o (L)-' 80 o c •- rt +^ M O iO ^"t£ en I- s £ ^ « en bo « ' C.5 s > bfl • « o o C I. 5 (u &, o 4-» o aj CO Oj CO o aj t/) o o, o, 3 !£ >. 1) <= S m ?; o c« O rt o bu O O [/) 7) be ^. +j box) ? c4 > «^| CJ OJ _ r-i r- O O CL ; 3 o . TO o o c 5 a rt ?: 3 rt OJ bo bo i--Sr C "! 1^ u bo ■ o c * 3 o " 3 bO 1-. .— ■ -i-j o O 0! r; n! >» 3 O O s (u 5;^2 a; CQ 3 -w^ O 3 C *^ (J 3 u O V en qj j> 3 nJ O^ u z w ij < u en I— I O w w a; t: M V a 53 --^ 3 •-' ~ 3 O K Q in O > GUARD DUTY. 185 It is the interval between the firing of the morning and evening gun ; or if no gun is fired, it is the interval between the sounding of the first note of the reveille, or the first march if marches be played, and the last note of retreat. What persons ore entitled to have the guard turned out for themf The President; sovereign or chief magistrate of a foreign countrv, and members of a royal family; Vice President; President of the Senate: American and foreign ambassadors ; members of the Cabinet ; Chief Justice; Speaker of the House of Representatives; Committees of Con ■ gress officially visiting a military post; governors within their respective States or Territories ; governors general ; Assistant Secretary of War officially visiting a military post; all general officers of the Army, general officers of a foreign service visiting a post; naval, marine, volunteer, and militia officers in the service of the United States and holding the relative rank of general officer; American and foreign envoys charges d'affaires; consuls-general accredited to the United States; comamnding officer of the post or camp; officer of the day; ministers resident accredited to the United States. Illustrate by a fezv examples the manner of turning out the guard. I ofBcer of the day; I commanding officer; Turn out the guard, general officer; Secretary of War; Governor of State. Should iJie person named by the sentinel not desire the guard formed, zvJuit happens f The person salutes, whereupon the sentinel calls, "Never mind the Guard". Suppose the guar.d is already turned out and formed, what should No. I do upon the approach of a person entitled to liave the guard turned out? If the party approaching were senior to the one for whom tl;e guard had been turned out, No. 1 w-ould call, "Turn out the guard." If the person approaching were his junior. No. 1 would not turn oui the guard. Suppose the person approaching ivere the senior, but should not desire the guard turned out for him, zvhat zvould No. i do? 186 CHAPTER XIII. He would call "Never mind the guard," just the same as if the guard had not already been turned out. // tzvo or more persons entitled to have the guard turned out should approach at the same time, what zvould No. i do? He would call for the senior only. If the senior did not desire the guard formed, No. 1 would then call, Never mind the guard". Would No. I then turn out the guard for the next in rank? No, sir ; he would not ; for the guard is never turned out for an officer while a senior entitled to the compliment is at or near the post of the guard. Will the guard he turned out more than once for the same officer? Yes, sir ; as often as he passes, but should the officer remain in the vicinity of the guardhouse, after the guard has been turned out, recognition of his presence will be taken by merely bringing the guard to attention. Is the guard turned out on the approach of an armed party? Yes, sir; and whether the party is commanded by an officer, noncommissioned officer or private, No. 1 calls, "Turn out the guard, armed party". If the party is commanded by an officer, the guard presents arms. Is the guard turned out for armed troops at drill and reliefs or detachments of the guard? No, sir ; it is not . When does No. 1 never repeat, "Never mind the guard". Upon the approach of an armed party. Will the guard he turned out on the approach of the nezv guard? Yes, sir; No. 1 calls, "Turn out the guard, armed party". Will the guard be turned out when the national or regimental colors or standards are carried past by a color guard or an armed party? Yes, sir; if they are not cased. No. 1 will call, "Turn out the guard, national (or regimental) color", and the guard will turn oul and present arms. In case the national and regimental colors are carried past together, what will No. i call? He will call, "Turn out the guard, national colors". Would the guard be turned out if the colors zvere cased? No, sir ; it would not. Is the guard turned out if the party carrying the colors is at drill? Yes, sir; but if the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the post of GUARD DUTY. 187 the guard, the guard will be turned out when the colors first pass and not thereafter. Is the guard turned out ivhen the remains of an ofUcer or a soldier are carried past? Yes, sir; No. 1 calls, "Turn out the guard, deceased officer (or soldier"). The guard turns out and presents arms. NIGHT ORDERS (For sentinels at post of guard) After receiving an answer to his challenge, what should No. i caVf He calls, "Corporal of the guard, (so and so)", repeating the answer to his challenge. Does he in such cases repeat the number of his post? No, sir ; he does not. How long does he remain in the position assumed in challenging? He remains at port arms until the corporal has recognized the persoi or party challenged. What does No. i then do? He resumes walking his post. // the person or party advanced be entitled to a salute, what doe\' No. I do? He salutes, and as soon as the salute is acknowledged, resumes walking his post. Explain zvhat No. i do-es in regard to calling the hours of the night. At the direction of a noncommissioned officer of the guard he calls, "No. 1 (such) o'clock". After the call has passed around the chain of sentinels he will call, "All's well". In the event of such a disposition of posts that the call of the sentinels whose post is last in numerical order cannot be heard by- No. I, what is done? The call "All's well" may be returned along the line to the sentinel whose voice can be heard at the post of the guard. COMPLIMENTS FROM SENTINELS. How do dismounted sentinels salute? A dismounted sentinel armed with the rifle or saber, salutes bj presenting arms; if otherwise armed, he salutes with the right hand. How do mounted sentinels salute? 188 CHAPTER XIII. If armed with the saber, and the saber be drawn, they salute by presenting saber; otherwise they salute with the right hand. Explain in detail how a dismounted sentinel salutes. As the person or party entitled to salute arrives within about thirty paces, the sentinel halts and faces outward, his piece at right shoulder or his saber at a carry. If the officer approaches along the post, the salute will be given when the officer arrives at the distance of about six paces. If the officer passes in front of the sentinel, but not along the post, he is saluted just before he passes the sentinel's front. If he crosses the post, he is saluted just before he crosses. How long does the sentinel remain at the present? Until his salute is returned, or until the person saluted has passed. When does the sentinel resume walking his post? When the person saluted has passed about six paces beyond him. Does a sentinel salute an officer who crosses his post, hut who does not pass within thirty paces of the sentinel? Yes, sir; he does. (Decision A. G. O., July 21, 1906). // an offi>cer passes in rear of a sentinel's post, is he saluted? No, sir ; he is not, but the sentinel stands facing outward, at the right shoulder, until the officer has passed about six paces. What does a sentinel in a sentry box, armed with the rifle, do on the approach of a person or party entitled to salute? He stands at attention at an order and salutes by presenting arms in accordance with the foregoing rules. What does a sentinel do if armed with the saber? He stands at the carry and salutes as before stated. How does a mounted sentinel on a regular post salute? He faces outward and salutes in accordance with the foregoing rules. How does a mounted sentinel doing patrol duty salute? He salutes as before stated, but does not halt unless spoken to. Who are entitled to salutes from sentinels? The President; sovereign or chief magistrate of a foreign country and members of a royal family; Vice President; President of the Senate: American and foreign ambassadors; members of the Cabinet; Chiet Justice ; Speaker of the House of Representatives ; committees of Con- gress officially visiting a military post ; governors within their respective States or Territories ; governors general ; Assistant Secretary of War officially visiting a military post; American and foreign envoys or GUARD DUTY. 189 ministers; ministers resident accredited to the United States; Charges d'afifaires ; consuls general accredited to the United States; commanding officer of the post or camp; officer of the day, and officers of the Regular Army, Do sentinels salute the national or regimental colors or standards:'' Yes, sir ; if they are not cased. Does this apply when the party carrying the colors is at drillf Yes, sir; but if the drill is conducted in the vicinity of the guard house, the sentinel will salute the colors when they first pass, and not thereafter. Do sentinels salute armed parties^ Yes, sir ; provided they are commanded by officers. Do sentinels salute the remains of deceased officers or soldiers that are carried past their posts F Yes, sir ; they do. Do sentinels salute officers of tJie Navy and Marine Corps? Yes, sir. | Do sentinels salute the military and naval officers of foreign powersi? Yes, sir; they do just the same as if they were their own officers. Do sentinels salute officers of Volunteers and Militia? Yes, sir; but only when in the service of the United States. (Note: For purposes of saluting, officers of the Organized Militia whei; participating in maneuvers, with Regular troops are considered in the service of the United States). What should a sentinel alzvays do ivhcn an officer zvho has been holding communication with him leaves? He should always salute the officer. During the hours when challenging is prescribed, when is an officer saluted? As soon as he has been duly recognized and advanced. Does a mounted sentinel armed with the rifle or pistol, or a dis- mounted sentinel armed with the pistol, salute after challenging? No, sir ; he does not. He stands at the advance or raised pistol until the officer passes. What does a sentinel do in case of the approach of an armed party of the guard? He halts when it is about thirty paces from him, facing towards the party, with his piece at the right shoulder. If not himself relieved, he will, as the party passes, place himself so that it will pass in front of him. 190 CHAPTER XIII. ll'hcii docs he resume ukilkiin/ his pcstF When the party has passed six paces beyond him. JJ'liat is the saluting distance l^ It is the limit in which individuals and insignia of rank can be readily recognized ; it is assumed to be about thirty paces. Is an officer entitled to the salute if not in iinifor'ni? Yes, sir; an officer is entitled to salute, day or night, whether in uniform or not. // an officer, or group of officers remain on or near a sentinel's post, what should the sentinel do? He salutes but once; after that he walks his post. Should a sentinel, in communication with an officer, ever interrupt the communication in order to salute a junior:^ No, sir; he should not, unless directed by the senior to do so. When the "Star Spangled Banner" is played on a FORMAL occasion OTHER THAN ret^'^at, what should sentinels on posts close to where the ceremony takes place, do? They should face outward, at right shoulder, and stand at attention throughout the playing of the national air, provided their duties do nor prevent their so doing. (Decision A. G. O., Aug. 4,1908). When the "Star Spangled Banner" is played at retreat, what should sentinels on posts close to where tJie ceremony takes place, do? They should face -outward, at the right shoulder and stand at atten- tion until the last note, and then salute with the present, provided their duties do not prevent their doing. (Decision A. G. O., Aug. 4, 1908). They wjuld do the same thing if "To the Color" were sounded at retreat by the field music. ORDERS FOR COLOR SENTINELS (Sentinels posted on the color line) How does a color sentinel call for the corporal of the guard? "Corporal of the Guard, Color Line." Is a color sentinel on post subject to, and will he observe all the general orders prescribed for sentinels on other posts? Yes, sir; he is subject to them and will observe them. (See "Orders For Sentinels On Post," page 175 A). What are the special orders for a color sentinel? He will not permit the colors to be moved, except in the presence of an armed escort. Unless otherwise ordered by the commanding GUARD DUTY. 19^ officer he will allow no one to touch the colors but the color bearer, oi an officer or noncommissioned officer of the guard. He will not permit any soldier to take arms from the stacks ; or to touch them, except by order of an officer, or a noncommissioned officer of the guard. If any person passing the color or crossing the color line fails to salute the color, the sentinel will come to port arms and call to him, "salute the color" ; if the caution be not heeded, the sentinel will call the corporal of the guard and report the facts. SUPERNUMERARIES What are the instructions regarding supernumeraries f They are not allowed to leave camp or garrison ; they will hold themselves constantly in readiness for detail .as members of the guard. They will not, however, be excused from ordinary camp or garrison duties. but will not be detailed for anything that may interfere wath their duti^ the officer of the day. 97. If anyone is to be passed out of camp at night, he is sent to the commander of the guard who will have him passed beyond the sentinels. 98. The commander of the guard will detain at the guardhouse all suspicious characters, or parties attempting to pass a sentinel's post without authority, reporting his action to the officer of the day, to whom persons so arrested will be sent, if necessary. 99. He will inspect the guardrooms and cells, and the irons of such prisoners as may be ironed, at least once during his tour, and at such other times as he may deem necessary. 100. The commander of the guard will cause the corporals of the old and new reliefs to verify together, immediately before each relief goes on post, the number of prisoners who should then properly bc at the guardhouse. 101. He will see that the sentences of prisoners under his charge are executed strictly as confirmed by the reviewing authority 102. He will cause sentinels over working parties of prisoners to be taken from those assigned to posts guarded at night only. If there be none such, he will cause this duty to be divided as equally as possible among the privates of his guard. 103. He will inspect all meals sent to the guardhouse for the prisoners and see that the quantity and quality are in accordance with regulations. GUARD DUTY. 201 104. At guard mounting he will report to the old officer of the day all cases of prisoners whose terms of sentence expire on that day. as also all cases of prisoners concerning whom no statement of charges has been received. 105. The commander of the guard is responsible for the security of prisoners under the charge of his guard; he becomes responsible for them after their number has been verified and they have been turned over to the custody of his guard, whether at the guardhouse or out at work. 106. To receive the prisoners at the guardhouse after their number has been verified by the officers of the day, the commander of the new guard directs his sergeant to form the guard with an interval, and commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. Right, 3. FACE, 4. Forward, 5. MARCH. The prisoners having arrived opposite the interval in the new guard, he commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. HALT, 3. Left, 4. FACE, 5. Right (or) Left backward, 6. DRESS, 7. FRONT. The prisoners dress on the line of the new guard. 107. After the new guard arrives at its post, and has saluted the old guard, each guard is presented by its commander to its officer of the day. If there be but one officer of the day present, or if one officer acts in the capacity of old and new officer of the day, each guard is presented to him by its commander. 108. If other persons entitled to a salute approach, each com- mander of the guard will bring his own guard to attention if not already at attention. The senior commander of the two guards will then command: 1. Old and new guards, 2. Present, 3. ARMS. The junior will salute at the command present arms given by the senior. After the salute has been acknowledged, the senior brings both guards to the order. 109. After the salutes have been acknowledged by the officers of the day, each guard is brought to an order by its commander; the commander of the new guard then directs the orderly or orderlies to fall out and report, and causes bayonets to be fixed if so ordered by the commanding officer; bayonets will not then be unfixed during the tour except in route marches while the guard is actually marching or when specially directed by the commanding officer. 202 CHAPTER XIII. The commander of the new guard then falls out members of the guard for detached posts, placing them under charge of the proper noncommissioned officers, divides .the guard into three reliefs, first, second, and third, from right to left, and directs a list of the guard to be made by the reliefs. When the guard consists of troops of different arms combined, the men are assigned to reliefs so as to insure a fair division of duty, under rules prescribed by the commanding officer. 110. The sentinels and detachments of the old guard are at once relieved by members of the new guard; the two guards standing at ease or at rest while these changes are being made. The commander of the old transmits to the commander of the new guard all his orders, instructions, and information concerning the guard and its duties. The commander of the new guard then takes possession of the guard- house and verifies the articles in charge of the guard. 111. When all the detachments and sentinels of the old guard have formed on its left, its commander causes bayonets to be unfixed, if not already unfixed, and marches off his guard, as prescribed in drill regulations ( cavalry paragraphs 1073-1084. Infantry, paragraph 516.) When the old guard has marched past the post of the guard, the new guard stacks arms and is dismissed; or, if armracks are provided, the new guard is dismissed, and the arms are placed in the racks; or the men may be required to keep their arms constantly with them. 112. Detachments of the guard having separate posts are relieved in the same manner as prescribed for the guard, and then marched to the post of the guard. 113. If considerable time is required to bring in that portion of the old guard still on post, the commanding officer may direct that as soon as the orders and property are turned over to the new guard, the portion of the old guard at the guardhouse may be marched off and dismissed as prescribed. In such a case, the remaining detach- ment or detachments of the old guard will be inspected by the new officer of the guard when they reach the guardhouse. He will direct the senior noncommissioned officer of the old guard present to march the said detachments off and dismiss them in the prescribed manner. 114. A supernumerary officer of the guard receives and obeys the orders of the commander of the guard, assisting him in the per formance of his duties. GUARD DUTY. 205 SERGEANT OF THE GUARD (The iniiiibcrs of flic paraf/raphs correspond to those in the Manual of Guard Duty, edition iQog). 115. The senior noncommissioned officer of the guard always acts as sergeant of the guard, and, if there be no officer of the guard, will perform the duties prescribed for the commander of the guard. 116. The sergeant of the guard has general supervision over the other noncommissioned officers and the musicians and privates of the guard, and must be thoroughly familiar with all their orders and duties. • 117. He is directly responsible for the property under charge of the guard, and will sec that it is properly cared for. He will make lists of articles taken out by working parties, and see that all such articles are duly returned. If any are not, he will immediately report the fact to the commander of the guard. 118. Immediately after guard mounting he will prepare dupli- cate lists of the names of all noncommissioned officers, musicians, and privates of the guard, showing the relief and post or duties of each. One list will be handed as soon as possible to the commander of the guard; the other wnll be retained by the sergeant. 119. He will see that reliefs are turned out at the proper time, and that the corporals thoroughly understand, and are prompt and efficient in the discharge of their duties. 120. During the temporary absence from the guardhouse of the sergeant of the guard, tlie next in rank of the noncommissioned officers present will perform his duties. 121. Should the corporal whose relief is on post be called away from the guardhouse, the sergeant of the guard will designate a non commissioned officer to take the corporal's place until his return. 122. After breakfast, and after stable duty in the mounted service, he will cause the guardhouse or guard tent and the space around it to be policed by the prisoners, if there be any, or b}- members of the guard if there be no prisoners. 123. He will see that the guardroom and cells are thoroughly policed twice daily, morning and evening. 124. At first sergeants' call he will proceed to the adjutant's office and obtain the guard report book. 204 CHAPTER XIII. 125. When the national or regimental colors are taken from the stacks of the color line, the color bearer and guard, or the sergeant of the guard, unarmed, and two armed privates as a guard, will escort the colors to the colonel's quarters, as prescribed for the color guard in Infantry Drill Regulations, paragraph 248. 126. Upon the return of soldiers having passes, the passes will be given to the sergeant of the guard, who will indorse upon them the time at which each of the men included in a pass returns; at guard mounting he will turn them into the commander of the guard. 127. He will report to the commander of the guard any suspicious or unusual occurrence that comes under his notice, will warn him of the approach of any armed body, and will send to him all persons arrested by the guard. 128. When the guard is turned out, its formation will be as fol- lows : The senior noncommissioned officer, if commander of the guard, is on the right of the right guide; if not commander of the guard, he is in the line of file closers, in rear of the right four of the guard, the next in rank is right guide; the next, left guide; the others, > in the line of file closers, usually, each in rear of his relief; the field music, with its left three paces to the right of the right guide. The reliefs form in the same order as when the guard was first divided, except that if the guard consists of dismounted cavalry and infantr>, the cavalry forms on the left. 129. The sergeant forms the guard, calls the roll, and, if not in command of the guard, reports to the commander of the guard as prescribed in drill regulations for a first sergeant forming a troop or company; the guard is not divided into platoons or sections, and, except when the whole guard, is formed prior to marching off, fours are not counted. 130. The sergeant reports as follows: "Sir, the guard is present;" or, "Sir, the guard and prisoners are present;" or, "Sir, the guard is present, and the prisoners are secure;" or, "Sir, (so and so) is absent;" or, if the roll call has been omitted, "Sir, the guard is formed." Only men absent without proper authority are reported absent. He then takes his place, without command. 131. At night, the roll may be called by reliefs and numbers instead of names; thus, the first relief being on post: Second relief, Corporal; No. 1; No. 2, etc. Third relief, Corporal; No. 1, etc. GUARD DUTY. 205 132. Calling the roll will 1)C dispensed with in forming the guard when it is turned out as a compliment, on the approach of an armed body, or in any sudden emergency; but in such cases the roll may be called before dismissing" the guard. If the guard be turned out for an officer entitled to inspect it, the roll will, unless he directs otherwise, always be called before a report is made. 133. When directed by the officer of the guard to dismiss the guard, the sergeant salutes, steps in front of the guard, and commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMS, 3. OPEN CHAMBER, 4, CLOSE CHAMBER, 5. DISMISSED, or, 5. Order, 6. ARMS, 7. Stack, 8. ARMS, 9. DIS- MISSED. (Par. 111.) 134. The sergeant of the guard has direct charge of the prisoners and is responsible to the commander of the guard for their security. 135. He will carry the keys of the guardroom and cells, and will not suffer them to leave his personal possession while he is at the guardhouse, except as hereinafter provided, (par. 137). Should he leave the guardhouse for any purpose, he will turn the keys over tc the noncommissioned officer who takes his place. (Par. 120). 136. He will count the knives, forks, etc., given to the prisoners with their food, and see that none of these articles remain in their possession. He will see that no forbidden articles of any kind are conveyed to the prisoners. 137. Prisoners, when paraded with the guard, are placed in line, in its center. The sergeant, immediately before forming the guard, will turn over his keys to the noncommissioned officer at the guard- house. Having formed the guard, he will divide it into two nearly equal parts. Indicating the point of division with his hand he commands : 1. Right (or Left), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard, 6. HALT, 7. Left (or Right), 8. FACE. If the first command be right face, the right half of the guard only will execute the movements; if left face, the left half only will execute them. The command halt is given when sufficient interval is obtained to admit the prisoners. The doors of the guardroom and cells are then opened by the noncommissioned officer having the keys. The prisoners will file out under the supervision of the sergeant, the noncommissioned officer and sentinel on duty at the guardhouse, and such other sentinels as may be necessary; they will form in line in the interval between the two parts of the guard . 206 CHAPTER XIII. 138. To return the prisoners to the guardroom and cells, the sergeant commands: 1. Prisoners, 2. Right (or Left), 3. FACE, 4. Forward, 5. Columa right (or left), 6. MARCH. The prisoners, under the same supervision as before, return to their proper rooms or cells. 139. To close the guard, the sergeant commands: 1. Left (or Right), 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH, 5. Guard. 6. HALT, 7. Right (or Left), 8. FACE. The left or right half only of the guard, as indicated, executes the movement. 140. If there be but few prisoners, the sergeant may indicate the point of division as above, and form the necessary interval' by the commands: 1. Right (or Left) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT, and close the intervals by the commands: l.Left (or Right) step, 2. MARCH, 3. Guard, 4. HALT. 141. If sentinels are numerous, reliefs may, at the discretion of the commanding officer, be posted in detachments, and sergeants, as well as corporals, required to relieve and post them. 142. Sergeants assigned to reliefs perform the duties prescribed for corporals of the guard. They will not be so assigned unless the number of corporals detailed for guard be less than the number of reliefs. CORPORAL OF THE GUARD (The numbers of the paragraphs correspond to tJiose in the Manual of Guard Duty, edition 1909). 143. Corporals of the guard are assigned to reliefs by the com- mander of the guard. 144. A corporal of the guard receives and obeys orders from none but noncommissioned officers of the guard senior to himself, the officers of the guard, the officer of the day, and the commanding officer. 145. It is the duty of the corporal of the guard to post and relieve sentinels, and to instruct the members of his relief in their orders and duties. GUARD DUTY. 207 146. Immediately after the division of the guard into reliefs the corporals will assign the members of their respective reliefs to posts by number, and a soldier so assigned to his post will not be changed to another during the same tour of guard duty, unless by direction of the commander of the guard or higher authority. Usually exper- ienced soldiers are placed over the arms of the guard, and at remote and responsible posts. 147. Each corporal will then make a list of the members of his relief, including himself. This list will contain the number of the relief, the name, the company, and regiment of every member thereof, and the post to which each is assigned. The list will be made in duplicate, one copy to be given to the sergeant of the guard as sooi; as completed, the other to be retained by the corporal. 148. As soon as directed by the officer of the guard, the corporal of the first relief posts his relief. 149. The corporal forms his relief, and then commands: CALL OFF. Commencing on the right, the men call ofT alternately, rear and front rank, "one," "two," "three," "four," and so on; if in single rank, they call off from right to left. The corporal then commands: 1. Right, 2. FACE, 3. Forward, 4. MARCH. If formed in single rank, the corporal commands 1. Twos right, 2. MARCH. In wet weather the relief may be marched at secure arms. The corporal marches on the left, and near the rear file, in order to observe the march. The corporal of the old guard marches on the right of the leading file, and takes command when the last one of the old sentinels is relieved, changing places with the corporal of the new guard. 150. When the relief arrives at six paces from a sentinel the cor- poral halts it and commands, according to the number of the post: No. ( ). Both sentinels execute port arms or saber; the new sentinel approaches the old, halting about one pace from him. 151. The corporals advance and place themselves, facing each other, a little in advance of the new sentinel, the old corporal on his right, the new corporal on his left, both. at right shoulder, and observe that the old sentinel transimts correctly his instructions : 208 CHAPTER Xill. The following diagram will illustrate the positions taken: A R — I I I I I CI II) I I I I B R, is relief; A, the new corporal; B, the old; C, the new sentinel, D, the old. 152. The instructions relative to the post liaving been communi- cated, the new corporal commands: Post; both sentinels then resume the right shoulder, face toward the new corporal and step back so as to allow the relief to pass in front of them. The new corporal then commands, 1. Forward, 2. MARCH; the old sentinel takes his place in rear of the relief as it passes him, his piece in the same position as those of the relief. The new sentinel stands fast at a right shoulder until the relief has passed six paces beyond him, when he walks his post. The corporals take their places as the relief passes them. 153. The sentinels at the guardhouse are the first relieved; they are left at the guardhouse. All others will march with the relief. 154. Mounted sentinels are posted and relieved in accordance MHth the same principles. (See par. 1072, Cav. D. R.) 155. On the return of the old relief, the corporal of the new guard falls out when the relief halts; the corporal of the old guard forms his relief on the left of the old guard, salutes, and reports to the commander of his guard: "Sir, the relief is present;" or, "Sir, (so and so) is absent," and takes his place in the guard. 156. To post a relief after the sentinels of the old guard have been relieved, its corporal forms it by the commands: 1. (Such) relief, 2. FALL IN; and if arms are stacked, 3. Take, 4. ARMS. The relief is formed in double or single rank (according as the guard is formed) facing to the front, with arms at a4i order (see par. 109); the men place themselves according to the numbers of their respective posts, viz: two, four, six, and so on, in front rank, onC; three, five, and so on, in the rear rank, or in the order of their respect- ive posts from right to left, according as the relief is in double or single rank. The corporal, standing about two paces in front of the center of his relief, then commands: CALL OFF. GUARD DUTY. 209 The men call off as prescribed. (Par. 149.). The corporal then commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMS, 3. OPEN CHAMBER, 4. CLOSE CHAMBER, 5. Order, 6. ARMS; faces the commander of the guard, executes the rifle salute, reports, "Sir, the relief is present"; or, "Sir, (so and so) is absent," and then takes his place on the right at order arms. 157. Having inspected the relief (see par. 86), the commander of the guard directs the corporal, Post your relief. The corporal salutes and posts his relief as prescribed (pars. 149 to 153); the corporal of the relief on post does not go with the new relief, except when necessary to show the way. 158. If so directed by the commander of the guard, the corporal, before posting his relief, will command; 1. With ball cartridges, 2. LOAD, 3. Order, 4. ARMS. (G. O. 30, '09). 159. To dismiss the old relief, it is halted and faced to the front at the guardhouse by the corporal of the new relief, who then falls out; the corporal of the old relief then steps in front of the relief, and commands: 1. Port, 2. ARMS, 3. OPEN CHAMBER, 4. CLOSE CHAMBER, 5. DISMISSED, or, 5. Order, 6. ARMS, 7. Stack, S. ARMS, 9. DISMISSED. 160. Should the pieces have been loaded before the relief was posted, the corporal will, before dismissing his relief, see that no cartridges are left in the chambers or magazines. The same rule applies to sentinels over prisoners. 161. Each corporal will thoroughly accjuaint himself with all the special orders of eVery sentinel on his relief, and see that each sentinel correctly transmits such orders in detail to his successor. 162. He will see that each sentinel, on being posted, clearly under- stands the limits and extent of his post. 163. There should be at least one noncommissioned officer con- stantly on the alert at the guardhouse, usually the corporal whose relief is on post. This noncommissioned officer takes post near the entrance of the guardhouse, and does not fall in with the guard when it is formed. He will have his rifle constantly with him. 164. Whenever it becomes necessary for the corporal to leave his post near the entrance of the guardhouse, he will notify the ser- geant of the guard, who will at once take his place, or designate another noncommissioned officer to do so. 210 CHAPTER XIII. 165. He will see that no person enters the guardhouse, or guard tent, or crosses the posts of the sentinels there posted, without proper authority. 166. Should any sentinel call for the corporal of the guard, the corporal will, in every case, at once and quickly proceed to such sentinel. He will notify the sergeant of the guard before leaving the guardhouse. 167. He will at once report to the commander of the guard any violation of the regulations or any unusual occurence which is reported to him by the sentinel, or which comes to his notice in any other way. 168. Should a sentinel call "The Guard," the corporal will promptly notify the commander of the guard. 169. Should a sentinel call "Relief," the corporal will at once proceed to the post of such sentinel, taking with him the man next for duty on that post. If the sentinel is relieved for a short time only, the corporal will again post him as soon as the necessity for his relief ceases. 170. When the countersign is used, the corporal at the posting of the relief during whose tour challenging is to begin gives the counter- sign to the members of the relief, excepting those posted at the guardhouse. 171. He will, at the proper time, notif}'- No. 1 of the hour, if sentinels are required to call the hours or half hours of the night. 172. He will wake the corporal whose relief is next on post in time for the latter to verify the prisoners, form his relief, and post it at the proper hour. 173. Should the guard be turned out, each corporal will call his own relief, and cause its members to fall in promptly. 174. Tents or bunks in the same vicinity will be designated for the reliefs so that all the members of each relief may, if necessary, be found and turned out by the corporal in the least time and with the least confusion. 175. When challenged by a sentinel while posting his relief, the corporal commands: 1. Relief, 2. HALT; to the sentinel's challenge he answers "Relief," and at the order of the sentinel, he advances alone to give the countersign, or to be recognized. When the sentinel says "Advance relief," the corporal commands: 1. Forward, 2. MARCH. GUARD DUTY. _ i 1 If to be relieved, the sentinel is then relieved as prescribed. 176. Between retreat and reveille, the corporal of the guard will challenge all suspicious looking persons or parties he may observe, first halting his patrol or relief, if either be with him. He will advance them in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like parties, l)nt if the route of a patrol is on a continuous chain of sentinels, he should not challenge persons coming near him unless he has reasons to be- lieve that they have eluded the vigilance of sentinels. 177. Between retreat and reveille, whenever so ordered by an officer entitled to inspect the guard, the corporal will call: "Turn out the guard", announcing the title of the officer, and then, if not other wise ordered, he will salute and return to his post. 178. Between retreat and reveille, on the approach of an armed party other than a returning relief or detachment of the guard, he will call: "Turn out the guard. Armed party," and remain where he can observe the movements of the party while the guard is forming and then return to his post. 179. As a general rule he will advance parties approaching the guard at night in the same manner that sentinels on post advance like parties. Thus, the sentinel at the guardhouse challenges and repeats the answer to the corporal, as prescribed; the corporal, advancing at port arms, says: "Advance (so and so) with the countersign," or "to be recognized," if there be no countersign used; the countersign being correctly given, or the party being duly recognized, the corporal says: "Advance (so and so)"; repeating the answer to the challenge of the sentinel. 180. When officers of different rank approach the guardhouse from different directions at the same time, the senior will be advanced first, and will not be made to wait for his junior. 181. Out of ranks and under arms, the corporal salutes with the rifle salute. He will salute all officers, whether by day or night. 182. The corporal will examine parties halted and detained by sentinels, and if he have reason to believe the parties have no authority to cross sentinels' posts, will conduct them to the commander of the guard. 183. The corporal of the guard will arrest all suspicious looking characters prowling about the post or camp, all persons of a dis- 212 CHAPTER XIIL orderly character disturbing the peace, and all persons taken in the act of committing crime against the Government on a military reservation or post. All persons arrested by corporals of the guard, or by sentinels, will at once be conducted to the commander of the guard by the corporal. APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 213 AND SECURITY. CHAPTER XIV/'> APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION AND SECURITY (See corresponding chapter in Supplement for additional matter and changes, if any.) Principles of Patrolling A Patrols are small bodies of infantry or cavalry, from three men up to a company or troop, sent out from a command on the march, or at a halt, to gain information of the enemy and of the country, to drive off small hostile bodies, to prevent them from observing the command, or for other specially stated objects. B The size of a patrol varies with its object; if it is to gain informa tion only, it should be as small as possible, allowing two men for each probable message to be sent; if it is to fight, it should be strong enough to defeat the probable enemy against it. Patrols are named according to their object, reconnoitering, visiting, connecting, exploring, flanking patrols, etc. These names are not of much importance, however, because the patrol's orders in each case determine its duties. When sent out for information, a patrol should never fight, if possible to avoid it. C A Noncommissioned Officer, selected for his endurance, good judg- ment and bravery, usually commands a patrol, though an officer may be so assigned. He should have a reliable map, an accurate watch, field glasses, compass, whistle, message blanks and a pencil. (l)This chapter was prepared with the assistance of Captain C. O. Sherrill, Corps of Engineers, Instructor Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kansas, and is based on the latest revision of the Field Service Regulations — not yet, July, 1909, issued to the Army — the text of which has been used, with such modifications and additions as were considered necessary to meet the special needs of noncommissioned officers. 214 CHAPTER XIV. MESSAGE BLANK: U- S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE Coinmunicateci by Buzzer, Plione, Telegrapli, Wireless, lL,antern, Helio, Flag, Cyclist, Fdot Messen- ger, Motintetl Messenger. Underscore means used No. hent by [These spac Time as for Sig Ke(-d by nal Operato Time rs only.] Check (Name of sending detachment) From 4t (Location of sending detachment) Date Hour . .No. To. Recek'ed . The heading "From" is filled in with the name of the detachment sending the information; as "Officer's Patrol, 7th Cav." Messages sent on the same day from the same source to the same person are numbered consecutively. The address is written briefly; thus, "Commanding Officer, Outpost, 1st Brigade." In the signature the writer's surname only and rank are given. . This blank is four and a half by eight inches, including the margin on the Teft for binding. The back is rviled in squares and provided with scales for use in marking simple sketches explanatory of the message. It is issued by the Signal Corps in blocks of forty with duplicating sheets. The regulation envelope is three by five and one-fourth inches and is printed as follows: To U. S. ARMY FIELD MESSAGE : A^ (For Signal operators only) When sent No. . . . Rate of speed Name of Messenger Wlrcn and by 7('hom. rec'd • THIS ENVELOPE WILL BE RETURNED TO BEARER APPLIED PRINCIPLES OE INFORMATION AND SECURITY. 215 A Patrols are usually sent out from : They may be sent from Column, halted 1. Picket; 2. Support; 3. Reserve; 4. ]Main body. Advancing Retreating 1. Advance party; 2. Support; 3. Reserve; 4. Main column. 1. Rear party; 2. Rear support; 3. Rear reserve; 4. Main column. B a. b. c. d. e. C Orders given to a Patrol Commander should state clearly: What is known of the enemy. What is known of other bodies of our own troops liable to be met by the patrol. The plans of the body sending out the patrol. What are the exact objects to be sought by the patrol; whether to gain information, or fight; what general direction to follow; how long to stay out in case enemy is not met. Where are the reports to be sent. As soon as the patrol commander gets his orders, he selects the most trustworthy men to be had, tells them what equipment, ammuni- tion and rations to take with them; inspects them, their arms, and equipment (and horses, if mounted) to see that all are in the best of condition, and that nothing to attract the enemy's attention is included, such as neighing horses, clanking tins, glistening bayonets. He ex- plains to them carefully the patrol's orders and how he intends to carry them out. He tells them what to do in case the enemy is seen and names a prominent place along their route where everyone will hasten if the patrol should become split up. D The patrol is now ready to move out and the commander tells each man what his position is to be at the start. These relative posi- tions of the different members of the patrol change from time to time as the ground and information of the enemy change, but it is to be remembered always that extra men should nczer he sent to do ivhat a smaller number can do as well. If, from the road, the country for ^ mile on each side can be seen, there is absolutely no use in sending out flankers a few hundred yards from the road. They would only delay the advance of the patrol, attract the attention of the enemy and accomplish nothing. Patrolling, like everything else, is a matter of 216 CHAPTER XIV. common sense, so it should always be kept in mind what the orders are, and they should be carried out as rapidly, quietly and secretly as possible. A Figure 2 gives a number of different ways of placing the members of different sized patrols. These are merely examples and the arrange- ment must vary to meet every condition of the ground and enemy. The patrol should not march bunched up in one body, because if ambushed all would be shot or captured. B In patrols of two to five men the commander generally leads, n this formation few signals are necessary, the men simply regulating their movement by those of the patrol leader. • • • • • « • • • 4 ^ « 4 k • * • J men. 3-rnen # -me/i itmtn. • STne/t • • • • • • • • • \ * * * • k • 4 • ' V * \ • « • % •, • sSmen. ^Tnejx Ome/t 7Tn€n. f men 6 rnsn « • • • • • • V • • 1 • • •• * • • ml*- iri^i-y /Zrnen ixmtn ™» • iSmen. fSmtn pa^inq Often c?oseS- (Fig. 2.) METHOD OF LEADING A PATROL C The patrol must advance quickly and quietly, be vigilant and make all possible use of cover. Whatever the formation adopted, it should favor the escape of at least one )iian in case of surprise. Villages and inclosures involving danger of surprise are entered with precaution, and for brief periods only. Halts are made at points affording good view, and the country is studied in all directions, land- marks to the rear being impressed on the minds of the men so that the way back can be readily found; the leader consults his map from time to time and keeps himself located thereon. APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 217 AND SECURITY. When a patrol is scattered, it re-assembles at some point previously selected; if checked in one direction it takes another; if cut off, it returns by a detour or forces its way through. As a last resort it scatters, so that at least one man may return with information. Occasionally it is advisable for the leader to conceal his patrol and continue the reconnaissance with one or two companions; in case of cavalry the leader and men thus detached should be well mounted. Patrols far from their commands, or in contact with the enemy, often remain out over night. In such cases they seek a place of con- cealment unknown to the inhabitants, proceeding thereto after night fall, or under cover. Opportunities for watering, feeding and rest must not be neg- lected. When necessar}^ the leader provides for subsistence by demand or purchase. In questioning civilians caution is observed not to disclose information that may be of value to the enemy. Strangers are not allowed to go ahead of the patrol. Patrol leaders are authorized to seize telegrams and mail matter, and to arrest individuals, reporting the facts as soon as possible. Returning patrols near their own lines march at a walk, unless pressed by the enemy. A Signals — In addition to the usual signals prescribed by the drill regulations, the following should be clearly understood by mem- bers of a patrol: Enemy in sight in small numbers, hold the rifle above the head horizontally; enemy in force, same as preceding, raising and lowering the rifle several times; take cover, a downward motion of the hand. Other signals may be agreed upon before starting, but they must be familiar to the men ; complicated signals must be avoided. Signals must be used cautiously, so as not to convey information to the enemy. SUGGESTIONS FOR THE RECONNAISSANCE OF VARIOUS POSITIONS AND LOCALITIESi Cross Roads — When the patrol comes to a cross-road, two men are sent along it on each flank until they come to the first turn, the 1 By permission of the Commandant of Cadets, West Point, these s'.i.egestions, as well as a part of those on page 220, and "Facts Which Should be Obtained by Patrols in Reference to Certain Objects," page 222, are reproduced from "A Manual of the Service of Security and Information," published by the Department of Tactics, for the use of West Point Cadets. 218 CHAPTER XIV. patrol halting". If the men see nothing suspicious, they return and the patrol pushes on. If anything suspicious is seen, one man rushes back quickly to the patrol, while the other remains in observation. If the patrol is very small, two men are sent first to one flank and then to the other. A Heights — In reconnoitering a height, if the patrol is large enough to admit of detaching them, one or two men climb the slope on either flank, keeping in sight of the patrol, if possible. In any case, one man moves cautiously up the hill, followed by the others in single file at such distance that each keeps his predecessor in view. B Defiles — On approaching a defile, if the time permits, the heights on either side are reconnoitered by flankers before the patrol enters. If the heights are inaccessible or time is. urgent, the patrol passes through, in single file at double time, the distance being the same as in ascending a hill. The same method is adopted in reconnoitering a railroad cut or sunken road. C Bridges and Fords — At a bridge or ford, the front of the patrol is contracted so as to bring all the men to the passage. The patrol then crosses rapidly, and takes up a proper formation. A bridge is first examined to see that it is safe and has not been tampered with by the enemy. D Woods — The patrol enters a wood in skirmishing order, the intervals being as great as may be consistent with mutual observation and support on the part of the members of the patrol. On arriving at the farther edge of the wood, the patrol remains concealed and carefully looks about before passing out to the open ground. When there is such a growth of underbrush as to make this method imprac- ticable, and it is necessary to enter a wood by a road, the road is reconnoitered as in case of defile, though not usually at double time. If in this case a cross road is found in the wood, the patrol is assembled and the side road reconnoitered before passing beyond it. E Enclosures — In reconnoitering an enclosure, such as a garden, park or cemetery, the leading patrollers first examine the exterior, to make sure that the enemy is not concealed behind one of the faces of the enclosure. They then proceed to examine the interior. Great care is taken in reconnoitering and entering an enclosure. F Positions — In approaching a position, but one man advances, and he crawls cautiously toward the crest of the hill, or edge of the wood, or opening of the defile, while the others remain concealed in the rear until he signals them to advance. APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 219 AND SECURITY. A Houses — When a house is approached by a patrol, it is first rccon- noitered from a distance, and if nothing suspicious is seen, it is then approached by two men, the rest of the party remaining concealed in observation. If the patrol is large enough to admit of it, four men approach the house, so as to examine the front and back entrances at the same time. Only one man enters the door, the others remaining outside to give the alarm, should a party of the enemy be concealed in the house. The patrol does not remain in the vicinity of the house any longer than necessary, as information relative to its numbers and movements might be given to the enemy, if a hostile party should subsequently visit the place. Farm houses are searched for newspapers, and the inhabitants questioned. B Villages — In approaching a village one or two men are sent in to reconnoiter and one around each flank, but the main body does not enter until the scouts have reported. If the presence of the enemy is not apparent, the patrol enters the village, being disposed in any way conforming to the general rule. A suitable formation would be in single file at proper distances, each man being on the opposite side of the street from his predecessor. The patrol pushes rapidly through the village and when it has reached the opposite side, two of the party are detached, if expedient, to re enter the village to seek further information, the rest of the patrol remaining in some position affording observation and retreat. If the patrol is strong enough, it seizes the postoffice, telegraph office and railroad stations, and secures all important papers that may be there. If the patrol is part of the advance guard, it seizes the mayor and postmaster of the place and turns them over to the commander of the van guard with the papers seized. While searching a village, sentinels are placed at points of depart- ure to prevent any of the inhabitants from leaving. Tall buildings and steeples are ascended and an extensive view of the surrounding country obtained. C Villages at Night — At night a village is more cautiously ap- proached by a small party than by day. The patrol glides through back alleys, across gardens, etc., rather than moving along the main street. If there are no signs of the enem}'-, it makes inquiry. If no 220 CHAPTER XIV. light is seen, and it seems imprudent to rouse any of the people, the patrol watches and captures one of the inhabitants, and gets from him such information as he may possess. The best time for a patrol to approach a village is at early dawn, when it is light enough to see, but before the inhabitants are up. It is dangerous in the extreme for a small patrol to enter a village unless it is certain that it is not occupied by the enemy; for the men could be shot down by fire from the windows, cellarways, etc., or entrapped and captured. As a rule large towns aud cities are not entered by small patrols, but are watched from the outside. SUGGESTIONS AS TO THE METHOD OF RECONNOITERING VARIOUS FORMATIONS OF THE ENEMY A Enemy in Position — The patrol ascertains the direction and extent of the line of observation, how its flanks are supported, the position of the sentinels, their number, the number of pickets, the places where the line may be penetrated with the least risk of dis- covery, the strength of the hostile patrols, and the routes taken by them. It is of importance to ascertain whether good roads extend laterally, (that is, sidewise) behind the enemy's pickets, as such roads could be used by a force sent out to capture them. The patrol may approach near enough to the sentinel or picket to overhear the countersign and parole; but it must be certain that the advantage to be gained is worth the risk, as the patrol will be in danger of capture. If a point can be found on the flank of the enemy's position from which a view of his dispositions in rear of the line of sentinels can be obtained, the commander of the patrol endeavors to gain such a point, and, concealing his patrol near at hand, makes careful obser- vation. The best time for observation is at daybreak, and the selected point should be gained before dawn, so as to enable the patrol to observe the relieving of the outpost. The longer the patrol remains the more it will see, but the greater will be its danger of being dis- APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 221 AND SECURITY. covered. The patrol commander remains long enough to gain valuable information, but withdraws in time to escape capture. Any important movements, such as the withdrawing of sentinels, the changing of their positions, preparation for advance or retreat, etc., are at once reported. A Enemy on the March — If the enemy is on the march, the patrol conceals itself close to the hostile column, but far enough away to escape discovery by the enemy's flankers. Conspicious places are avoided, even at some distance from the column, as they will probably be carefully searched. The best place is a ditch or hollow, which will conceal the patrol and not be visible even at a short distance. B Method of Estimating the strength of a column — The strength of a body of troops may be estimated from the length of time it takes to pass a given point. Assuming that infantry in column of fours occupies half a yard per man, cavalry one yard per trooper, and artillery in single column twenty yards per gun or caisson, a given point would be passed in one minute by about: 175 infantry; 110 cavalry, at walk; 200 cavalry, at trot; 5 guns or caissons. For troops in columns of twos take one-half of the above estimates. C To Capture a Sentinel — If the object in view is the capture of a sentinel, the patrol is small. A sentinel is chosen whose post can apparently be easily approached, who appears to be isolated and not in plain sight of his picket. The patrol steals up close to the sentinel's post, being formed as circumstances may require, and, upon a signal, rushes forward, surrounds the sentinel and seizes him before he can fire. If he fires, the patrol can probably run him of¥ before he can receive any assistance, provided he has been surprised. D To Capture Prisoners — When a large patrol is charged with the capture of prisoners, its commander seeks a place of observation for himself and a place of concealment for his men; the two places being either the same or near each other. He then waits until one or a small party of the enemj'- draw far enough away from their camp or 222 CHAPTER XIV. column to be beyond the reacli of proper assistance, and waylays or gives chase to them. In these expeditions the prime objects is to bring in the prisoners, and harsh measures to hasten their march are excusable. When prisoners have been captured it is necessary to question them carefully. The most favorable moment for questioning prisoners is when they have just been captured. They are then agitated and have not sufficient self-control to deceive. The longer the questioning is postponed, the more evasive and studied will their answers become. Their answers at the place of capture may, to a certain extent be verified. Such is not the case after the lapse of some time and in another place. The prisoners are questioned at once and their replies are written down without their knowledge, and sent with the prisoner to the officer sending out the patrol, where they arc questioned at greater length. Enlisted men are questioned in regard to the regiment, brigades and divisions: the length of time they have been in position; whether their rations are satisfactory; whether certain commanders are popu- lar and have the confidence of their men ; whether there are many men on sick report; what news has lately been received in camp; and what the rumors are — in brief, all questions intended to bring out information in regard to the enemy's position, movements and morale (that is, the condition of the enemy as to discipline, his spirit, esprit de corps, etc.) If tact is exercised in questioning, much information may be gained; for the prisoner will probably consider the questions as prompted merely by natural curiosity. FACTS WHICH SHOULD BE OBTAINED BY PATROLS IN REFERENCE TO CERTAIN OBJECTS A Roads — Their direction; their nature (macadamized, corduroy, plank, dirt, etc.); their condition of repair; their grade; the nature of cross roads, and the points where they leave the main roads; their borders (woods, hedges, fences or ditches); the places at which they pass through defiles, cross heights or rivers, and where they intersect railroads; their breadth (whether suitable for column of fours or platoons, etc.). B Railroads — Their direction; guage; the number of tracks; stations APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 223 AND SECURITY. and junctions; their grade; llic nature of the cuts, embankments and tunnels. A Bridges — Their position; their width and length; their construc- tion (wood, brick, stone or iron) ; the roads and approaches on each bank. B Rivers and Other Streams — Their direction, width and depth; the rapidity of the current; liability to sudden rises and the highest and lowest points reached by the water, as indicated by drift wood, etc.; fords; the nature of the banks; kind, position and number of islands at suitable points of passage; heights in the vicinity and their command over the banks. C Woods — Their situation, extent and shape; whether clear or containing underbrush; the number and extent of "clearings" (open spaces); whether cut up by ravines, or containing marshes, etc.; nature of roads passing through them. D Canals — Their direction, width and depth; condition of towpaths; locks and means of protecting or destroying them. E Telegraphs — Whether they follow railroads or common roads; stations; number of wires. F Villages — Their situation (on a height, in a valley or* on a plain); nature of the surrounding country; construction of the houses, nature and width of streets; means of defense. G Defiles — Their direction; whether straight or crooked; whether heights on either side are accessible or inaccessible; nature of ground at each extremity; width (frontage of column that can pass through). H Ponds and Marshes- — Means of crossing; defensive use that might be made of them as obstacles against enemy; whether the marshy grounds are practicable for any or all arms. I Springs and Rivulets — Nature of approaches; whether water is drinkable and abundant. K Valleys — Extent and nature; towns, villages, hamlets, streams, roads and paths therein; obstacles offered by, or in the valley, to the movement of troops. J Heights — Whether slopes are easy or steep; whether good de- fensive positions are offered; whether plateau is wide or narrow; whether passages are easy or difficult; whether the ground is broken or smooth, wooded or clear. 224 CHAPTER XIV. A Methods Used by a Patrol in Destroying Roads, Railroads and Telegraph Lines. When the obj^ect is the destruction of roads, railroads, or tele- graph lines, the patrol, is generally a large one, but in some cases a small patrol answers the purpose better, as it can move to its destina- tion more secretly, and the use of high explosives gives it a great destructive power. The patrol endeavors to reach its objective unseen, and part are on the alert watching the enemy while the rest of the men are engaged in the work of destruction. B Tapping Wires — A patrol may be sent out to gain information by "tapping" a telegraph line. In this case a telegraph operator, using a sinall pocket instrument, taps the line and learns the messages passing over it. The rest of the men, carefully concealed, look out for the enemy. A patrol for the purpose of tapping a telegraph line is generally a cavalry patrol sent out from the cavalry screen or from a raiding column. C Messages — When the enemy is positivel}^ discovered for the first time, a message should be sent to the body sending out the patrol, giving accurate details. A message should also be sent when any new event of import- ance occurs, such as a change in disposition of the enemy. The exact location of the enemy — whether deployed, marching or in camp — his strength and the arms of service are next ascertained and reported. It is often difficult to decide whether the troops discovered r.re the main body or merely the advance guard or outposts. The ru)e is to observe the main body. Care should be taken by patrol commanders to distinguish between what he personally knows and what he is told or guesses at. A message should ahvays state zuhat the patrol is going to do next. The bearer of a verbal message should be required to repeat it to be sure he understands it. REPORTS D On the return of the patrol, the patrol commander should make a formal report to the commander of the body sending the patrol out, giving an account of every detail required by his orders. Many of these details will have been given in the messages sent in before this, but in a more condensed or briefer form. These will cover information of APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 225 AND SECURITY. the enemy, of our troops encountered, and description of the ground passed over, etc. In coming to conclusions as to facts to be stated in messages and reports, the patrol commander will be assisted by the following indications: A The Noise Made by Bodies of Troops on The March. The noise made by a strong column on the march is distinct and con- tinuous; that of a small body, feeble and interrupted. Th'e dis- tance at which the noise of marching can be heard depends upon the nature of the ground marched over, the direction of the wind, the presence or absence of other sounds. On a calm night, a company of infantry, marching at route step on a hard road, can be heard at a distance of 500 or 600 yards; a troop of cavalry at a walk, 600 or 700 yards; a troop of cavalry at trot or gallop, artillery and heavy wagons, 900 or 1,000 yards. Rumors of the withdrawal of heavy materials and baggage are signs that a retreat is planned. When the retreat is accompanied by demolition of bridges, destruction of stores and local resources, it may be assumed that importance is attached to retard as much as possible the progress of the enemy, and that the retreat will be a long one. B Dust — The dust raised by the march of a column furnishes an indication of the direction of the march, and the strength and compo- sition of the column. When infantry is marching the dust is low and thick. With cavalry the dust is higher and as this arm moves rapidly, the upper part of the cloud is thinner and disappears more quickly than in the case of infantry. The clouds of dust raised by i.rtillery and wagons are unequal in height and disconnected. Hence, by noting the length of a line of dust and the intervals in it, the strength and composition of the column may be estimated. The effect of the wind in scattering the dust must be taken into consideration. C Camp Noises — The rumble of vehicles, cracking of whips, neigh- ing of horses, braying of mules and barking of dogs often indicate the arrival or departure of troops. If the noise remains in the same place and new fires are lighted, it is probable that reinforcements have arrived. If the noise grows more indistinct, the troops are probably withdrawing. If, added to this, the fires appear to be dying out, and 226 CHAPTER XIV. the enemy seems to redouble the vigilance of the outposts, the indica tions of retreat are strong. A Flames and smoke — If at night the flames of an enemy's camp fires disappear and reappear, something is moving between the observer and the fires. If smoke as well as flame is visible, the fires are very near. If the fires are very numerous and lighted successively, and if soon after being lighted they go out, it is probable that the enemy is preparing a retreat and trying to deceive us. If the fires burn brightly and clearly at a late hour, the enemy has probably gone, and has left a detachment to keep the fires burning. If, at an unusual time, much smoke is seen ascending from an enemy's camo it is probable that he is engaged in cooking preparatory to moving oflf. If lines of smoke are seen rising at several points along a rail- way line in the enemy's rear, it may be surmised that the railroad is being destroyed by burning the cross-ties, and that a retreat is planned. B Reflection from Weapons — If the reflection is very brilliant, it is probable that the troops are marching toward the observer; other- wise it is probable that they are marching in the other direction. C Limits of Visions — On a clear day a man with good vision can see: At a distance of 9 to 12 miles, church spires and towers; At a distance of 5 to 7 miles, windmills; At a distance of 2 to 2Ja miles, chimneys of light color; At a distance of 2,000 yards, trunks of large trees; At a distance of 1,000 yards, single posts; At 500 yards the panes of glass may be distinguished in a window. Troops are visible at 2,000 yards, at which distance a mounted man looks like a mere speck; at 1,200 yards infantry can be dis- tinguished from cavalry; at 1,000 yards a line of men looks like 'i broad belt; at 600 yards the files of a squad can be counted, and at 400 yards the movements of the arms and legs can be plainly seen. The larger, brighter or better lighted an object is, the nearer it seems. An object seems nearer when it has a dark background thun when it has a light one, and closer to the observer when tl^e a'r is clear than when it is raining, snowing, fogg}^ or the atmosphere is filled with smoke. An object looks farther off when the observer is lacing the sun than when he has his back to it. A smooth expauso of snow, grain fields or water makes distances seem shorter than they really are. APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 227 AND SECURITY. A Trail of the Enemy — If the ground is evenly trodden, the column was composed of infantry alone. If there are many prints of horse- shoes, the column also contained cavalry. If the wheel tracks are deep and wide, artillery was in the column. If the trail is fresh, the column has recently passed. If the trail is narrow, the troops felt secure, as they were marching in column of route; if broad, they expected an action, as they were marching in column of platoons or companies, ready to deploy. If the fields on each side of the road are cut up with many tracks, the cavalry marched on the flanks of the column, and the enemy was pushing on with his troops well m hand for action. A retreating army makes a broad trail across fields, especially before the rear guard is formed and the retreat is regularly organized. B Abandoned Camps — Indications are found in the remains of camp fires. They will show, by their degree of freshness, whether much or little time elapsed since the enemy left the place, and the quantity of cinders will give an indication of the length of time he occupied it. They will also furnish a means of estimating his force approximately, ten men being allowed to each fire. Other valuable indications in regard to the length of time the position was occupied and the time when it was abandoned may be found in the evidence of care or haste in the construction of huts or shelters, and in the freshness of straw, grain, dung or the entrails of slaughtered animals. Abandoned clothing, equipments or harness will give a clue to the arms and regiments composing a retreating force. Dead horses lying about, broken weapons, discarded knapsacks, abandoned and broken down wagons, etc., are indications of its fatigue and demoralization Blood}^ bandages lying about, and many fresh graves, are evidences that the enemy is heavily burdened with wounded or sick. PROBLEMS (See Fort Leavenworth map in pocket at back of book). Read each problem carefully and solve its difTferent requirements without looking at the solution. Then compare your answer with the answer given in the text. In all solutions study carefully the para- graphs referred to in the text. (Note: vn', un', um', etc., means that the points named are located at the approximate interesection of east and west lines running through v, u, etc., and north and south lines running through n', m', etc., on margin of map.) 228 CHAPTER XIV. PROBLEM 1 Situation: A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on the line Pope Hill (sm') — National cemetery (pk') — E (qh'). A red force is reported to have reached Soldiers' Home (3 miles south of Leavenworth) from the south at 7 :oo o'clock this morning. Corporal A is directed by Sergeant B, in command of the left support at Rabbit Point (tn'), to take out a patrol toward the waterworks and south along the Esplanade (xo') to the Terminal Bridge. Required, 1. Give Sergeant B's orders to Corporal A. Answer. "The enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home at 7:00 o'clock this morning. Another patrol will advance along Grant avenue (tui'). "Our outposts will remain here for the day. "Select from the first section a patrol and reconnoiter this road (Faragut avenue) as far as the waterworks (vn'), thence by Esplanade to the Terminal Bridge, and report on the ground in our front. When you reach the Terminal Bridge return if no enemy is seen. "Send reports here.'" Required, 2. How many men does Corporal A select, and why? (Par. B, page 213, and Par. C, page 256). Answer. Five men are taken because the patrol is to reconnoiter, not to fight, and on account of the distance to go and lack of informa- tion of the enemy, 2 or 3 messages may have to be sent. Required, j. What equipment should Corporal A have? (Par. C, page 213). Required, 4. State the points to be noted by Corporal A in select- ing his patrol and what inspection does he make? (Par. C, page 215). Answer. He selects privates C, D, E, F, and G, on account of their bravery, attention to duty and discretion. He directs them lo carry one meal in their haversacks, full canteen and fifty rounds of ammuni- tion. He then inspects them as to their physical condition, sees that they have proper equipment and that nothing to rattle or glisten is carried. Required, 5. What does Corporal A next do? (Par. D, page 215). Answer. He gives them their instructions as follows : "The enemy, strength unknown, was at Soldiers' Home (about three miles south of Leavenworth) at 7 o'clock this morning. There will be n APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 229 AND SECURITY. friendly patrol along that road (pointing to Grant avenue). We are to reconnoiter along this road and down toward that bridge (pointing). Be very careful not to be seen, take advantage of all cover, and keep touch with C and myself on this road at the point of the patrol. In case we get separated meet at the watedworks (vn')." He then explains the signals to be used, and moves the patrol in close order out along the road until it passes the sentinel at the bridge XV (un'), to whom he gives the direction to be taken by the patrol. Required, 6. Upon leaving XV, what formation would the patrol take, and reasons for same. (Par. D, page 215, and Par. A, page 216). Answer. Corporal A and Private C form the point on the road leading southwest of the waterworks ; Private D moves on the left over- looking the railroad; Private E moves promptly up Corral creek {um') to the top of Grant Hill {um') to observe the country toward the south- west; Private F moves about 50 yards in rear of the point, followed at 50 yards by Private G. Corporal A forms his patrol as stated because of the necessity of getting a view from the hill on each side. Only one man is sent out on each side because they can be plainly seen by the patrol on the road, and no connecting file is necessary. (Par. D, page 215). The distances taken along the road assure at least one man's escape, and Corporal A is in front to get a good view and to signal the flankers. (Par. A, page 216). PROBLEM 2 Situation : The head of the patrol is now at the bridge, XVI (un') northwest of the waterworks. Private E has reached the top of Grant Hill and signals the enemy in sight ; the patrol halts and Corporal A moves out to meet Private E who is coming down toward the patrol. He says he saw three mounted men ride up to Grant and Metropolitan avenues (zvm') from the south and after looking north a moment move west. Required, i. Corporal A's action. (Par. C, page 224). Answer. Corporal A at once writes the following message and sends it back by Private E: 230 CHAPTER XIV. "No. 1. Patrol, Company B, Farragut Avenue, Northwest of Waterworks, To Commander Blue Left Support, 10 May '09, 8.30 A. M. Rabbitt Point. 3 mounted Reds, seen by Private E, just now reconnoitered at Grant and Metropolitan avenues; they are moving west on Metropolitan avenue; the patrol will continue toward the Terminal Bridge. A, Corporal. Reasons. The message is sent because this is the first time the enemy has been seen, and they have not been reported north of Sol- diers' Home before. The message should state who saw the enemy, and * the man seeing them should always carry the message telling of the facts. The patrol would not allow this small hostile patrol to stop its advance, but would proceed on its route cautiously to avoid being seen, and to see if the Red cavalrymen are followed by others of the enemy. Required, 2. Give the method of reconnoitering the buildings at the waterworks and coal mine. (Par. F, page 218, and Pars. A and B, page 219). Answer. Private D carefully examines the east side of the enclo- sures and buildings, while Private C examines the west side. The re- mainder of the patrol halts concealed in the cut west of the north en- closure, until C and D signal no enemy in sight, whereupon the patrol moves forward along the road (XV — 3rd St.) C and D advancing rapidly between the buildings to the town where they join the patrol. Required, 3. Give the route followed by E from Grant hill to the edge of Leavenworth. (Par. B and C, page 216). Answer. He moves down the east slope of Grant Hill to the ravine just east of the old R. R. bed (um') being careful to keep concealed from the direction of Leavenworth. Pie moves up the ravine, keeping a sharp lookout to the front, and moving rapidly until abreast, if he has fallen behind. He takes the branch ravine lying just west of Circus Hill (vm'), and moves up to its end. Here he halts and makes careful inspection of Metropolitan avenue and the street south into the city. Being sure the coast is clear, he darts across the narrow ridge south of Circus Hill to the ravine to the east and then joins the patrol. He re- ports to Corporal A any indication of the enemy he may have seen. APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 231 AND SECURITY. PROBLEM 3 Situation. A Blue force holds Fort Leavenworth (om' ) in hostile country. Outposts occupy the line Salt Creek Hill (gli')—U (//)— Sheridan's Drive, (mi') against the Reds advancing from the northwest. At 4.30 p. m. June 25th, Sergeant A is given the following orders by Captain B, commanding the support : 'The enemy will probably reach Kickapoo late today. Our out- posts extend as far north as Salt Creek Hill. There were six of our men prisoners at 45 (dc') this afternoon at i o'clock, being held by 15 home guards at Kickapoo. Take . . . men from the company and move to Kickapoo, recapture the prisoners and -gain all the information you can of the enemy north of there." keqtiired, i. How many men does Captain B name, and why? (Par. B, page 213). Answer. 30 men are assigned. Reason. This is twice as many as the enemy holding the prisoners, and to secure secrecy no larger force than absolutely necessary should be taken. This force will allow men to surround the enemy while the remainder rush them. Required, 2. Give the order of Sergeant A to his patrol (see 6th requirement Problem 1, and Pars. C and D, page 215). Required, 3. What route will the patrol take. Anszver. 11 (//') — 13 (//') — Salt Creek Hill (gh') — and along the edge of the woods east of the M. P. R. R. (fg') as far as the bridge oppo- site Kickapoo Hill — thence up Kickapoo Hill toward 45 (dc'). Reasons. Since the patrol's orders do not require any reconnais- sance before reaching Kickapoo the shortest and most practical route is chosen. The route as far as Salt Creek Hill lies behind our outpost line and is thus protected. The main roads are avoided because they will be carefully watched by the enemy. The edge of the woods east of the M. P. Ry. (beginning about ff') gives good cover and by moving to the bridge the patrol can probably sneak close in on the enemy and capture them by surprise. PROBLEM 4 Situation. The patrol reaches the top of Kickapoo Hill (cd'). Sergeant A and private C move cautiously to the top and see the six prisoners in the 232 CHAPTER XIV. cemetery (cd') just west of Kickapoo Hill, and a Red sentinel at each corner . Just west of the cemetery are about lo more Reds. No others are visible. Required, i. What decision does Sergeant A make and what does he do? Answer. He decides to capture the enemy by surprise. He leaves Private C to watch and, moving cautiously back to his patrol, makes the following dispositions : Corporal D with lo men to move up to Private C and cover the enemy, remaining concealed. He takes the remainder of the patrol with fixed bayonets around the northeast slope of Kickapoo Hill in the woods and moves up the ravine toward 29. When his de- tachment arrives within about 100 yards of the enemy, they charge bayonet and rush them. Corporal D's party at the same time rush in from the opposite side. (Note: The enemy are demoralized by the surprise and are captured without a shot being fired.) Required, 2. What action does Sergeant A now take? Answer. He causes the enemy to be kept apart while he and his noncommissioned officers question them separately. (Par. D, page 221). He then questions the Blue prisoners, and furnishing them the guns taken from the Reds, sends them and the captured Reds back to our line under Corporal D, with a written message giving the information secured from his questions. (Par. C, page 224). Required, j. What does he then do? Anszver. Places his main body in concealment at the Cemetery (cd') and sends a patrol under Corporal H via 35 — 41 — 43, and one under Corporal F via 29 — 27 — 23 west to learn further of the enemy in execu- tion of the second part of his orders. The patrol under Corporal H sends back the following message : "No. 1. Patrol Comi^any A, 1st Infantry, 21 June '09; 5.30 P. M. Commander Expeditionary Patrol, at 45. A column of infantry is moving east about 1 mile west of Schwei/.er (aa') ; about 800 yards in front of this body is another small body with 8 to 10 men 300 yards still farther east. It took the main body 2 min. 45 sec. to pass a point on the road. I remain in observation. H, Corporal." Required, 3. The size of the command reported by Corporal H and its formation. (Par. B, page 221). Answer, i battalion infantry (512 men), preceded by i section as APPLIED PRINCIPLES OF INFORMATION 233 AND SECURITY. advance guard. The advance guard having only advance party and point. 2f minutes X 1/5 = 481 men in the main body, leaving about 32 men for the advance guard. PROBLEM 5 General Situation. A Blue force of one regiment of infantry has outposts facing south on the line Pope Hill (sm') National Cemetery (qk') — E (qi'). A Red force moving north reached Soldiers' Home at 7 o'clock this morning. Special Situation : Corporal B is chosen by Sergeant A, commander of the right sup- port at the National Cemetery, to take a patrol south as far as 20th street (yf), and Metropolitan avenue (wh'), to report on the ground along the route, and to reconnoiter the enemy. A friendly patrol moves along Sheridan's Drive (/) — Atchison Hill (rg') — Southwest Hill (ue'), and one on Prison Lane (rk'). Required, i. Sergeant A's orders, verbatim (that is, word for word), 2. Give the various details attended to by Corporal B be- fore he moves out with his patrol. 3. What is the formation of the patrol when its point is at E {qh'). 4. When the patrol reaches 14 (ug'), how are the inter- secting roads reconnoitered? 5. Four mounted men are seen riding west at a walk at 64 (wh'). What action does Corporal A take? 6. Describe the ground passed over by the patrol. PROBLEM 6 Situation. The enemy is moving east toward Frenchman (oc') and is expected to reach there early tomorrow. A company at 72 («/') forms the left support of an outpost in hostile country, on the line 70 (vf) — National Cemetery ( n r-h w 2. P P CI. <; fC o < H 1— 1 % td td H 3 '^ g w td td O CO ? td t-H r r CO o 'oniato S ;aked Po p* <— 1 p n re" o 1-^ ^ o r-t O n o o t— t • Ci. o 1— » - o p ?r rt p. o p 2 P^ p p. p 1— k ■ rt) p. o o r+ rt- P r^ J l-h r+ o ~J ^ O ew atoes o o o 3 p O a> in P o C/3 P O 3 o 2* C/5 O C/5 fD > l-l W o ■^jufuopp p Li "-t "-t o) '-t --t i-t O Cu CI. Ci. CU D- td td p td td td >-! -t p;' ■-: '-1 '-t n) rti (-B fi> (T> ft) p. Ci- p. Ci. CL O 1— 1 3 n:^ s 1 — 1 u.-f 3 P HT p o p p p •-t XJ -s fD 2 ^ •o CU Qu Cl- ' 1 n " — 1 <— 1 td p w p td p p •-i o >-i ?r -t n o fD ?r fD fD ft> o o o o p o p 3:5 ^ ^ 3. ^ fD fD fD fD P fT> fD fD fD o n n H n n n o 3* rD 000 3} P ::^ ft fT> fU Q fD Q 2. fD P (T> P fD fD 270 CHAPTER XV. SUGGESTIONS FOR HANDLING BILL OF FARE NO. 1 L Take two-thirds of a cup of water and bring to a boil. Add four spoonfuls of rice and boil until soft, i. e., until it can be mashed by the fingers with but little resistance. This Avill require about 15 minutes. Add two pinches of salt and, after stirring, pour off the water and empty the rice out on the lid of the mess pan. 2. Meanwhile, fry three slices of bacon until slightly browned in the mess pan over a brisk fire or hot coals, and lay them on top of the rice, leaving sufficient grease in the pan in which to fry the flap jack. 3. Take six spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of baking powder and mix thoroughly. Add sufllcient cold water to make a batter that will drip freely from the spoon. Add a pinch of salt and two pinches of sugar and pour the batter into the mess pan, which should contain the grease from the fried bacon. Place over medium hot coals and bake from five to seven minutes ; see that it will slip easily in the pan and then, by a quick toss, turn it over and continue the baking from five to seven minutes longer or until, by examination, it is found to be done. 4. While the batter is frying, wash out the tin cup ; fill two-thirds with water and let come to a boil. Add one medium heaping spoonful of coffee and stir well and, if desired, one spoonful of sugar and let boil for about five minutes. Let simmer for about ten mmutes longer. Settle by a dash of cold water or let stand a few minutes. A hot meal is now ready to serve. Time about 40 minutes. MEATS Bacon. Cut side of bacon in half lengthwise. Then cut slices about five to the inch, three of which should generally be sufficient for one man for one meal. Place in a mess pan with about, one-half inch of cold water. Let come to a boil and then pour the water off. Fry over a brisk fire, turning the bacon once and quickly browning it. Remove the bacon to lid of mess pan, leaving the grease for frying potatoes, onions, rice, flap jacks, etc., according to recipe. Fresh Meat — To fry. To fry, a small amount oi grease (1 to 2 spoonfuls) is necessary. Put grease in mess pan and let come to a smoking temperature, then drop in the steak and, if about one-half inch thick, let fry for about one minute before turning — depending upon FIELD SERVICE. 2/1 g^s- 3 'S ^ "^':^ ^G "P "S 2£j 3 is ^'^ ►1 3 cou cn D-(T) :! O O O P 3 •; o w ^ — " ::r. rt !" £i 3 p" § =^ o ^n> 3 »-^*3 O O (T> ti O (T) CD 3 ^ n. n W rt 3 en ryq 3 :i.=i o o "O rt --;-t ^ a- - : i c •-! 3 S' CQ X) ^ -52.^ ,j,?^^ 'S^^t^ o'^ S^ 3^3^ ^._r §s. ?^s:ss 3 1 3 1 ^--^ 3 fll oq Let alio get grai 75 'I en '^" o-n, S 3^ 1 ^ r^ "2 ^ r en rtfxy <; -- :S s* 3 :::;!■ 3 m 0) fT ^ =^S^ ^ ^ ? = 2 =: X -^ ^rj ^ g- 3 3 ■-»■ 3 P^ 3 e. 3 ?=3 w £L 5 n i-H 2 ^ ^t S_c- CO fi — 1.-' c,-- •3 3 • re --• r:-P Q ^ '°^Q-.3 .3 P O p :n -- 2 >< =- S P^ r+ =" O B-^ 3-f^ >3~3. 33. 3- 3 n>3^ 7),S t^-;^ ' Q W Ci <- Q O o o (Ll 5 ^ OJ - >•-; OJ 1-1 pq U5 "— ' ° &^ s 2 c o < ;-i 05 O Vh ^ ■n rt 3 ^ ft u to E c o o re o bo 'V c re 3 V - '^ re re u *J +^ o re ^ re (U (LI C re (U S « (Ll ^> c 3 u c t/; W ^ O U (72 b6 >^ i—*Z^ 01,7-; ijw^ bo Q CO en CO ^ o •^ e S c8 O C> (U «o +-■ (1> ^f w ^ FIELD SERVICE. 273 whether it is desired it shall be rare, medium or well done. Then turn and fry briskly as before. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to beef, veal, pork, mutton, venison, etc. Fresh Meat — To broil. Cut in slices about one inch thich, from half as large as the hand to four times that size. Sharpen a stick or branch of convenient length — saj' from two to four feet long and weave the point of the stick through the steak several times so that it may be readily turned over a few brisk coals or on the windward side of a small fire. Allow to brown nicely, turning frequently. Salt and pepper to taste. Meat wath considerable fat is preferred, though any meat may be broiled in this manner. Fresh Meat — To stew. Cut into chunks from one-half inch to one inch cube. Fill cup one-third full of meat and cover with about one inch of water. Let boil or simmer about one hour or until tender. Add such fibrous vegetables as carrots, turnips or cabbage, cut into small chunks, soon after the meat is put on to boil, and potatoes, onions, or other tender vegetables when the meat is about half done. Amcjunt of vegetables to be added, about the same as meat, depending upon supply and taste. Salt and pepper to taste. Applies to all fresh meats and fowls. The proportion of meat and vegetables used varies with their abundance and fixed quantities cannot be adhered to. Fresh fish can be handled as above, except that it is cooked much quicker, and potatoes, onions, and canned corn are the only vegetables generally used with it, thus making a chowder. A slice of bacon would greatly improve the flavor. May be conveniently cooked in mess pan or tin cup. FRESH VEGETABLES Potatoes, Fried. Take two medium sized potatoes or one large one (about one-half pound), peel and cut into slices about one-fourth inch thick and scatter well in the mess pan in which the grease remains after frying bacon. Add sufficient water to half cover the potatoes, cover with the lid to keep the moisture in, and let come to a boil from 15 to 20 minutes. Remove the cover and dry as desired. Salt and pepper to taste. During the cooking the bacon already prepared may be kept on the cover^ which is most conveniently placed bottom side up over the cooking vegetables. Onions, Fried. Same as potatoes. Potatoes, Boiled. Peel two medium, sized potatoes or one large one (about one-half pound), and cut in coarse chunks of about the same 274 CHAPTER XV. size — say one and one-half inch cubes. Place in mess pan and three- fourths fill with water. Cover with lid and let boil or simmer for 15 or 20 minutes. They are done when easily penetrated with a sharp stick. Pour off the water and let dry out for one or two minutes over hot ashes or light coals. Potatoes Baked. Take two medium sized potatoes or one large one cut in half (about one-half pound). Lay in a bed of light coals, cover with same and smother with ashes. Do not disturb for 30 or 40 minutes, when they should be done. Canned Tomatoes. One two-pound can is generally sufficient for five men. Stew. Pour into the mess pan one man's allowance of tomatoes, add about two large hardtacks broken into small pieces and let come to a boil. Add salt and pepper to taste, or add a pinch of salt and one- fourth spoonful of sugar. Or, having fried the bacon, pour the tomatoes into the mess pan, the grease remaining, and add if desired, two broken hardtacks. Set over a brisk fire and let come to a boil. Or, heat the tomatoes just as they come from the can, adding two pinches of salt and one-half spoonful of sugar if desired. Or, especially in hot weather, eaten cold with hard bread they are very palatable. HOT BREADS Flap Jack. Take six spoonfuls of flour and one-third spoonful of baking powder and mix thoroughly (or dry mix in a large pan before issue, at the rate of 25 pounds of flour and three half pound cans of baking powder for 100 men). Add sufficient cold water to make a batter that will drip freely from the spoon, adding a pinch of salt. Pour into the mess pan, which should contain the grease from fried bacon, or a spoonful of butter or fat, and place over medium hot coals, sufficient to bake so that in from five to seven minutes, the flap jack may be turned by a quick toss of the pan. Fry from five to seven minutes longer or until, by examination, it is found to be done. Hoe Cake. Hoe cake is made exactly the same as flap jack by substituting corn meal for flour. FIELD SERVICE. EMERGENCY RATION Emergency Rations. Detailed instructions as to the manner of preparing" the emergency ration are found on the ]al)el with each can. Remember that even a \ery limited amount of bacon or hard bread, or both, taken with the emergency ration makes it far more palatable, and greatly extends l;he period during which it can be consumed with relish. For this reason it would be better to husband the supply of hard bread and bacon to use with the emergency ration when it becomes evident that the latter must be consumed, rather than to retain the emerg- ency ration to the last extremity to be used exclusively for a longer period than two or three days. MARCHES In time of war, protection for troops on the march is provided by means of Advance Guards, Flanking Parties and Rear Guards. The average march for infantry is from 15 to 20 miles a day; for cavalry, from 20 to 25, and for artillery from 15 to 25. When practicable, marches should begin in the morning* after the men have had their breakfast, and the following general rules should be observed. / The canteens should be filled before the march begins. 2 Infantry should march about 3 miles an hour; cavalry about 5, alternating the walk and trot and occasionally dismounting and leading for short distances; the artillery about 4, the walk being the habitual gait. J The pace at the head of the column must be steady and the column must be kept closed up throughout its length. 4 After the first half or three-quarters of an hour's march, the command should be halted for about fifteen minutes to allow the men to relieve themselves and to adjust their clothing and accoutrements. 5 After the first rest, there should be a halt of ten minutes every hour. Immediately upon halting, the company shotdd be cautioned, "Any man wishing to relieve himself, do so at once" — otherwise some will wait until the halt is nearlv over. *lf considerable distance is to be marched without water, the start should be made late in the afternoon and continued until night and then again early the next morning, halting before the sun gets hot. 276 CHAPTER XV. 6 Indiscriminate rushing for water upon halting should not be allowed — one or more men from every squad should be designated to fill the canteens of the squad. 7 No man should be allowed to leave the ranks without per- mission of his company commander. Men allowed to fall out on account of sickness should be given notes to the surgeon. If a man be very sick a non-commissioned officer or reliable private should fall out with him. (S Whenever a stream is forded or any obstacle passed, the head of the column should be halted a short distance beyond, so as to enable the rest of the column to close up. p In crossing shallow streams, the men should be kept closed up and not allowed to pick their way. 10 All men should be made to keep their places in column. // A lieutenant or the first sergeant should march in rear of the company to look after stragglers. 12 Nibbling while actually marching should be prohibited. 13 When the troops march for the greater part of the day, a halt of an hour should be made about noon, near wood and water, if practicable. 14. The halt for the night should be made in plenty of time to allow tents to be pitched, supper cooked, etc., before dark. 75 Since marching at the rear of the column is more disagree- able and fatiguing than marching at the front, organizations should take daily turns in leading.f ARTICLES OF WAR Art. 54. Every officer commanding in quarters, garrison or on the march, shall keep good order, and, to the utmost of his power, re- dress all abuses or disorders which may be committed by any officer or soldier under his command; and if, upon complaint made to him of officers or soldiers beating or otherwise ill-treating any person, disturbing fairs or markets, or committing any kind of riot, to the disquieting of the citizens of the United States, he refuses or omits to see justice done to the offender, and reparation made to the party injured, so far as part of the offender's pay shall go toward such tSee "Marches" in the Infantry, the Cavah-y and the Artillery Drill Regula- tions, in Field Service Regulations and in the Army Regulations. See also "The March in Campaign," in Munson's Military Hygiene. FIELD SERVICE. 277 reparation, he shall be dismissed from the service, or otherwise pun- ished as a court-martial may direct. Art. 55. All officers and soldiers are to behave themselves or- derly in quarters and on the march; and whoever commits any waste or spoil, either in walks or trees, parks, warrens, fish ponds, houses, gardens, grain fields, inclosures, or meadows, or maliciously destroys any property whatsoever belonging to inhabitants of the United States (unless by order of a general officer commanding a separate army in the field) shall, besides such penalties as he may be liable to by law, be punished as a court-martial may direct. CAMPING In time of war protection for troops in camp is provided by means of Outposts. « The art of laying out camps is called castrametation. The following conditions must be considered in the selection of camp sites: 1 Location. 2 Water, wood and grass. S Sanitation, and in time of war, defense and safety. Camps should be on slightly sloping ground, well drained and subject to sunny exposures. Sandy or deep, gravelly soil is desirable, but muddy rivers, ponds, swamps, made ground, alluvial soil and en- closed ravines must be avoided. In time of war all hills and eminences nearby should be occupied by pickets. When camp is established for an indefinite period, drain- age should be attended to at once. Each tent should have a shallow trench dug around it and the company and other streets ditched on both sides, all the trenches and ditches connecting with a ditch that carries the water from the camp. All surface drainage from higher ground should be intercepted and turned aside. In front of every camp of a permanent nature, there should be a parade ground for drills and ceremonies, and the sanitary condi- tions of the camp should be carefully considered. In camping for the night on a fordable stream that is to be crossed, always cross before going into camp; for a sudden rise or the appearance of the enemy might prevent the crossing the next morning. Whenever windstorms are expected, the tent pegs should be secured and additional guy ropes attached to the tents. If the soil be 278 CHAPTER XV. loose or sandy, stones or other hard material should be placed under the tent poles to prevent their working into the soil, thus leaving the tent slack and unsteady. When "the soil is so loose that the pegs wiH not hold at all, fasten the guy ropes to brush, wood or rocks buried in the ground. Tents may be prevented from blowing down by being made fast at the corners to posts firmly driven into the ground, or by passing ropes over the ridge poles and fastening them to pegs firmly driven into the ground. While trees add very much to the comfort of a camp, care should be exercised not to pitch tents near trees whose branches or trunks might fall. In a hostile country the capability of defense of a camp site should always be considered. Making Camp The command should be preceded by the commanding officer or a staff officer, who selects the camp site, and designates, by plantin^.? stakes, the lines of tents, the positions of the sinks, guard tent, kitchens, picket line, etc. After the companies are marched to their proper positions and arms are stacked, the details for guard and to bring wood, water, dig sinks, pitch tents, handle rations, etc., should be made before ranks are broken. Immediatey upon reaching camp and before the men are allowed to go around, patrolling sentinels should be established to prevent men from polluting the camp site or adjoining ground before the sinks are constructed. Sentinels should be posted over the water supply without delay. As soon as the tents have been pitched and the sinks dug, the camp should be inspected and all unnecessary sentinels relieved. The tents should be pitched and the sinks dug simultaneously. If the weather is at all threatening or if it is intended to camp more than one night, all tents should be ditched. Should the troops reach camp before the wagons, the companies may be divided into squads and set to work clearing the ground, gathering fire wood, collecting leaves, grass, etc., for beds, etc. The moment a command reaches camp its officers and men usually want to go here and there under all sorts of pretexts. No one FIELD SERVICE. 279 should be allowed to leave camp until all necessary instructions have been given. Officers should not be allowed to leave camp without permission from the commanding officer, and enlisted men should not be per- mitted to leave camp without permission of their company com- manders. Sick-call should be held as soon as practicable after the tents have been pitched. Retreat roll call should always be under arms, an officer being with each company and inspecting its arms. Construction of Sinks The sinks must be dug immediately upon reaching camp — their construction must not be delayed until the cam^ have been pitched and other duties performed. The number of sinks should be reduced to a minimum — each company should not be permitted to have its own sink — there should be one sink to each battalion. The exact location of the sinks should be determined by the commanding officer, or by some officer designated by him, the following considerations being observed: / They should be so located as not to contaminate the water supply, and should be on the leeward side of the camp. 2 They should not be placed where they can be flooded by rain water from higher ground, nor should' they be so placed that they can pollute the camp by overflow in case of heavy rains. 2 They should be as far from the tents as is compatible with convenience — if too near, they will be a source of annoyance; if too far, some men, especially at night, and particularly if affected with diarrhoea, will defecate before reaching the sink. Under ordinary circumstances, a distance of about 75 yards is considered sufficient. 4 The sinks and the kitchens should always be widely separated, and when practicable should be on opposite sides of the camp. The size of the sink will depend on the length of time the camp is to be occupied. If it be for only one night, a trench about two feet wide and two feet deep will be sufficient, its length depending upon the number of men to be accommodated, a length of about twenty feet being sufficient for a company of one hundred men. If the camp is to be occupied for several days, the sink should be about six feet deep, three feet wide at the top and two feet at the bottom. The 280 CHAPTER XV. soil from the trench should be piled to the rear, from where it can be scattered as needed over the deposits. The seat may be formed by placing a good stout pole on the edge, about 18 inches above the ground, and supported at each end by forked posts. The sink should be hidden from view by brushwood stuck into the ground and a roof of boughs should be constructed to keep off the sun. At least twice a day, in the morning and in the evening, the police party should cover the bottom with a slight layer of loose earth. Better still, each man should be made to cover his own defeca- tion with earth, ashes or lime. As a general rule, one soldier for every sink should be especially detailed to see that the defecations are properly covered and that all other rules pertaining to the sinks are obeyed. Lime or crude petroleum, if available, should be spread over the deposits, petroleum being especially good to keep flies away. When the sink is filled to within two or three feet of the surface its use is to be discontinued and earth thrown in and packed until a slight mound is made above it. All sinks should be filled in before marching. See "The Sanitary Administration of the Camp," in "Munson's Military Hygiene." Kitchens The following are simple methods of constructing camp kitchens: / Dig a hole about two feet deep, in which build a fire and keep it burning until the hole is full of hot ashes; put what is to be cooked in covered pans which are placed in the hole and covered with ashes, on top of which keep a fire burning briskly. 2 Dig a trench in the direction of the wind, of a width a little less than the diameter of the kettles and about one foot deep at the end from which the wind is blowing, continuing this depth for four or five feet and then gradually decreasing it until the surface of the ground is reached. • Build a fire in the deep part of the trench; be- ginning a short distance fronj the deep end of the trench, place the kettles over the fire touching one another, stopping up with dry sod the chinks made by the roundness of the kettles, so that the space underneath will form a flue. 3 Dig a trench about two feet wide, one foot deep and five feet long; at each end drive into the ground a forked stick, of equal heights, and place upon them a stout sapling, from which suspend the kettles. FIELD SERVICE. ' 281 4 In clay soil, preferably on the slope of a hill, dig a hole about three feet square and two feet deep; from one side of the hole, and about one foot below the surface of the ground, run a lateral shaft about one foot square and six feet long, sinking a vertical shaft at the end; connect the lateral shaft with the surface of the ground by three equidistant holes, over which the kettles are placed. As a precautionary measure against setting the camp on fire, all dry grass, underbrush, etc., in the immediate vicinity of the kitchen should be cut down. In case of a fire in camp, underbrush, spades, shovels, blankets, etc., are used to beat it out. Gunny sacks dipped in wa^^er are the best fire fighters. Burning away dried grass and underbrush around exterior of camp is a great protection against fire from outside. Kitchen Pits Pits of convenient size should be constructed for the liquid refuse from the kitchens. Solid refuse should be burned either in the kitchen fire or at some designated place, depending upon whether the camp is *of a temporary or permanent nature. Unless the camp be of a very temporary nature, the pits should be covered with boards or other material in order to exclude the flies. All pits should be filled in with earth before breaking camp. Ovens A simple camp oven may be constructed as follows: Place horizontally a barrel with iron hoops in a hole of proper width and of a depth equal to about one-fourth of the diameter of the barrel; except at the open end, which is to be the mouth, cover the barrel with six or eight inches of wet earth, preferably clay; fill the bottom of the barrel with mud until an even floor is formed; cover all the mud with several inches of sand, earth, etc.; make a flue of two or three inches in diameter at the further top end of the barrel, then light a fire in the barrel and keep it burning briskly until all the staves are burned out and the earth is well hardened. See "Bakery Facilities," page 174, "Munson's Military Hygiene," and "Field Ovens," page 225, "Manual for Army Cooks" (1896). Bunks Place a number of small poles about seven feet long close to- gether, the upper ends resting on a cross pole about six inches in 282 CHAPTER XV. diameter and the lower ends resting on the ground; or, the poles ma\' be raised entirely off the ground by being placed on cross poles sup- ported by forked stakes at the corners; on the poles place grass, leaves, etc. Wood The fire-wood should be collected, cut and piled near the kitchen. Dry wood is usually found under logs or roots of trees. If wagons are not heavily loaded it is sometimes a good plan to bring a few sticks of dry wood from the preceding camp, or to pick up good wood en route. Water Precautionary measures should always be taken to prevent the contamination of the water, and a guard from the first troops reach- ing camp should be placed over the water supply. Water used for drinking purposes should be gotten from above the camp, and places below this point should be designated for watering the animals, bathing and washing clothes. In the field it is sometimes necessary to sterilize or filter water. The easiest and surest way of sterilizing water is by boiling. Boiled water should be aerated by being poured from one receptacle to an- other or by being filtered through charcoal or clean gravel. Unless boiled water be thus aerated it is very unpalatable and it is with difficulty that troops can be made to drink it. Filtration merely clarifies — it does not purify. The following are simple methods of filtration: / Dig a hole near the source of supply so that the water may percolate through the soil before being used. 2 Sink a barrel or box into the ground, the water entering therein through a wooden trough packed with clean sand, gravel or charcoal. 3 Place a box or barrel in another box or barrel of larger size, filling the space between with clean sand, gravel, moss or charcoal, and piercing holes near the bottom of the outer barrel and near the top of the inner. The filter thus constructed is partly submerged in the water to be filtered. 4 Bore a small hole in the bottom of a barrel or other suitable receptacle, which is partly filled with layers of sand, gravel, and, if available, charcoal and moss. The water is poured in at the top and is collected as it emerges from the aperture below. FIELD SERVICE. 283 The amount of water used by troops is usually computed at the rate of five gallons for each man and ten gallons for each animal per day. For a full discussion of the purification of drinking water, see "Water," Munson's Military Hygiene. Police of Camp The proper and efficient police of a camp is of the greatest im- portance, and the following regulations should be enforced: / Company commanders will maintain neatness and proper sanitary conditions within their respective organizations. 2 The officer of the day is charged with the general policing of the camp, utilizing prisoners and fatigue parties for the purpose. 3 Company commanders will make daily inspections of their company quarters, kitchens and sinks. 4 The company streets will be swept daily, and the intervening^ spaces between tents carefully policed. 5 All tents will be swept out daily.* 6 All bedding will be sunned daily.f 7 The condition of the outskirts of the camp will be given close attention, being kept free from all refuse. 5 In fair weather, every morning after breakfast the tent walls will be looped up. In cold weather the tent walls will be raised dur- ing the absence of the occupants at drill or other duty. p Every night at tattoo and also during wet weather the tent ropes will be slackened. They will be tightened again at reveille or when the weather clears. LOADING WAGONS The property to be loaded should be carefully inspected before any is loaded, to see that everything is in good order and properlv boxed, crated or tied. Large heavy boxes should be avoided. The following general rules must be observed: *Brooms can be improvised by tying together a number of small twigs of equal length. The leafy branches of trees will answer the same purpose. tPoles supported by forked uprights are convenient for drying and sunning garments and bedding. 284 CHAPTER XV. 1 Heavy stuff must go on the bottom (and forward rather than rear) and light stuff on top — thus, heavy articles will not crush light ones and the centre of gravity will be nearer the axles, making the turning over of the load more difficult. 2 Things needed first upon reaching camp must be placed on top or in rear. The following method of loading a wagon is in accordance with the general principles cited above: Ammunition. Ordinarily just back of the forward axle. In case of possible need, however, the ammunition should be placed where it could be gotten at immediately. Axes, Spades, Shovels and (Unhandled) Picks. Should be out- side of wagon-bed, in leather pockets or strong bags, or stood on end at rear of wagon. They should not be placed between the sides of the wagon and the load. Blanket Rolls. If to be carried on wagon, they should be rolled tightly and left straight — not tied in a circle — and loaded on top, crosswise. Buzzacott Oven. On back of wagon, resting on end on feed box and secured by rope or chain. Camp Kettles and Buckets. Under the wagon, suspended from the reach pole. Field Desk. To be placed on or near bottom and well forward, as it is seldom required early. Field Range. On bottom, at rear end of wagon. Forage. If to be carried on wagon, in front of ammunition. Lashing. Use two pieces of ^-inch rope about 75 feet long, passing over load first from front to rear diagonally, and finally se- cured by being tied to rings on the rear bolster standards — never to the end gate rods. The rope should be passed through strong hooks securely clinched to the body of the wagon, and not passed around the ends of the bows. Mess Tables (With folding legs). To be stood on end at rear end of wagon. Officers' Bedding-Rolls. To be on top of load. Rations. Surplus rations (not required for next camp) in bot- tom of wagon, between ammunition and ration box. FIELD SERVICE. 285 Bacon should be on the bottom of wagon, where the grease will do no harm. Ration Box. Next to field range, toward front of wagon. After the field range has been unloaded, the ration box is readily accessible and need not be unloaded. At every camp the ration box should be restocked for the next camp. Sibley Stoves. Slung on chain, just outside of feed box and below the Buzzacott oven. Stove Pipe. Should be crated and lashed on in rear of a wagon. Tentage. Should be rolled and not folded, except in places where absolutely necessary — and placed across wagon, on top of boxes, etc. ♦ (Attention is invited to the fact that canvas becomes unser- viceable more from handling and transportation than from wear when in actual use in sheltering troops). The tents, properly dried out, should be laid out smoothly on the ground; the part of the wall appearing uppermost should be folded over toward the peak of the tent; that underneath should be (by lifting the lower part of the tent) in like manner folded under and toward the peak; then by commencing at the peak, at the final folding, the wall of the tent will appear on the outside of the com- pleted roll. Ropes not required for securing the bundle should be folded inside. Tent Pins. On top, in sacks. Tent Poles. Should be tied with a rope and placed just inside the bows so as to extend above the wagon-bed side; or carried in two iron hooks suspended from side of wagon-bed, about four feet apart. NOTES / Pots and Kettles. Should be in gunny sacks so as not to dirty everything. 2 The Quartermaster-Sergeant should ride on one of the wagons. 3 A Noncommissioned Officer should personally superintend the loading of every wagon, the same noncommissioned officer always having charge of the same wagon. 286 CHAPTER XV. 4. The Jockey Box slionld be left entirely for use of teamster, and in which should be kept wrench, grease, spare bolts, mule shoes, etc. 5 A detail of men, the size of which depends upon the number of wagons, should accompany the train. Often the guard, or old guard performs this duty, but it is preferable to detail men who know how to meet emergencies such as a wagon tipping over on a hillside, wagons requiring repacking, mule down and hurt, etc. LOADING ANIMALS ON CARS 1 Except in hot weather, pack as many animals in the car as you can, as they will ride better than if loosely packed. If an animal happens to fall down in the car it will be almost impossible for it to get up, and the probabilities are it will be trampled to death. For this reason load sick or injured animals in cars by themselves, and build separate stalls for each animal, if practicable. Before loading examine each car carefully to see that the floor boards are not rotten or broken, that the sides are secure, and tliat there are no projecting nails or splinters. The car should be clean, and the floor covered with sand, sawdust or straw. Where cleats on the floor are not used it is advis- able to have toe calks on the animals' shoes. The man in charge should be provided with a candle, lantern, l)ucket, and a hatchet. Where the boards on sides of car are not close together, an animal is liable to get his lioof between the boards, and when other means fail to disengage it, a hatchet is useful in cutting away a part of the board. In loading animals use the railroad ]:)latform, or the loading ramp found at railroad stations, or make a ramp, well supported and with strong sides. Lead the animals b}^ halters and straps up the ramp and into the car, and take off the halter. The first animal should be led to one end of the car and the second to the other end, leaving the center of the car for the last animals loaded. Arrange the animals so that the nlternate ones shall face in the same direction. Do the loading quietly, and have the animals follow one another promptly, so as to avoid delay. In some cases it may be necessary to blindfold an animal before he can be led into the car. An obstinate (1) The articles Loading Aiiiiuals on Cars, Loading Ambulances on Cars, Load- ing Wagons on Cars, Parking Trains, Care of Animals, Wagons and Harness in the Field and List of Articles to be Carried on Each Wagon, are reprinted from the Manual of Instructions for Quartermasters Serving in the Field. FIELD SERVICE. 287 animal can be made to enter by Iiolding its head up, twisting its tail, and pushing it by main force into the car. Before loading see that the door on farther side of car is closed and fastened, and after loading is complete fasten the second door. Where cars contain hayracks and water troughs, see that they are in good condition, and fill racks before loading. Animals should be unloaded and exercised at least once in twenty-four hours. They should be watered and fed twice a day. LOADING AMBULANCES ON CARS Except for short journeys, ambulances should be knocked down before loading. Secure a flat car 36 feet long by about 9 feet wide. Take the beds off the running gears by unscrewing nuts from the bolts that hold the sills of the beds to the runi^ing gears. Also take off the rear steps. Six beds can now be placed on the car by taking the first bed and placing it in one corner of the car (its length parallel to the car), the side of the bed coming out to the stakes, or the places for stakes on the side of car. Place the second bed alongside of the first, allowing it to slip back two inches on account of the sills. Arrange the other four beds behind the first pair, well closed up: then put in stout stakes and cover ambulance tops with paulins or old canvas, as a protection to the tops from sparks. It is very im- portant that the nuts should be put back in their proper places. Secure the water tanks on ambulances, and place the running gears in a box car and number them corresponding to the ambulances, if the ambulances are of dilTerent makes. For short journeys, take off wheels and rear steps and unyoke axles from springs. For the axles substitute a piece of hard wood, which should not be longer than the width of ambulance. Crate wheels and put inside of ambulance, bracing same, so there will be no liability of injury to sides. LOADING WAGONS ON CARS Remove the beds from the running gears and take off the rear end gates. Get a 36-foot flat car, or even a longer one. Place the first bed in one corner of the car (its length parallel to the car), so that its side will come out to the stakes or places for stakes on side of car. Take the second bed, reverse it so that the front end shall be opposite rear end of first wagon, turn it bottom up, and place it partly 288 CHAPTER XV. inside and partly outside of the first bed, the inner sides being close together. This arrangement forms a box, with closed ends, which can be filled with parts of the body and running gear. Place the third and fourth boxes, similarly arranged, alongside of the first and second, and continue the same arrangement to the other end of the car. In this way, 12 beds can be put in first layer on car. Arrange the second, third, and fourth layers similarly, and secure the beds by stout stakes and wire. Forty-eight beds, with parts, can thus be shipped on one liat car, the running gears being placed in a box car. Put back all nuts in proper place. Wagons that have been used should never have the bodies knocked down and loaded in box cars, because in endeavoring to take off the nuts, which are sure to be rusted, the outside braces and inside straps are twisted and the bolt ends broken off, rendering the wagons unserviceable. By loading as above described, no damage is done the bed or running gear, and the wagons are easily set up when destination is reached. It is not necessary to number the beds, running gear, etc., except when wagons of different paterns are shipped. If tunnels are on the line of road, load only three layers, or 36 wagon beds on each car. If cars containing stock and wagons accompany the regiment and it is necessary to run the train in several sections, the cars of stock and wagons should be the first section, and should be accom- panied by a sufficient number of men, say one company, to unload and care for stock and wagons, so that when the rest of the regiment arrives there will be no delay in moving baggage to camp. LOADING PROPERTY IN CARS The general rule for loading property is to put in first such articles ™°E ■ < f |« <..;'r.>'f';'/ •.'•-•'-A-.»^- y:^y:^'::;>-;f^^/^ Figure 4 T-.:.:-- '■■r\f .:-'■■ •>■•■■'^ •'■..■•*•■,- !.•■' ; •. ■ • • -n •* .' .' ■ ■-■.'■■'> structed from the trench, sitting or kneeling (Figure 2), in twenty-five minutes. It permits fire sitting from A; kneeling or sitting from B. C is the communicating trench, and men standing or walking on C are protected. D would appear only in the converted trench, but it serves as a convenient place to lay haversacks, canteens, intrenching tools, extra ammunition, etc. RIFLE TRENCHES. 297 Figure 5 shows the trench illustrated in Figure 4 converted into an improved trench, which permits fire standing, sitting or kneeHng; and, inasmuch as men may fire standing at the same time that others fire kneeling, the intensity of the fire may be increased. Men fire +2. Figure 5 ^^^■^>';^r-j^ir;>> TH t.V ^ sitting or kneeling from A, and at the same time others may fire standing from B. C is the communicating trench, and men standing or walking therein are protected. Men sitting at B are protected, and B is the convenient height (eighteen inches) above C for that purpose. The methods of using the various trenches, as heretofore ex- plained, are illustrated in cuts F and G. A front view of these trenches. Cut F — A Prone Trench Partly Converted Into A Kneeling One 298 CHAPTER XVI. Cut G- — The Trench From The Rear. Men In Vartous Positions .^ Cut H — Front View Of An Occupied Trench showing men in act of firing, is exhibited in cut H. These trenches when covered with grass are invisible at a distance of less than one hundred yards. Location. There are two things to be considei'ed in locating trenches: {i) The tactical situation, and (2) the nature of the ground. The first consideration re(|uires that the trenches be so located as to give the greatest field of fire, and they are, therefore, usually located near the crest of hills — on the "military crest", which RIFLE TRENCHES. 299 is just in front of the natural crest. The construction of trenches along the "military crest" does not give any "dead space" — that is, any space to the front that can not he reached by the fire of the men in the trenches. With regard to their location, trenches should, if practicable, he so located as to avoid stony ground, because of the danger of fi3'ing fragments, should the parapet be struck b}^ an artillery projectile. Clearing the Ground. Time permitting, it is very important that the ground in front of the trenches should be cleared of brushwood, high grass and ever3'thing else that might screen the enemy. Concealment of Trenches. The location of the trenches should he di>gu-ised by covering the side toward the enemy with grass, branches, leaves, etc. Obstacles. It is sometimes desirable to place obstacles in front of trenches, so as to obstruct the advance of the enemy, break up his formation and detain him under the hre of the men in the trenches. About three hundred yards from the trenches is generally a convenient location for obstacles. Obstacles should be concealed from the view of the enemy, so that they may come upon them as a surprise. Care must be taken that the obstacles can not be easily removed and that they shall not afiford an}^ shelter to the enemy. A number of articles might be used as obstacles — for instance harrows, ploughs, rough wood in any form, such as roots and stumps. However, owing to the ease with which it can be constructed, abatis is the obstacle most commonl}^ used. Abatis consists of the branches of felled trees about 15 feet long, placed preferably in several rows, the branches of one row overlapping the butts of the next one in front, with the branches sharpened and interlaced and directed towards the enemy, with their butts secured to the ground by forks, wire or by logs laid over the butts. (An abatis should be at least 5 feet high). If the trees are too large, use their branches instead. Ab..\tis. 300 ■ CHAPTER XVII. CHAPTER XVII. CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED CARE OF THE HEALTH i 1 A soldier should endeavor to be always at his best.. He should avoid all exposures, not in line of duty, which he knows would be likely to injure his health, for if he is from any cause below par he is liable to break down under influences which otherwise might have had but little effect on him. 2 Even in garrison, in time of peace, soldiers often expose themselves unnecessarily by going out without overcoats when the weather is such as to require their use, or by failing to remove damp socks or other clothing on their return to barracks. 3 At rests on the march he should sit down or lie down if the ground is suitable, for every minute so spent refreshes more than five minutes standing or loitering about. 4 At the midday rest lunch should be eaten, but it should always be a light meal. 5 On the march or during exercise in hot weather the body loses water continuously by the skin and lungs and this loss must be re- placed as it occurs to keep the blood iii proper condition. Only a few swallows should be taken at a time, no matter how plentiful the water supply may be. When exceedingly thirsty after a long dr}' stretch, water should not be taken freely at once, but in smaller ! drinks at intervals, until the desire for more is removed. 6 Smoking in the heat of the day or on the march is depressing | and increases thirst. 7 On hot marches water should be taken quite frequently, but as already stated, in small quantities at a time, to replace the loss by perspiration. This will often prevent attacks of heat exhaus- tion and sunstroke. i 5 On a hurried or forced march, particularly in sultry weather, (l)From The Soldier's Handbook, by N. Ilerslilcr, Chief Clerk. General .Staff Corps, U. S. Army. UNIVEkSITY OF CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AH3 301 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. a soldier may become faint and giddy from the heat and fatigue. His face becomes pale, his lips lead-colored, his skin covered with clammy perspiration, and he trembles all over. His arms and equipments should be removed and his clothing loosened at the neck, while he is helped to the nearest shade to lie down, with his head low, until the ambulance train or wagons come up. ^Meanwhile, fan him, moisten his forehead and face with water and, if conscious, make him swallow a few sips from time to time. 9 If the soldier comes into camp much exhausted, a cup of hot coffee is the best restorative. When greatly fatigued it is dan- gerous to eat heartily. 10 When the tents have been arranged for the night and the duties of the day are practically over, the soldier should clean himself and his clothes as thoroughly as the means at hand will permit. No opportunity of taking a bath nor of washing socks and underclothing should be lost. In any event the feet should be bathed or mopped with a wet towel every evening to invigorate the skin. 11 In the continued absence of opportunity for bathing it is well to take an air bath and a moist or dry rub before getting into fresh underclothes and, in this case, the soiled clothes should be freely exposed to the sun and air when the blanket roll is unpacked. 12 By attention to cleanliness of the person and of the clothing, the discomforts of prickly heat, chafing, cracking, blistering, and other irritations of the skin will be avoided. If chafings do occur apply to the surgeon for a healing remedy, for, if neglected, they may fester and cause much trouble. 13 A hearty meal should be eaten when the day's work is over, but the soldier should eat slowly, chewing every mouthful into a smooth pulp before swallowing; and it is good when one can rest a while after this meal. Hard bread and beans when not thoroughl}' chewed give rise to diarrhoea, one of the most dangerous of camp diseases. Fresh meat should be eaten sparingly when used for the first time after some days on salt rations. 14 The -soldier would do well to restrict himself to the company dietary. Particularly should he avoid the articles of food or drink for sale by hawkers and peddlers. Green fruit and overripe fruit are dangerous, as is also fruit to which the individual is unaccustomed. 302 CHAPTER XVII. Unpeeled fruit should never be eaten, for it ma}^ have been handled by persons suffering from dangerous infectious diseases. 75 It should be unnecessary to speak of the danger from the use of intoxicating liquors for every soldier knows something of this. The mind of a man under the influence of these liquors is so befogged that he is unable to protect himself from accidents and exposures. How many men have passed from this world because of exposures during intoxication! How many have lost their health and strength and become wretched sufferers during the remainder of a shortened existence! Besides, for days after indulgence in liquor the system is broken down and the individual less able to stand the fatigues, ex- posures or wounds of the campaign. 16 If filtered or condensed water is not furnished to the troops, and spring water is not to be had, each soldier should fill his canteen over night with weak coffee or tea for the next day's march. This involves boiling, and the boiling destroys all dangerous substances in water. . Typhoid fever, cholera, and dj^sentery are caused by impure water. ly All the belongings of the soldier should be taken under shelter at night to protect them from rain or heavy dews. 18 When not prevented by the military conditions, soldiers should sleep in their shirts and drawers, removing their shoes, socks, and other clothing. ig In the morning wash the head, face and neck with cold water. With the hair kept closely cut, this can be done even when the water supply is limited. 20 In hot climates, where marches are made or other military work performed in the early morning or late in the evening, a sleep should be taken after the midday meal to make \x\) for the shortened rest at night. Everyone, to keep in good condition should have a total of eight hour's sleep in the twenty-four. 21 If the march is not to be resumed, the soldier should take the first opportunity of improving his sleeping accommodations by build- ing a bunk, raised a foot and a half, or more, from the ground. This is of the first importance when the ground is damp. The poncho, or slicker, must be relied upon as a protection in marching camps, but when the camp is to be occupied for some days, bunks should be built. CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 303 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. 22 In hot climates this raising of the bunks from the groimd lessens the danger from malarial fevers. 2S When malarial fevers are prevalent, hot coffee should be taken in the morning immediately after roll call, and men going on duty at night should have a lunch and coffee before starting. 24 The soldier should never attempt to dose himself with medicine. He should take no drugs except such as are prescribed by the surgeon. 25 No matter how short a time the camp is to be occupied its surface should not be defiled. The sinks should be used by every man, and the regulations concerning their use should be strictly com- plied with. Waste water and refuse of food should be deposited in pits or other receptacles designed to receive them. Attention to these points will prevent foul odors and flies. 26 When there are foul odors and flies in a camp the spread of typhoid fever, cholera, dysentery, and yellow fever is likel}^ to occur. 21 When any of these diseases are present in a command every care should be taken to have the hands freshly washed at meal times. 2S In the camps of held service the interior of tents should be sunned and aired daily, and efforts should be made by every soldier to have his bunk, arms, equipments, and clothing in as neat and clean condition as if he were in barracks at a permanent station. 2() Harmful exposures are more frequent in hot than in cold weather. Soldiers seek protection against cold, but in seeking shade, coolness, and fresh breezes in hot weather they often expose them- selves to danger from diarrhoea, dysentery, pneumonia, rheumatism, and other diseases. A chill is an exciting cause of these affections; it should be avoided as much as possible. JO When the feet become wet the first opportunity should be taken of putting on dry socks. J/ When the clothing becomes wet in crossing streams or in rain storms there is little danger so long as active exercise is kept up, but there is great danger if one rests in the wet clothing. $2 When the underclothes are wet with perspiration the danger is from chill after the exercise which caused the perspiration is ended. If the soldier can not give himself a towel rub and" a change 304 CHAPTER XVTT. of underclothing, he slidiild put on his blouse and move about until his skin and clothes become dry. 3S To rest or cool off, and particularly to fall asleep, in a cool, shady place in damp clothes is to invite suffering, perhaps permanent disability or death. 34 When an infectious disease is known to be present among the civil population in the neighborhood of a military camp or station, care should be taken by every member of the command to avoid exposure to the infection. Scarlet fever, measles, and diphtheria, are met with in the United States, but in some localities our troops may have to guard against smallpox, yellow fever, cholera, and bubonic plague. The careless or reckless individual will be the first to suffer, but he may not suffer alone; many of his comrades may become affected and die through his fault. S3 Such infections prevail mostl}^ among the lower classes of a community who have no knowledge of the difference between health- ful and unhealthful conditions of life. Communication with them should therefore be avoided. S6 The soldier should remember that association with lewd women may disable him for life. 3/ Every soldier should become familiar with the instructions in the "Outlines of Eirst Aid," so as to be able to help himself or others in the event of wounds or accidents. THE CARE OF THE FEET The feet should be kept clean and the nails cut close and square. An excellent preventative against sore feet is to wash them every night in hot (preferaably salt) water and then dry thoroughly. Rubbing the feet with hard soap, grease or oil of any kind be- fore starting on a march is also good. Sore or blistered feet should be rubbed with tallow from a lighted candle and a little common spirits (whiskey or alcohol in some other form) and the socks put on at once. Blisters should be perforated and the water let out, but the skin must not be removed. A little alum in warm water is excellent for tender feet. Two small squares of zinc oxide plaster, one on top of the other, will prevent the skin of an opened blister from being pulled off. CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST Air:> 305 TO THE SICK AND, INJURED. Under no circumstances, should a soldier ever start off on a march with a pair of -new shoes. FIRST AID TO THE SICK AND INJURED (D In operating upon a comrade, the main things are to keep cool, act promptly, and make him feel that you have no doubt that you can pull him through all right. Place him in a comfortable position, and expose the wound. If you cannot otherwise remove the clothing quickly and without hurting him, rip it up the seam. First stop the bleeding, if there is an}'; then cleanse the wound; then close it, if a cut or torn wound; then apply a sterilized dressing; then bandage it in place. As for the patient himself, let him never say die. Pluck has car- ried many a man triumphantly through what seemed the forlornest hope. Kit Carson once helped to amputate a comrade's limb when the only instruments available were a razor, a handsaw, and a kingbolt of a wagon. Not a man in the party knew how to take up an artery. Fine teeth were filed in the back of the saw, the iron was made white hot, the arm removed, the stump seared so as to close the blood vessels, and — the patient recovered. Charles F. Lummis, having fractured his right arm so badly that the bone protruded, and being alone in the desert, gave his canteen strap two flat turns about the wrist, buckled it around a cedar tree, mounted a near by rock, set his heels upon the edge, and threw him- self backward. He fainted; but the bone was set. Then having rigged splints to the injured member with his left hand and teeth, he walked fifty two miles without resting, before he could get food, and finished the 700-mile tramp to Los Angeles with the broken arm slung in a bandanna. Richardson tells of a Montana trapper who, having his leg shat- tered in an Indian fight, and finding that gangrene was setting in., whetted one edge of his big hunting knife, filed the other into a (1) Compiled from "The Book of Camping and Woodcraft," by Horace Kep- hart (The Outing Publishing Company, New York), from "The Complete Camper's Manual," (Gold Medal Camp Furniture Mfg. Co., Racine, Wis.); "Outlines of First Aid For the Hospital Corps, U. S. A., and "First Aid in Illness and Injury," by James E. Pilcher, Medical Corps, U. S. A., (Charles Scribner's Sons, New York.) 306 CHAPTER XVII. saw, and with his own hands cut the flesh, sawed the bone, and seared the arteries with a hot iron. He survived. Bite of Rabid Animal. The bite of a mad dog, wolf, skunk, or other animal subject to rabies, requires instant and heroic treat- ment. Immediately twist a tourniquet very tight above the wound, and then cut out the whole wound with a knife, or cauterize it to the bottom with a hot iron; then drink enough whiskey to counteract the shock. Bite of Snake. See^'Snake Bite." Bleeding, how checked. To stop the flow of blood temporarily raise the injured part as high as you can above the heart, and press very firmly with thumb or linger either on or into the wound. The patient can do this for himself, and can control the bleeding until his hand gives out. There is record of an Austrian soldier who stopped bleeding from the great artery of the thigh for four hours by plugging the wound with his thumb; if he had let go for a minute he would have bled to death. Observe 'whether the bleeding is arterial or venous. If it comes from a vein, the blood will be dark red or purplish, and will flow in a steady stream. Press upon the vein hcloiv the wound; then prepare a clean pad (compress) and bind it upon the wound firmly enough to stop the bleeding permanently, If an artery is cut, the blood will be bright red, and it will probably spurt in jets. Try to locate the artery above the wound (between it and the heart) by pressing very hard where you think the artery may pass close to a bone, and watch if this checks the flow. When you find the artery, then, if the wound be in leg, arm, head, or any other place where a tourniquet can be applied, proceed as follows: Tie a strong bandage (handkerchief, belt, suspender, rope, strip of clothing) around the wounded member, and between the wound and the heart. Under it, and directly over the artery, place a smooth pebble, a cartridge, piece of stick, or other hard lump. Then thrust a stout stick under the bandage, and twist until the wound stops bleeding. The lump serves two purposes: it brings the most pres- sure where it will do the most good, and it allows passage of enough blood on either side to keep the limb from being strangled to death. If the position of the artery above the wound cannot be deter- mined, then, in case of a gaping wound that would be hard to plug, CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 307 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. apply the tourniquet without any lump, and twist it very tight indeed. This can only be done for a short time, while you are preparing to ligate the artery; if prolonged, it will kill the liml). and gangrene will ensue. In case of a punctured wound, such as bullet hole, it is better to push a plug hard down in the wound itself, leaving the outer end projecting so that a bandage will hold the plug firmly on the artery. This must be done, anyway, wherever a tourniquet cannot be used. The above expedients are only temporary; for a cut artery, if of any considerable size, must be ligated — that is to say, permanently closed by tying one or both of the severed ends. To do this you must have at least a pair of sharp-pointed forceps or strong tweezers. Perhaps you may have to extemporize them — if you have no iron, make a little pair of tongs by heating the middle of a green hardwood stick, bending over, and then shaping and lire-hardening the ends. Get hold of the end of the artery with this, draw it out, and have some one hold it. Then take a piece of strong thread that has been steri- lized in boiling salt water, make a loop in it as for a common knot, but pass the right hand, end of the thread twice around the other, in- stead of once (surgeon's knot — it will never slip). Slip this loop down over the forceps and around the end of the artery, and draw tight. If the vessel bleeds from both ends, ligate both. Powdered alum, tamped hard into a wound will stop bleeding from all but a large artery. So will substances rich in tannin, such as powdered sumac leaves (dried over the fire, if green) and pul- verized oak or hemlock bark. Do not use cobwebs, nor the woolly inside of pufT balls — these old-fashioned styptics are likely to infect a wound with micro-organisms, and thus do more harm than good. If a finger or toe is cut ofif, as with an axe, clap it quickly into l)lace and bind it there; it may grow on again. Bruises. Ordinary bruises are best treated with cold, wet cloths. Raw, lean meat applied to the part will prevent discoloration. Severe bruises, which are likel}' to form absesses, should be covered with cloths wrung out in water as hot as can be borne, to be re- heated as it cools; afterwards with hot poultices. Burns. If clothing sticks to the burn, do not try to remove it. hut cut around it and Hood it with oil. Prick blisters at both ends with a perfectl}^ clean needle, and remove the water b}- gentle pres- 308 CHAPTER XVII. sure, being careful not to break the skin. A good application for a burn, including sun burn, is carron oil (equal parts linseed oil and limewater). Druggists supply an ointment known as "solidified carron oil" that is easier to carry. A three per cent, solution of carbolic acid, applied with absorbent cotton or a bandage, is an excellent ap- plication. Better still is the salve known as ungentine. Lacking these the next best thing is common baking soda. (Baking soda is the bicarbonate; washing soda, or plain soda, is the carbonate; do not confuse them). Dissolve in as little water as is required to take it up; saturate a cloth with this and apply. Another good application for burns is the scrapings of a raw potato, renewed when it feels hot. If you have none of these, use any kind of clean oil or unsalted grease, or dust flour over the burn, or use moist earth, preferably clay; then cover with cotton cloth. Do not remove the dead skin until new skin has formed underneath. Burning Clothing, particularly that of females, has been the un- necessary cause of many horrible deaths, either from ignorance of the proper means of extinguishing the flames, or from lack of pres- ence of mind to apply them. A person whose clothing is blazing should (1) immediately be made to lie down — be thrown if neces- sary. The tendency of flames is upward, and when the patient is lying down, they not only have less to feed upon, but the danger of their reaching the face, with the possibility of choking and of ultimate deformity, is greatly diminished. (2) The person should then be quickly wrapped up in a coat, shawl, rug, blanket or any similar article, preferably woolen, and never cotton, and the fire completely smothered by pressing and patting upon the burning points from the outside of the envelope. The flames having been controlled in this way, when the wrap is removed, great care should be taken to have the slightest sign of a blaze immediately and completely stifled. This is best done by pinching it, but water may be used. Any burns and any prostration or shock should be treated in the manner prescribed for them. It is always dangerous for a woman to attempt to smother the burning clothing of another, on account of the danger to her own clothing. If she attempts it, she should always carefully hold be- tween them the rug in which she is about to wrap the sufferer. Chigers. Apply sodium hyposulphate ("Hypo")- Bacon is also excellent. Choking. Foreign Body in the Throat. The common practice of CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 309 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. slapping the back often helps the act of coughing to dislodge chok- ing bodies in the pharynx or windpipe. When this does not succeed, the patient's mouth may be opened and two fingers passed back into the throat to grasp the object. If the effort to grasp the foreign body is not successful, the act will pro- duce vomiting, which may expel it. A wire, such as a hairpin, may be bent into a loop and passed into the pharynx to catch the foreign body and draw it out. The utmost precautions must be taken neither to harm the throat nor to lose the loop. In children, and even in adults, the expulsion of the body may be facilitated by lifting a patient up by the heels and slapping his back in this position. Summon a physician, taking care to send him information as to the character of the accident, so that he may bring with him the in- struments needed for removing the obstruction. Clothing, burning cf. See "Burning Clothing." Colds. Put on warm, dry clothing. Drink freely of hot ginger tea; cover well at night; give dose of quinine every six hours; loosen the bowels. Constipation. Give doses compound cathartic pills, eat freely of preser\cs: drink often. Convulsions. Give hot baths at once; rub well the lower parts of the body to stimulate; keep water as hot as possible without scald- ing, then dry and wrap up very warm. Cramps and Chills. Mix pepper and ginger in very hot water and drink. Give dose of cramp tablets. A hot stone makes a good foot warmer. Diarrhoea. Apply warm bandages to stomach; fire brown a little flour to which two teaspoonfuls of vinegar and one teaspoonful of salt are added; mix and drink. This is a cure, nine cases out of ten. A tablespoonful of warm vinegar and teaspoonful of salt will cure most severe cases. Don't eat fruit. A hot drink of ginger tea is good. Repeat every few hours the above. Dislocations. A dislocation of a finger can generally be re- duced by pulling strongly and at the same time pushiilg the tip of the finger backward. 310 CHAPTER XVII. If a shoulder is thrown o'ut of joint, have the man lie down, place a pad in his arm pit. remove your shoe, and seat yourself by his side, facing him; then put your foot in his armpit, grasp the dis- located arm in botli hands, and simultaneously push with your foot, pull on his arm, and swing the arm toward his body till a snap is heard or felt. For any other dislocation, if you can possibly get a surgeon, do not meddle with the joint, but surround it with flannel cloths, wrung out in hot water, and support with soft pads. Fainting. Lay the patient on his back, with feet higher than his head. Loosen tight clothing, and let him have plenty of fresh air. Sprinkle his face with cold water jind rub his arms with it. When consciousness returns, give him a stimulant. For an attack of dizziness bend the head down firml}^ between the knees. Drowning. The instructions issued by the IJ. S. Volunteer Life Saving Corps, are as follows: RESCUING. Approach the drowning man from behind, seizing him by the coat collar, or a woman by the back hair, and tow him at arms length to boat or shore. Do not let him cling around your neck or arms to endanger you. Duck him until unconscious if necessary to break dangerous hold upon you; but do not strike to stun him. RESUSCITATION. First: Immediately loosen the clothing about the neck and chest, exposing them to the wind, except in very severe weather, and get the water out of the body. First try tickling in the throat by a straw or feather, or ammonia to the nose; tr}^ a severe slap with the open hand upon the chest and soles of feet; if no immediate result proceed as follows: Second: Lay the body with its weight on the stomach, across any convenient object, a keg, box, boat, timber or your knee, in the open air, with the head hanging down. Open the mouth (|uickly drawing the tongue forward with handkerchief or cloth so as to let the water escape. Keep the mouth clear of liquid. Then roll the body gently from side to side so as to relieve the pressure on the stomach, then back to the stomach. Do this several times to force the water from the stomach and throat. Third: Laying the bod}^ on the back, make a roll of coat or any garment, place it under the shoulders of patient, allowing the head to fall back. Then kneel at the head of the patient. Grasp the arms at the middle of forearms, folded across the stomach, raise the arms CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 311 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. over the head to a perpendicular position, drawing them backwards straight, then forward overhead to the sides again, pressing the arms on the lower part of tlie ribs and sides, so as to produce a bellows movement upon the lungs. Do this sixteen or eighteen times a min- ute. Smelling salts, camphor or ammonia may be applied to the nostrils to excite breathing. But give no spirits internally until after breathing and circulation are restored. The clothing should be re- moved, the body dried, and the legs rubbed briskly upwards, from foot to knee, occasionally slapping the soles of the feet with the open hand. Fourth: On signs of life, or when breathing is restored, wrap in warm blanket or hot cloths. To encourage circulation, hot tea. brandy or anj^ spirits may be given in small doses, with care to avoid strangulation, and brisk rubbing and warmth applied to the entire body. Keep at work until recover}-, or death is pronounced certain by a physician. Persons have revived after two hours' steady work, but most cases revive within thirty minutes. Drunkenness. Cold water dashed in the face often proves a most satisfactory awakener. Cause vomiting by tickling the pharynx with a feather or some- thing of the kind; by administering a tablespoonful of salt or mustard in a cup of warm water. Aromatic spirits of ammonia is very effi- cient in sobering a drunken man — a teaspoonful in half a cup of water. A cup of hot coffee after vomiting will aid to settle the stomach and clear the mind. Lay the subject in a comfortable position, applying hot, dry formentations, if there is marked coldness. Ear, Foreign Body in. \\\ case of living insect, (a) hold a bright light to the ear. The fascination which a light has for insects will often cause them to leave the ear to go to the light. If this fails, {h) syringe the ear with warm salt and water, or (c) pour in warm oil from a teaspoon, and the intruder will generally be driven out. If the body be vegetable, or any substance liable to swell, do not syringe the ear, for the fluid will cause it to swell, and soften and render it much more difficult to extract. In a case of this kind, where a bean, a grain of corn, etc., has gotten into the ear, the body 312 CHAPTER XVII. may be jerked out by bending the head to the affected side and jump- ing repeatedly. If the. body is not liable to swell, syringing with tepid water will often wash it out. If these methods fail, consult a medical man. The presence of a foreign body in the ear will do no immediate harm, and it is quite possible to wait several days, if a surgeon cannot be gotten before. Earache. A piece of cotton sprinkled with pepper and moistened with oil or fat will give almost instant relief. Wash with hot water. Eyes, inflamed. Bind on hot tea leaves or raw fresh meat. Leave on over night. Wash well in morning with warm water. Eye, Foreign Body in. Close the eye for a few moments and al- low the tears to accumulate; upon opening it, the body may be washed out by them. Never rub the eye. If the body lies under the lower lid, make the patient look up, and at the same time press down upon the lid; the inner surface of the lid will be exposed, and the foreign body may be brushed off with the corner of a handkerchief. If the body lies under the upper lid, (i) grasp the lashes of the upper lid and pull it down over the lower, which should at the same time, with the other hand, be pushed up under the upper. Upon repeating this two or three times, the foreign body will often be brushed out on the lower lid. (2) If this fails, the upper lid should be turned up; make the patient shut his eye and look down; then with a pencil or some similar article press gently upon the lid at about its middle, and grasping the lashes with the other hand, turn the lid up over the pencil, when its inner surface will be seen, and the for- eign body may readily be brushed off. If the body is firmly imbedded in the surafce of the eye, a care- ful attempt may be made to lift it out with tlie point of a needle. If not at once successful, this should not be persisted in, as the sight may be injured by injudicious efforts. After the removal of a foreign body from the eye, a sensation as if of its presence often remains. People not infrequently complain of a foreign body when it has already been removed by natural means. Sometimes the body has excited a little irritation, which feels like a foreign body. If this sensation remains over night, the eye needs attention, and a surgeon should be consulted; for it should have ]>assed away if no irritating body is present. CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 313 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. After the removal of an irritating foreign body from the eye, some bland fltiid should be poured into it. Alilk, thin mucilage of gum arabic, sweet oil, or salad oil are excellent for this purpose. Famishing. Do not let a starved person eat much at a time. Prepare some broth, or a gruel of corn meal or oatmeal thoroughly cooked, and feed but a small spoonful, repeating at intervals of a few minutes. Give very little the first day, or there will be bloating and nausea. Fatigue, excessive. Take a stimulant or hot drink when you get to camp (but not until then), and immediately eat something. Then rest between blankets to avoid catching cold. Feet, sore and blistered. See "Care of Feet," page 304. Fevers. Give doses of quinine tablets; loosen bowels if neces- sar^s keep dry and warm. Freezing. Keep away from heat. To toast frost bitten fingers or toes before the fire would bring chilblains, and thawing out a badly frozen part would probably result in gangrene, making ampu- tation necessary. Rub the frozen part with snow, or with ice cold water, until the natural color of the skin is restored. Then treat as a burn. Chilblains should be rubbed with whiskey or alum water. Freezing to Death. At all hazards keep awake. Take a stick and beat each other unmercifully; to restore circulation to frozen limbs rub with snow; when roused again don't stop or fall asleep — it is certain death. Remember this and rouse yourself. Head, How to Keep Cool. By placing wet green leaves inside of hat. Insect Stings. Extract the sting, if left in the wound, and apply a solution of baking soda, or a slice of raw onion, or a paste of clay, mixed with saliva, or a moist quid of tobacco. Ammonia is the com- mon remedy, but oil of sassafras is better. A watch key or other small hollow tube pressed with force over the puncture and held there several minutes will expel a good deal of the poison. Ivy Poison. Relieved with solution of baking soda and water; use freely as a cooling wash. Keep the bowels open. 314 CHAPTER XVII. Lightning, Struck by. Dash cold water on body continually; if severe case, add salt to water; continue for hours if necessary. If possible submerge body in running water up to neck. Nose, Foreign Body in. Close the clear side of the nose by pressure with a finger, and make the patient blow the nose hard. This will usually dislodge the object. If this fails, induce sneezing either by tickling the nose with a feather or something of the kind, or by administering snuff. The nasal douche, where a syringe or a long rubber tube suit- able for a siphon is available, may be used in case the body is not liable to swell, injecting luke warm water into the clear nostril with the expectation that it will push the body out of the other. If these fail, and the body can be seen clearly, an effort may be made to fish it out by passing a piece of wire, bent into a little hook, back into the nostril close to the wall, and catching the body with it. A hairpin may be bent straight and the hook formed at one end. Do not continue these manoeuvers very long nor let them be rough in the slightest degree. All simple eft'orts having failed, send for a physician. There is no danger in leaving the foreign body in place for some days if it is impossible to consult a physician in less time. Nosebleed is sometimes uncontrollable by ordinary means. Try lifting the arms above the head and snuffing up alum water or salt water. If this fails, make a plug by rolling up part of a half inch strip of cloth, leaving one end dangling. Push this plug as far up the nose as it will go, pack the rest of the strip tightly into the nostril, and let the end protude. If there is leakage backward into the mouth, pack the lower part of plug more tightly. Leave the plug in place several hours; then loosen wnth Avarm water or oil, and remove very gently. Ointment for Bruises, Etc. Wash with hot water; then anoint with tallow or candle grease. Piles. Men with piles should take special pains to keep their bowels open and to bathe the parts with cold water. Poisons. In all cases of poisoning there should be no avoid- able delay in summoning a physician. The most important thing is that the stomacli should be emptied at once. If the patient is able to swallow this may be accomplished by emetics, such as mustard and water, a teaspoonful of mustard to a glass of water, salt and CARE OF THE HEALTH ANT) FIRST AID 315 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. water, powdered ipecac and copious draughts of hike warm water. Vomiting may also be induced by tickling the back of the throat with a feather. When the patient begins to vomit, care should be taken to support the head in order that the vomited matter may be ejected at once, and not swallowed again or drawn into the wind pipe. Poultices. Poultices may be needed not only for bruises but for felons, boils, carbunkles, etc. They are easily made from corn meal or oat meal. Mix by adding a little at a time to boiling water and stirring to a thick paste; then spread on cloth. Renew from time to time as it cools. To prevent a poultice from sticking, cover the under surface with clean mosquito netting, or smear the bruise with oil. It is a good idea to dust some charcoal over a sore before putting the poultice on. The woods themselves afford plenty of materials for good poultices. Chief of these is slippery elm, the mucilaginous innerbark of which, boiled in water and kneaded into a poultice, is soothing to inflamma- tion and softens the tissues. Good poultices can also be made from the soft rind of tamarack, the rootbark of basswood or cottonwood, and many other trees or plants. Our frontiersmen, like the Indians, often treated wounds by merely applying the chewed fresh leaves of alder, striped maple (moosewood) or sassafras. Salves. Balsam obtained by pricking the little blisters on the bark of balsam firs is a good application for a wound; so is the honey like gum of the liquidambar or sweet gum tree, raw turpen- tine from any pine tree, and the resin procured by "boxing" (gashing) a cypress or hemlock tree, or by boiling a knot of the wood and skimming off the surface. All of these resins are antiseptics and soothing to a wound. Scalds. Relieve instantly with common baking soda and soaking wet rags — dredge the soda on thick and wrap wet clothes thereon. To dredge with flour is good also. Shock. In case of collapse following an accident, operation, fright: treat first as for fainting. Then rub the limbs with flannel, stroking the extremities toward the heart. Apply hot plates, stones, or bottles of hot water, wrapped in towels, to the extremities and over the stomach. Then give hot tea or coffee, or if there is no bleeding, a tablespoonful of whiskey and hot water, repeating three or four times an hour. 316 CHAPTER XVII. Skin, protection of, in cold weather. Smear the face, ears and hands with oil or grease. The e3^es may be protected from the re- flection of the sun on snow by blackening the nose and cheeks. Snake Bite. When a man is bitten he should instantly twist a tourniquet very tightl}^ between the wound and the heart, to keep the poison, as far as possible, from entering the system. Then cut the wound wide open, so it may bleed freely, and suck the wound, if practicable (the poison is harmless if swallowed, but not if it gets into the circulation through an abrasion in the mouth or through a hollow tooth.) Loosen the ligature before long to admit fresh blood to the injured part, but tighten it again very soon, and repeat , this alternate tightening and loosening for a considerable time. The object is to admit only a little of the poison at a time into the general circulation. Meantime drink whiskey in moderate doses, but at fre- quent intervals. If a great quantity is guzzled all at once it will do more harm than good. Whiskey is not an antidote; it has no efifect at all on the venom; its service is simply as a stimulant for the heart and lungs, thus helping the system to throw off the poison, and as a bracer to the victim's nerves, helping him over the crisis. Snow or Sun Blindness. Smear the nose and face about the eyes with charcoal. Sore Throat. Fat bacon or pork tied on with a dry stocking; keep on until soreness is gone then remove fat and keep covering on a day longer. Tincture of Iron diluted; swab the throat. Gargling with salt ar.d hot water is effective. Listerine, used as a gargle, is also good. Sprains. The regular medical treatment is to plunge a sprained ankle, wrist or finger, into water as hot as can be borne at the start, and to raise the heat gradually thereafter to the limit of endurance. Continue for half an hour, then put the joint in a hot, wet bandage, re- heat from time to time, and support the limb in an elevated position, the leg being stretched as high as the hip, or the arm carried in a sling. In a day or two begin gently moving and kneading the joint, and rub with liniment, oil, or vaselin. Spriiins may also be treated by the application of cold water and cloths. As a soothing application for sprains, bruises, etc., the virtues of witch hazel are well known. A decoction (strong tea) of the bark is easily m.-ide, or a ])r)ultice can ho made fr^m it. The iimcr i)ark CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 317 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. of kinnikinick, otherwise known as red willow or. silky cornel, makes an excellent astringent poultice for sprains. The pain and inflamma- tion of a sprained ankle are much relieved by dipping tobacco leaves in water and binding them around the injured part. Stings cf Insects. See "Insect Stings." Stunning. Concussion of the brain: lay the man on his back, with head somewhat raised. Apply heat as for shock, but keep the head cool with wet cloths. Do not give any stimulant — that would drive blood to the brain, where it is not w^anted. Sunstroke. Lay the patient in a cool ])lace, position same as for stunning. If the skin is hot, remove clothing, or at least loosen it. Hold a vessel or hat full of cold water four or five feet above him and pour a stream first on his head, then on his body, and last on his extremities. Continue until consciousness returns. Renew if symp- toms recur. If the skin is cool (a bad sign) apply warmth, and give stimu- lating drinks. Thirst. Allow the sufferer only a spoonful of water at a time, but at frequent intervals. Bathe him if possible. To quench thirst. Don't drink too often, better rinse out the mouth often, taking a swallow or two only. A pebble or button kept in the mouth will help quench that dry and parched tongue. Toothache. Warm vinegar and salt. Hold in mouth around tooth until pain ceases, or plug cavity with cotton mixed with pepper and ginger. Wounds. When a ball enters or goes through the muscles or soft parts of the body alone, generally nothing need be done except to protect the wound or wounds with the contents of the first aid packet. The directions for the use of this packet are simple, and each packet contains them. In doing this always be careful of one thing — not to touch the wound with your fingers nor handle it in any w^ay, for the dirt on your hands is harmful, and you must dis- turb a wound as little as possible. Be content to open the packet carefully, and, placing the small pads or compresses upon the wound or wounds, to wrap the binder or narrow bandage firmly about the parts, fastening with a safety pin. This will hold the pads in place and will help to stop the ordinary bleeding. The large or triangular 318 CHAPTER XVII. bandage should be bound over this or used as a sling if required. Generally this is all that is necessary for the first treatment, and some- times it is all that is needed for several daj^s. The importance of the; care with which this first dressing is made can not be too seriously insisted upon. It is better to leave a wound undressed than to dress it carelessly or ignorantly, so that the dressing must soon be removed. The follozciiig should alzvays be reincmhcrcd: I. Never touch a wound with anything unclean — dirty fingers, non-disinfected bandages, dirty water, etc. It may cause inflamma- tion, ulceration, or blood poisoning. 2 Expose the wound by removing the covering article of dress, which contains many impurities. Unbutton or cut clothes and examine extent of bleeding. Open all articles of clothing which might hin- der circulation of blood or breathing (collar, necktie, belt). To avoid pain and bleeding, rais^ legs by putting under them a valise, saddle, truss of straw, etc.; slight bleeding will often cease in this position of its own accord, without any bandaging. A bandage is advisable to protect the wound from dirt, flies or cold. USE THE FIRST AID PACKET. Cleansing. After stopping the flow of blood, cleanse the wound of and foreign substance that may have entered it. To remove a splinter, slip the point of a small knife blade under the protruding end and catch it with the thumb nail. A fish hook imbedded in the flesh should be pushed on through; then nip or file ofif the bdrb, and withdraw. If a bullet is deeply imbedded, let it alone; the chances are that it will do no harm. After picking out dirt, bits of cloth, or other matter that would make the wound sore and slow to heal, wash the injured part with perfectly clean water. If there be any doubt about the w-ater, boil it. Do not mop the wound with a rag. Hold the water a few inches above it and let a small stream gently trickle down upon it. A clean cut needs no washing; simply draw the edges together and fasten them in place. Whenever it can be done, shave the skin for some distance around the wound. Hairs, no matter how small, are grease coated and favor the growth of germs. Shaving also scrapes off the surface dirt and dead scales of skin. Closing. Never cover a wound with court plaster. It prevents the free escape of supperation, inflames the part, and makes the place CARE OF THE HEALTH AND FIRST AID 319 TO THE SICK AND INJURED. difficult to cleanse thereafter. The only legitimate uses for sticking plaster are to hold dressings in place where bandaging is difficult (as on the buttock), or, in case of a cut to keep the edges closed witli- out sewing the skin. In the latter case the cut may be crossed with narrow strips of plaster, leaving spaces between; but a better way, if you hav^e regular surgeon's plaster, is as follows: Lay a broad strip on each side of the cut half an inch apart, and extending beyond the wound at each end. Stick these strips firmly in place, except about a quarter of an inch of the inner margins, which are left loose for the present. With needle and thread lace the strips (deep stitches, so they'll not pull out) so as to draw the edges of the wound together, and then stick the inner margins down, noi; covering the wound. Sewing a wound should be avoided by inexperienced persons, unless it is really necessary, as in the case of a foot almost severed by an axe cut. If an ordinary needle and thread must be used, sterilize them by soaking in a boiling solution of salt and water. (It is here assumed that no better antiseptic agents are available. Sugar and water, or vinegar will do in a pinch.) Do not sew continuously over and over, but make a deep stitch and snip off the thread, leaving enough at each end to tie with by and by. Repeat this at proper intervals, until enough stitches have been taken; then, go back and tie them, one after another, with surgeon's knot. Such sewing is easy to remove when the proper time comes, sa}' within about six days. Dressing. An inflammation of wounds, suf)puration, and blood poisoning, are due to living germs, and to nothing else. These germs are not born in the wound, but enter from the outside. We may as well say that they are present everywhere. To prevent their entrance is much easier than to kill them once they have gaind foothold. The only guarantee of a wound healing nicely is to make it antiseptic — that is to say, surgically clean. That means sterilizing everything used about the wound (by heat, if you have no antiseptics), not trust- ing that anything is germ free because it looks clean. The micro- organisms that cause inflammation of a wound, fever, putrefaction, cannot be seen with the eye, and they may lurk anywhere. Do not use a mere bandage directly on an open wound. First, cover the injury with a compress (soft pad, made by folding a strip of cloth in several layers); then bandage. Unless you have a first aid packet, or are otherwise provided with stirilized dressings or 320 CHAPTER XVII. *. antiseptics, hold the material of the compress over a clear fire until it is fairly scorched; then let it cool. A little charring of the surface will do no harm; in fact charcoal is itself a good application to the surface of a wound. Of course the compress is to be renewed every time the wound is dressed. NOTE. The only way to learn how to use bandages, slings and splints; how to make tourniquets, and how to handle fractures, is to have someone who thoroughly understands these things show you in per- son how to do them and then for you to do them yourself. It is, therefore, suggested that such instruction be received from some non- commissioned officer of the Hospital Corps. USE, DESCRIPTIOX AND MANAGEMENT OF 321 THE RIFLE CHAPTER XVIII. THE USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF THE RIFLE. The soldier should know his rifle as he knows his best friend, and should thoroughly understand its peculiarities, if it has any. The man who can not shoot reduces materially his value as a soldier. Every soldier should, by care, practice and effort, make of himself the best shot he is capable of becoming. Every noncommissioned officer should study carefully the principles laid down in the Small Arms Firing Regulations. To those who would like to specialize along those lines, the author would recommend "Mod- ern Rifle Shooting in Peace, War and Sport," by Tippins (Published by J. S. Phillips, 121 Fleet St., E. C. London). "Our Military Rifle and How To Use It," by Bowman (Pablished by ARMS & THE MAN, Washington, D. C.) and "Suggestions To Military Riflemen" (Published by the Franklin Hudson Pub. Co., Kansas City, Mo.) contain information of value to any man wishing to improve his shooting. DESCRIPTION AND NOMENCLATURE OF THE RIFLE.d) The Receiver, Fig. i, top view, Fig. 2, right side view, and Fig. 3, front end view, has the hole. A, called the zvell, which receives the bolt ; the magazine opening, B ; the channel, C, for the top locking lug; the cut off seat, D; the cut-off tltunib piece recess, E; ejector pin hole, F; clip slots, G; cocking piece groove, H; sear nose slot, I : extracting (1 ) The text and illustrations of the rest of this chapter are from the Ord- nance Department pamphlet on the subject. 322 CHAPTER XVIII. cam, J; sear joint pin hole, K; gas escape hole, L; recoil lug, M, in which is the hole for the front guard screw; the recesses for the holt locking lugs, N N; the locking cams, O O; the locking shoulders, P P; the safety shoulder, Q ; and the cartridge ramp, R. Fig. 3. The BoLTj Fig. 4, top view, Fig. 5, rear view, and Fig. 6, front view, has M ^^^^ the handle, A ; the locking lugs, B, B. which sustain the shock of the discharge, the one on top beini^ slotted to allow the passage of the point of the ejector; the safety lug, C, which comes into play only in the event of the locking lugs yielding under powder pressure; the extractor collar groove, D; extracting cam, E; sleeve clearance, F; safety lock spindle notch, G; sleeve lock notch, H; firing pin hole, I; cocking cam, J; cock notch, K; extractor tongue groove, L; the rim, M. Fig. 6. Fig. 5. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 323 THE RIFLE The Sleeve Lock, Fig. 7, left end view, and Fig. 8, under side view, has the spindle, A, which is bored out to receive the sleeve lock Fig. 8. Fig. 9. Fig. 7. spring; the latch, B; and the sleeve lock pin groove, C. It is designed to prevent accidental turning of the sleeve when the bolt is drawn back. The Sleeve Lock Spring and Pin are shown in Fig. 9. The Firing Pin, Fig. 10, consists of the firing pin rod, A, and the cocking piece, B, which are made separately, the former being screwed mmM into the latter and riveted in assembling; the length of the rod is so adjusted that when the front end of the cocking piece bears against the interior shoulder of the sleeve the striker point will project the proper distance beyond the face of the bolt. Other parts are the knob, C; lug, D; cocking cam, E; nose, F; sear notch, G; locking shoulder, H; locking groove, I ; neck, J ; and head, K. The Firing Pin Sleeve, Fig. 11, sectional view, fits over the front end of the firing pin and the rear end of the striker, covering the joint hole. ■ Fig. 11 Fig. 12. and preventing accidental separation of the firing pin and striker; its rear end forms the front bearing for the mainspring. u The Striker, Fig. 12, has the point. A; the body, B; the shoulder, C; and the joint hole, D, by which it is secured to the firing pm. The annular grooves on the striker retain the lubricating oil and prevent the accumulation of rust thereon. 324 CHAPTER XVIII. The Mainspring is shown in Fig. 13. Fig. 13. The Extractor, Fig. 14, inside view, Fig. 15, top view, and Fig. 16, front end view, has the hook, A, by which the cartridge case is ex- tracted from the chamber, the tongue, B, which rides in its groove at the Fig. 14. Fig. 18'. front end of the bolt ; the lug, C C, which is undercut to receive ihe ears on the lugs of vhe extractor collar; the gas escape hole, D; and the hack rest, E, which is curved to fit the circle of the bolt. The Extractor Collar, Fig. 17, end view, and Fig. 18, side view, has the ears, A A, which fit in the undercuts on the inside of the extractor. by which means and with the assistance of the extractor tongue and groove the extractor is held in place. The col- lar is bent into position on the bolt in manu- facture, and should not be removed unless proper tools are at hand to replace it. The Ejector, Fig. 19, has the point. A; the lieel, B ; and the ejector pin hole, C. It is hinged on the ejector pin in its recess in the left side of the receiver, ejection being accomplished by the slotted lug on the bolt coming in contact with the heel when the bolt is drawn to the rear. The head of the Ejector Pin, Fig. 20, is slotted for the purpose of providing sufficient tension to hold the pin in its place during the process of assembling. Fig. 19. Fig. 20. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 2>2S THE RIFLE Fig. 22. The Safety Lock, Fig. 21, rear and side views, consists of the thumb piece, A, the spindle, B, spring, C, and spring spindle, D, assembled in manitfacture. It has the cam, E ; the locking groove, F; the cocking hiece groove, G ; the spring spindle hole, H; and the bolt clearance, I. The spring and spring spindle are shown in Fig. 22; the latter, projecting in- to its groove in the sleeve, under the action of the spring, prevents any movement of the safety lock to the rear, and when in the recesses in the groove, retains the safety lock turned either to the right or left or in the vertical position for dismount- ing bolt mechanism. The words "Safe" and "Ready" impressed on oppo- site sides of the thumb piece indicate that the firing mechanism is locked or ready for firing. The Guard, of which the body of the magazine forms a part, is shown in Fig. 23, top view, and Fig. 24, right side view. Its parts are : Fie. 23. guard hozv. A; front tang, B; rear tang, C; front guard scrczc stud, D; magazine zcalls, E; rear end of magazine, F; floor plate catch pin hole, G; front guard screw hole, H; rear 326 CHAPTER XVIII. guard screw hole, I; trigger slot, J; floor plate hig slot, K; floor catch spring hole, L; floor plate catch slot, M; ramp, N; and the lightening cuts, O. The Floor Plate, Fig. 25, inside view, and Fig. 26, sectional view, has the tenon, A, which fits into a groove at the front end of the maga- zine and with 1he assistance of the floor plate catch retains the floor Fig;. 25. Fig. 30. (T F plate securely in its place at the bottom of the magazine ; the lug, B, which is slotted to receive the floor plate catch and has a tenon on its front end which fits into a slot in the magazine ; the cavity, C, through which the 'floor plate catch is released by means of the end of a bullet; the magazine spring recess, D, and the magazine spring seat, E. The Floor Plate Catch, Fig. 27, hinges on Fia-. ^7. the Floor Plate Catch Pin, Fig. 28, and is operated by the Floor Plate Catch Fig. 28. Fig. 29. Spring, Fig. 29. Its function is to retain the floor plate in its scat. The Magazine Spring is shown in Fig. 30; the smaller end slides into the undercuts on the follower, and the larger end fits in the same wav into the undercuts in the floor plate. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 327 THE RIFLE The Follower, Fig. 31, top view, and Fig. 32, right side view, has the rib, A, which serves to locate the cartridges in the magazine and guides the last cartridge into the chamber; the front stop for the magazine spring. Fig. 31. Fig. i2. X D B; the rear stop for magazine spring, C, and the lugs, D, in which are the undercuts for the magazine spring. The Cut-off, Fig. ZZ, side view, Fig. 34, rear view, and Fig. 35, outer edge, has the thumb piece, A; body, B; magazine fire groove, C; dis- mounting groove, D; cut-off spindle hole, E; cut-off spring spindle hole, F; cut-off spindle screw hole, G, and the serrature, H. The words on opposite sides of the thumb piece indicate to the firer whether the magazine is When the cut-off Fig. 33. Fig. 34. Fig. 35. -on or -'off." thumb piece is turned down, indicat- ing "off," and the bolt is drawn to the rear, the rear end of the slotted locking lug stops against the project- ing front end of the cut-off body. The piece is then ready for single loading. When the cut-off thumb piece is turned up, indicating "on," and the bolt is drawn to the rear, tke rear end of the slotted locking lug stops against the shoulder at the rear end of the magazine fire groove. The piece is then ready for loading from the magazine. When the cut-off thumb piece is in the intermediate position, the dismounting groove, D, permits the bolt to be drawn entirely out of the receiver. The CuT-OFF Spindle, Fig. 36, has the cut-off spindle screw groove, A, and the dismounting groove, B. 328 CHAPTER XVI 11. The Cut-off Spindle Screw, Fig. 37, goes through the cut-off from the outer edge of the thumb piece, its end fitting into the groove in the cut-off spindle. Fig. 36. Fig. i7. Fig. 38. Fig. 39. The Cut-off Spring, Fig. 38, and its Spindle, Fig. 39, retain the cut-off in its seat in the receiver with the thumb piece turned up for loading from the magazine, down for single loading, or in the inter- mediate position for permitting the removal of the bolt. The spindle head works in a groove in left side of receiver, having three small notches corresponding to the above positions of the cut-off. The Trigger, Fig. 40, right side view, is hinged in its slot in the sear by the Trigger Pin, Fig. 41. It has the finger piece, A ; the bearing, B ; trigger pin hole, C; heel, D ; and the stop, E. The Front Sight, Fig. 42, is secured in its Fig. 44. Fig. 42. Fig. 43. Fig. 45. slot in the front sight movable stud by the Front Sight Pin, Fig. 43 ; the pin is tapering, and its small end is driven in from the right and the ends upset to prevent accidental removal. The Front Sight Fixed Stud and Front "Sight Movable Stud, with Front Sight in place, are shown assembled. Fig. 44, right side view, and Fig. 45, front view. Tbc Front Sight Fixed Stud, A, has a slot, B, USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF THE RIFLE 329 Fig. 46. which, bearing on a lug on the upper side of the barrel, prevents lateral dis- placement of the stud ; and hole, C, for the Front Sight Stud Pin, which prevents longitudinal displacement of the stud. The Front Sight Mov- able Stud, D, has the front sight pin hole, E. It is held by the undercut slot in the front sight stud and secured from lateral displacement by the Front Sight Screw, F. The recess for this screw is not drilled in the movable stud until the rifle has been targeted and the correct position of the movable stud determined. The rear face, G, of both the front sight fixed stud and front sight movable stud is serrated to prevent any reflection of light from this surface interfering with the aiming. The Rear Sight Fixed Base, Fig. 46, rear end view, and Fig. 47, right side view, has the holes, A and B, for the base pin and base spline, respectively, b y Fig. 47. which it is firmly secured to the barrel and lateral and longitudinal movement pre- vented ; the under- cut, D, for the tenon of the hand guard; the lighten- nig cuts, E; the barrel hole, F; the pivot lug, G, for the movable base; the undercut, H, for the lip on the rear end of the movable base ; the undercut, I, for the windage screw and the lip on the front end of the movable base; the lug, J, on the top of which are two zero marks for the wind guage graduations ; and the chamfer, K, the seat for the windage screw collar. This chamfer is carried to the rear to permit of the assembling of the fixed base and the windage screw. On the left side of the front lug the chamfer corresponding to K is merely a conical recess for the head of the windage screw. The Base Spline locates and prevents the base from turning on the barrel. 330 CHAPTER XVIIL The Base Pin, similar to the base spline, prevents longitudinal move- ment of the base on the barrel. The Movable Base, Fig. 48, top view, and Fig. 4g, right side view, has the ears, A, in which are the holes, B, for the joint pin, which serves Fig. 48. Fig. 49. spring seat, F, which is undercut to admit the lip on the front end of the base spring, the lip, G, in which is a worm gear for the engagement of the windage screw; the piz'ot hole, H, for the pivot lug on the fixed base ; and the shoulders, I, on which the front end of the leaf rests when down. The liole, K, is made for convenience in manufacture. The Leaf, Fig. 50, top view (when down), and Fig. 51, right side view, has the joint. A, in which is the joint pin hole; the rib, B; the undercut, C, for the drift slide and the sighting notch, D. The free end of the base spring bears against the lower end of the leaf and Fig. 52. maintains it in either its lowered D or raised position. The leaf is graduated from 100 to 2,850 yards. The lines extending across one or both branches of the leaf are 100-yard divisions, the longer of the short lines are 50-yard and the shorter lines 25-yard divisions. Fig. 50. — 1 27 ?e -C 25 24 ~~ -^ 23 21 — — [21 20 — 19 18 :=- — 17 16 =- -£ 15 14 — _ -^ 13 12 ^— ~ II 10 9 a 7 5 3 1 i as a hinge for the leaf ; the wind guage graduations, C, each point of which cor- responds to a lateral deviation of four in- ches for each 100 yards; the lip, D, which fits in the un- dercut in the rear end of the fixed base ; the spring open i n g, E ; the Fig. 51. >B Fig. 53. Fig. 54. The Drift Slide, Fig. 52, top view (leaf down) has the peephole, A ; the field view, B ; the drift slide pin, C, riveted to the slide in manufacture; and the peep notches, D. The lines on either side of the peephole and lower peep notch enable the drift slide to 1)6 accurately set at any desired graduation on the leaf. As the slide is moved up or down on the leaf the drift slide moves with it and at the same time has a lateral movement in the undercut between the branches of the leaf, thus automatically correcting for drift. This mxovement corrects for all drift up to 600 yards, but for only part of the drift beyond that range. With the leaf up, ranges from 100 to 2,350 yards can be obtained through the peephole; from 100 to 2,450 yards through the lower peep notch at the bottom of field view; and from 1,400 to 2,750 yards through the upper peep notch in the upper edge of the drift slide. The 2,850-yard range is obtained through the sighting notch in the upper end of the leaf. With the leaf down and using the open notch in slide cap the sights are set for 530 j'^ards or battle line firing for the down position of the slide. The Stock is shown in Fig. 53, top view, 'and 54, right side view. The parts are the hntt, A ; small, B; magazine well, C; barrel bed, D; air chamber, E, which reduces the charring effect of a heated barrel on the stock; small butt plate screw hole and scat for the butt plate tang, F; butt szvivel plate seat, G; mortise for receiver tang lug and hole for rear guard screw, H; mortise for scar and slot for trigger, l;cut-off thumb-piece recess, J: mortise for recoil on re- ceiver, K; bed for fixed base, L; grasp- ing grooves, N ; shoulder for lower band, O; bed for band spring, P; shoulder for upper band, Q ; channels for decreasing zveight, R; upper band 332 CHAPTER XVIII. screw hole, S ; and the stock screw hole, T. The large hole in the butt is for decreasing weight, and the smaller one is a pocket for the combination oiler and thong case. The initials of the inspector and the year of fabrication are stamped on the left side in the rear of the cut-off thumb piece recess. The Hand Guard, Fig. 55, right side, and Fig. 56, bottom or inner Fig. 55. Fig. 56. Fig. 57. surface, has the szvell, A, for the protection of the rear sight; the shoulder, B, for the lower band; the shoulder, C, for the upper hand; the rear tenon, D, which enters the undercut in the fixed base; the front tenon, E, which enters the undercut in the upper band ; the clear- ance F, for the zvindage screzv knob; air chamber, H, and recess, I, for the Hand Guard Clips which are shown in Fig. 57. The hole shown in the cut near the rear end of the inner surface is made for convenience in manufacture. The Butt Plate is represented in Fig. 58. The parts are toe, A; tang, B; cap hole, C; cap ears, I), through which are the cap pin holes; Fig. 58. Fig. 59. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 333 THE RIFLE spring lug, E; large butt plate screw hole, F; and small butt plate screw hole, G. A notch is cut into the edge of the cap hole to facilitate the opening of the cap. For this purpose the flange of the head of a car- tridge case can be used. The Butt Plate Cap, Fig. 60, has the cap pin hole, A, and the thumb notch, B. The cap is hinged between the ears of the butt plate on the cap pin and is retained either closed or open by the free end of the Cap Spring, Fig. 59, which bears on the heel, C. The Butt Swivel in- cludes the plate, swivel, and pin assembled. The Butt Swivel Plate, Fig.6i, has the holes. A, for the swivel plate screws; B for the swivel, and C for the swJvel pin. Fig. 60. Fig, 61. Fig. 62 The Butt Swivel, Fig. 62, is retained in the plate by the Butt Swivel Pin, Fig. 63a. The Upper Band, Fig. 63, has the bayonet lug, A ; the ears, B, in which are the holes for the stacking swivel screw; the upper band screw hole, C, and the undercut. D, for the front tenon on the hand guard. 334 CHAPTER XVIII. The Stacking Swivel, Fig. 64, is hinged by the lug, A, between the ears, B, of the upper band, on the Stacking Swivel Screw, Fiff. 64. Fig. 65. The L w ER Band Swivel, Fig. 65, is hinged by its lug. A, between the ears of the lower band, on the Lower Band Swivel Screw. The Lower Band, Fig. 66, has the ears, A, and the swivel screwholes, B ; the front or upper end is designated by the letter U. The lower band and swivel are split between the ears in order to give better adjustment to the stock and hand guard and permit removal ot the band without marring the stock. Fig. 66. The Lower Band Spring, Fig. 67, has the notch, A, which holds the band in place, and the spindle, B, which re- tains the spring in the stock. The Bayonet, Model of 1905, is shown in Fig. 68, right side view, with guard and tang, cross-sectioned, and right grip removed, and in Fig. 69, upper or back view, with blade cut off a short distance from the guard. The blade. A, the tang, B, and the pommel, C, are forged in one piece; the Fig. 67. lllllllllllllliriM juau iftj A A front or lower edge is sharp along its entire length and the back for a distance of 5 inches from the point. Immediately in the rear of the guard, D, the tank swells and is recessed to receive the scabbard catch, E, and the bayonet B Fig. 68. Spring, F. The swell in the tang also serves as a seat for the guard which is riveted to the blade in manufacture. The opening in the tang and pommel for the bayonet catch, H, connects with the recess in the swell of the tang and allows the front end of the bayonet catch to enter its seat in the scabbard catch. The undercut groove, I, receives the stud on the upper band when the bayonet is fixed, the bayonet being held in place by the bayonet catch pro- jecting through the hole, K. The Bayonet Guard, Fig. 70, rear view, has the barrel hole, A; the mortise, B, for the blade; the cut, C, for the scabbard catch and scabbard hook ; and the clear- ance cut, D, for the scabbard hook. There are also two holes for the bayonet guard rivets not shown in cut, by means of which the guard is riveted to the blade. The Bayonet Catch, Fig. 71, side view, has the point, A; the hole, B, which is a clearance for the bayonet grip screw; and the hook, C, which, projecting from the hole, K, in the pommel, engages the stud on the upper band and retains the bayonet in its place on the rifle. The Bayonet Scabbard Catch, Fig. 72, side view, has the thumb piece. A; the hook, B, which retains the bayonet in the scabbard by engaging the scabbard hook ; and the hole, C, which recei^ es the point of the bayonet catch. Fig. 70. Fier. 73. Fisr. 74. 'The Bayonet Scabbard, Fig. '^■t^, side view, Fig. 74, edge view, and Fig. 75, cross section of upper end, has the wooden body, A, made in two pieces and ghied together; the rawhide cover, B, which increases the strength of the scab- bard ; the leather cover, C ; the mouth- piece, D, riveted to the body by the rivets, E E; the mouthpiece hooks, F F, either of which by its engagement with the hook of the scabbard catch on the bayonet re- tains the bayonet in its place in the scab- bard ; the scabbard hook, G, attached to the body by the hook rivet, H, which passes through the inside and outside zvashers, I and K, and the stop washer, L; the fastener, M, and the drain eyelet, N. An offset on the lower end of the hook, traveling in its recess in the stop washer, limits the oscillation of the hook to 50 degrees on each side of the vertical. Note. — The cavalry is equipped with the U. S. Magazine Rifle, Model of 1903,. but without the bayonet or bayonet scab- bard. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 337 THE RIFLE APPENDAGES AND ACCESSORIES. The Oiler and Thong Case, Fig. 76, is carried in the butt of the stock. It consists of a nickel-plated brass tube, about 6 inches long and ^ inch in diameter, divided transversely, near the center, by a partition, Fig. 1^. B^ F A' with both ends fitted with screw caps. In one section is carried a small supply of sperm oil, and in the other the thong and brush used for cleaning the bore of the rifle. The cap on the oil section is fitted with a wire, flattening at its point, which reaches to the bottom of the section and is used for applying oil, a drop or more at a time. The oil is only for the Fig. 77. B |— T] G IfiBdUU D / H lubrication of working parts. The cap is also provided with a leather washer to prevent leakage. The cap on the thong section has a leather pad on its outer surface, which prevents the noise that would result from Fig. 78 the oiler striking the butt plate cap. The oiler should always be inserted in the stock so that the leather-tipped cap will be next to the butt plate cap. The parts as shown in cut are: Oiler, A; thong case, B; oiler cap, 338 CHAPTER XVIIL C; collar, D, into which the cap is screwed; washer, E; dropper, F, and thong case cap, G. The Thong and Brush are shown in Fig. yy. The thong tip. A, into which the brush, B, is screwed, is provided with a rag slot, C; the; thong is knotted in the liole, D, in the tip, and also in the hole, E, in the weight. In cleaning the bore by means of the thong, the brush or rag should always be drawn from the muzzle toward the breech. The Cleaning Rod, Fig. 78, is made of brass rod, 0.25 inch in diameter, and of sufficient length to extend through the barrel. It has the handle. A; the knob, B; the steel collar, C, riveted to the rod, and the brass sleeve, D, pinned to the rod. The handle swivels on the rod be- tween the collar and the sleeve. The Front Sight Cover, Fig. 79, right side view, and Fig. 80, front view, is made of sheet steel. Fig. 79. Fig. 80. The Screw-driver, Fig. 81, has the large blade, A ; the small blade, B ; the spur, C, and the pin, D. The large blade should be used for the large butt plate USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 339 THE RIFLE screw, the butt plate cap screw, and the guard screws; the small blade for all other screws, except the cut-ofif spindle screw, for which the spur should be used. The pin serves as a drift in removing the butt plate cap, ejector, floor plate catch, sear joint and trigger pins, and the band spring. THE ASSEMBLED PARTS AND THEIR OPERATIONS Most of the operating parts may be included under the Bolt Mechanism and Magazine Mechanism. The Bolt Mechanism consists of the bolt, sleeve, sleeve lock, extractor, extractor collar, cocking piece, safety lock, firing pin, firing pin sleeve, striker, and mainspring. It is shown, assembled, in Fig. 82. The parts shown in the cut are handle, A ; sleeve, B ; safety lock, C ; cocking piece, D; safety hig, E; extractor, F; extractor collar, G; locking lugs, H ; extractor tongue groove, I, and gas escape hole, J. The bolt moves backward and forward and rotates in the well of the receiver ; it carries a cartridge, either from the magazine, or one placed by hand in front of it, into the chamber and supports its head when fired. The sleeve unites the parts of the bolt mechanism, and its rotation with the bolt is prevented b}^ the lugs on its sides coming in contact with the receiver. The hook of the extractor engages in the groove of the cartridge case and retains the head of the latter in the countersink of the bolt until the case is ejected. The safety lock, when turned to the left, is inoperative ; when turned to the right — zvhich can only be done when the piece is cocked — the point of the spindle enters its notch in the bolt and locks the bolt; at the same time its cam forces the cocking piece slightly to the rear, out of contact with the sear, and locks the firing pin. The bolt mechanism operates as follows : To open the bolt, raise the handle until it comes in contact with the left side of the receiver and pull directly to the rear until the top locking lug strikes the cut-off. Raising the handle rotates the bolt and separates the locking lugs from their locking shoulders in the receiver, with which they have been brought into close contact by the powder pressure. This rotation causes the cocking cam of the bolt to force the firing pin to the rear, drawing the point of the striker into the bolt, rotation of the firing pin being prevented by the lug on the cocking piece projecting, through the slot in the sleeve, into its groove in the receiver. As the sleeve remains longitudinally stationary with reference to the bolt, this rearward motion 340 CHAPTER XVIIL Fig. 82 of the firing pin, and consequently of the striker, will start the compression of the mainspring, since the rear end of the latter bears against the front of the latter bears against the front end of the barrel of the sleeve and its front end against the rear end of the firing pin sleeve. When the bolt handle strikes the receiver, the locking lugs have been disengaged, the firing pin has been forced to the rear until the sear notch of the cocking piece has passed the sear nose, the cocking piece nose has entered the cock notch in the rear end of the bolt, the sleeve lock has engaged its notch in the bolt, and the main- spring has been almost entirely com- pressed. During the rotation of the bolt a rear motion has been imparted to it b}'- its extracting cam coming in con- tact with the extracting cam of the receiver, so that the cartridge case will be started from the chamber. The bolt is then drawn directly to the rear, the parts being retained in position by the cocking piece nose remaining in the cock notch and locked by the sleeve lock engaging its notch in the bolt. To close the bolt, push the handle forward until the extracting cam on the bolt bears against the extracting cam on the receiver, thereby unlocking the sleeve from the bolt, and turn the handle down. As the handle is turned down the cams of the locking lugs bear against the locking shoulders in the receiver, and the bolt is forced Fig. 83 Fig. 84 342 CHAPTER XVIII. slightly forward into its closed position. As all movement of the firing pin is prevented by the sear nose engaging the sear notch of the cocking piece, this forward movement of the bolt completes the compression of the mainspring, seats the cartridge in the chamber, and, in single loading, forces the hook of the extractor into the groove of the cartridge case. In loading from the magazine the hook of the extractor, rounded at its lower edge, engages in the groove of the top cartridge as it rises from the magazine under the action of the follower and magazine spring. The position then occupied by the parts is shown in Fig. 83 and Fig. 84, and the piece is ready to fire. To pull the trigger, the finger piece must be drawn to the rear until contact with the receiver is transferred -from its bearing to the heel, which gives a creep to the trigger, and then until the sear nose is with- drawn from in front of the cocking piece. Just before the bolt is drawn fully to the rear, the top locking lug strikes the heel of the ejector, throwing its point suddenly to the right in the lug slot. As the bolt moves fully to the rear, the rear face of the cartridge case strikes against the ejector point and the case is ejected, slightly upward and to the right, from the receiver. Double loading from the magazine is prevented by the extractor en- gaging the cartridge case as soon is it rises from the magazine and hold- ing its head against the face of the bolt until ejected. It will be noted that in this system of bolt mechanism the compres- sion of the mainspring, the seating of the cartridge m and the starting of the empty case from the chamber are entirely cone by the action of cams. The piece may be cocked either by raising the bolt handle until it strikes the left side of the receiver and then immediately turning it down or by pulling the cocking piece directly to the rear. In firing, unless the bolt handle is turned fully down the cam on the cocking piece will strike the cocking cam on the bolt, and the en.ergy of the mainspring will be expended in closing the bolt, instead of on the primer; this prevents the possibility of a cartridge being fired until the bolt is fully closed. The opening and closing of the bolt should each be done bv one continuous motion. Fig. 85 G— USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 343 THE RIFLE ---G The Magazine Mechanism includes the floor plate, follower, maga- zine spring, and cnt-off. Fig. 85 represents a cross section through the ejector with the magazine loaded. The parts shown are receiver, A ; holt, B ; firing pin, C; ejector, D; clip slots, E; bolt locking lug channels, F; magazine, G; follower, H; magazine spring, I; and floor plate, ]. Fig. 86 shows a cross section through the magazine with the maga- zine empty, and with cut-off "on," shown in projection. The parts are receiver, A ; bolt, B ; firing pin, C ; cut-off, D ; rear lug slot, E; bolt locking lug channels, F; magazine, G; follower, H ; magazine spring, I ; and floor plate, J. To charge the magazine, see that the cut-off is turned up showing "on," draw the bolt fully to the rear, insert the cartridge from a clip, or from the hand, and close the bolt. To charge the magazine from a clip, place either end of a loaded clip in its seat in the receiver and, with the thumb of the right hand, press the cartridges down into the maga- zine until the top cartridge is caught by the right edge of the receiver. The manner in which the cartridges arrange themselves in the magazine and the position of the follower and compressed magazine spring are shown in Fig. 85. The cartridge ramp guides the bullet and cartridge case into the chamber. The magazine can be filled, if partly filled, by inserting cartridges one by one. Pushing the bolt forward, after charging the magazine, ejects the clip. When the cut-off is turned down, the magazine is "off." The bolt can not be drawn fully back, and its front end projecting over the rear end of the upper cartridge holds it dowui in the magazine below the action of the bolt. The magazine mechanism then remains inoperative, and the arm can be used as a single-loader, the cartridges in the magazine being held in reserve. The arm can readily be used as a single-loader with the magazine empty. When the cut-off is turned up, the magazine is "on ;" the bolt can be drawn fully to the rear, permitting the top cartridge to rise high enough to be caught by the bolt in its forward movement. As the bolt is closed this cartridge is pushed forward into the chamber, being held up during 344 CHAPTER XVIII. its passage by the pressure of those below. The last one in the magazine is held up by the follower, the rib on which directs it into the chamber. In magazine fire, after the last cartridge has been fired and the bolt drawn fully to the rear, the follower rises and holds the bolt open to show that the magazine is empty. PRECAUTIONS If it is desired to carrj^ the piece cocked, with a cartridge in the chamber, the bolt mechanism should be secured by turning the safety lock to the right. Under no circumstances should the firing pin be let down by hand on a cartridge in the chamber. To obtain positive ejection, and to insure the bolt catching the top cartridge in magazine, when loading from the magazine, the bolt must be drawn fully to the rear in opening it. When the bolt is closed, or slightl}^ forward, the cut-off may be turned up or down, as desired. When the bolt is in its rearmost posi- tion, to pass from loading from the magazine to single loading it is necessary to force the top cartridge or followed below the reach of the bolt, to push the bolt slightly forward and to turn the cut-off down, showing "off." In case of a misfire it is unsafe to draw back the bolt immediately, as it may be a case of hang-fire. In such cases the piece should be cocked by drawing back the cocking piece. It is essential for tJie proper working and preservation of all cams that they be kept lubricated. DISMOUNTING AND ASSEMBLING BY SOLDIER The bolt and magazine mechanism can be disuKJunted without re- moving the stock. The latter should never be done, except for making repairs, and then only by some selected and instructed man. Fig. 87. USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 345 THE RIFLE To Dismount Bolt Mechanism Place the cut-oft at the center notch ; cock the arm and turn the safety lock to a vertical position, raise the bolt handle and draw out the bolt (Fig. 87.) Hold bolt in left hand, press sleeve lock in with thumb of right hand to- unlock sleeve from bolt, and unscrew sleeve by turning to the left (Fig. 88.) Fis-. 88. Hold sleeve between forefirger and thumb of the left hand, draw cocking piece back with middle finger and thumb of right hand, turn safety lock down to the left with the forefinger of the right hand, in order to allow the cocking piece to move forward in sleeve, thus par- tially relieving the tension of mainspring; with the cocking piece against the breast, draw back the firing pin sleeve with the forefinger and thumb of right hand and hold it in this position (Fig. 89) while removing the striker with the left hand; remove firing pin sleeve and mainspring; pull firing pin out of sleeve; turn tlie extractor to the right, forcing its tongue out of its, groove in the front of the l)olt, and force the extractor for- ward (Fig. 90) and ofi" the bolt. .Ur CHAPTER XVIII. Fig. 89. COCKING PIECE. STEIKER, To Assemble Bolt Mechanism Grasp with the left hand the rear of the boh, handle up, and turn the extractor collar with the thumb and forefinger of the right hand until its lug is on a line with the safety lug on the bolt ; take the Fig. 90. TONGUE.-^ GROOVE.— BOLT extractor in the right hand and insert the lug on the collar in the under- cuts in the extractor by pushing the extractor to the renr until its tongue comes in contact with the rim on the face of he bolt (a slight pressure USE, DESCRIPTION AND MANAGEMENT OF 347 THE RIFLE with the left thumb on the top of the rear part of the extractor assists in this operation;) turn the extractor to the right until it is over the right lug; take the bolt in the right hand and press the hook of the extractor against the butt plate (Fig. 91) or some rigid object, until the tongue on the extractor enters its groove in the bolt. Fig. 91. TONODE.— \— .^ GROOVE EXTEACTOE COLLAR. SAFETY LUG With the safety lock turned down to the left to permit the firing pin to enter the sleeve as far as possible, assemble the sleeve and firing pin; place the cocking piece against the breast and put on mainspring firing pin sleeve, and striker (see Fig. 91.) Hold the cocking pin be- tween the thumb and forefinger of the left hand, and by pressing the striker point against some substance, not hard enough to injure it, force the cocking piece back until the safety lock can be turned to the ver- tical position with the right hand ; insert the firing pin in the bolt and screw up the sleeve (by turning it to the right) until the sleeve lock enters its notch on the bolt. See that the cut-ofi-' is at the center notch ; hold the piece under floor plate in the fingers of the left hand, the thumb extending over the left side of the receiver; take bolt in right hand with safety lock in a ver- tical position and safety lug up ; press rear end of follower down with left thumb and push bolt into the receiver ; lower bolt handle ; turn safety lock and cut-off down to the left with right hand. To Dismount ]\Iagazine Mechanism With the bullet end of a cartridge press on the floor plate catch 348 CHAPTER XVIII. (through the hole in the floor plate), at the same time drawing the bullet to the rear; this releases the floor plate. Raise the rear end of the first limb of the magazine spring high enough to clear the lug on the floor plate and draw it out of its mortise; proceed in the same manner to remove the follower. To assemble magazine spring and follower to floor plate, reverse operation of dismounting. Insert the follower and magazine spring in the magazine, place the tenon on the front end of the floor plate in its recess in the magazine, then place the lug on the rear end of the floor plate in its slot in the guard, and press the rear end of the floor plate forward and inward at the same time, forcing the floor plate into its seat in the guard. MILITARY MAP READING. 349 CHAPTER XIX. MILITARY MAP READING^i) A Map is a representation on paper of a certain portion of the earth's surface. A Military Map is one which shows the relative distances, direc- tions and elevations of all features of military importance on the ground represented. Map Reading. By Map Reading is meant the ability to get a clear idea of the ground represented by the map, with the same ease one reads a book or news- paper. This means to grasp at once the distance on the ground corres- ponding to a given distance on the map, to get a correct idea of the net- work of streams and roads, heights, slopes, depressions, and all forms of military cover and obstacles. The first thing necessary in map reading, therefore, is to have a thorough knowledge of the scales of maps. Scales of Maps. A map is drawn to scale, that is, each unit of distance on the map must bear a fixed proportion to the corresponding distance on the ground. If one inch on the map, for instance, equals one mile (63360 inches) on 63360 ^^^^^ . , the ground, then I inch equals i of a mile, or — — = 21120 mches on o the ground, etc. The term "distance" in this book is taken to mean hori- zontal distance; vertical distance is called elevation or depression, de- pending on whether the point spoken of is higher or lower than another. For example, (see map in back of book) the distance from French- man's {oc') in a straight line to McGuire {qh') is 2075 yards, but to walk this distance would require the ascent and descent of Sentinel Hill, so that the actual length of travel would be considerably greater than the horizontal distance between the two points. In speaking of distance be- tween towns, boundaries, etc., horizontal distance is always meant. The (1) This chapter and chapter XX are based on the corresponding chapters in Military Map Reading and Sketching/' by Capt. C. O. Sherrill, Corps of Engi- neers, Instructor, Army Service Schools, Fort Leavenworth, Kans. The text and illustrations have been modified so as to meet the special requirements of noncom- missioned officers. 350 . CHAPTER XIX. fixed relation between map distances and corresponding ground distances must be constantly kept in mind. Methods of Representing Scales. There are three ways in which the scale of the map may be rep- resented : 1st. By an expression in words and figures; as 3 inches := 1 mile; 1 inch = 200 feet. 2d. By what is called the Representative Fraction (abbreviated R. F.), which is a fraction whose numerator represents units of distance on the map and whose denominator, units of distance on the ground, as 1 inch (on map) . . 1 R. F. = which IS equivalent to R. F. = . since 1 mile (on ground) 63360 1 1 mile = 63360 inches. So the expression, "R. F. ," on a map mere- 63360 ly means that 1 inch on the map represents 63360 inches (or 1 mile) on the ground. This fraction is usually written with a numerator i, as above, no definite unit of inches or miles being specified in either the numerator or denominator. In this case the expression means that one unit of distance on the map equals as many of the same units on the ground as are in the denominator. Thus, means that 1 inch on the map := 63360 inches on tlK 63360 ground ; 1 foot on the map == 63350 feet on the ground ; 1 yard on the map = 63360 yards on the ground, etc. 3d. By what is called a Graphical Scale, that is, a drawn scale. A graphical scale is a line drawn on the map, divided into equal parts, each part being marked not with its actual length, but zvitJi the distance which it represents on tJie ground. Thus, in Figure 2, the distance from. O to 50 represents 50 yards on the ground ; the distance from O to 100, 100 yards on the ground, etc. And if the scale were applied to a road running from A to B (Figure 3), it would show that the length of the road is 675 yards. 100 !;0 100 200 300 400 500 600 yards Figure 2. MILITARY MAP READING. 331 It will readily be seen that a map scale must be known by the stu- dent in order that he may have a correct idea of the distances between objects represented on the map. This is necessary in determining lengths of march, ranges of small arms and artillery, relative lengths of roads to a given point, etc. Therefore, if under service conditions one should have only a map without a scale, or one with only an R. F. on it, he would first of all ])e compelled to construct a graphical scale to read yards, miles, etc., or one showing how many miles one inch represents. ^,L_ ML I I I I I 1 h- 1 1 1 1 |Oo 50 O 100 200 3oO ^WO SOO 6ooya^Clft Figure 3. Construction of Scales. The following are the most usual problems that arise : / Having given the R. F. on a map, to find how many miles on the ground are represented by 1 inch on the map. Let us suppose that L the R. F. is 21120 Solution. Now, as previously explained, simplv means that 1 inch on the ^ 21120 map represents 21120 inches on the ground. There are 63360 inches in 1 mile. 21120 goes into 63360 three times — that is to say, 21120 is i of 63360, and we, therefore, see from this that 1 inch on the map represents ^ of a mile on the ground, and consequently it would take three inches on the map to represent 1 whole mile on the ground. So, we have this general rule: To find out how many miles i inch on the map represents on the ground, divide tJie denominator of the R. F. by 63360. 2 Having given R. F. to construct a graphical scale to read yards. 1 Assume R. F. . There are 36 inches in 1 3'ard, and since 1 inch on 21120 the map represents 21120 inches on the ground, it must represent 21120 , = 586.66 yards, on the ground. 36 Now, suppose about a 6-inch scale is desired. Since 1 inch on the map := 586.66 yards on the ground, 6 inches (map) = 586.66 x 6 = 3519.96 yards (ground). In order to get as nearly a 6-inch scale as pos- 352 CHAPTER XIX. sible to represent even hundreds of yards, let us assume 3500 yards to be the total number to be represented by the scale. The question then re- solves itself into this : How many inches on the map are necessary to represent 3500 yards on the ground. Since, as we have seen, 1 inch (map) = 586.66 yards (ground), as many inches are necessary to show 3500 , ^ . , 3500 yards as 586.66 is contained mto 3500; or, -— — = 5.96 mches. 586.66 ^ " / "f ' , f * T '--^JM Tbo T^coo ^ 7^ -^ ^ / / / — c ^ _^ • / ^ ---^ / / / ' \^i:.t^.^ ^ j^^^ ^^^^ jl Figure 4. Now, lay off with a scale of equal parts, the distance A — I (Figure 4) = 5.96 inches (about 5 and 9\ tenths), and divide it into 7 equal parts by the construction shown in figure, as follows : Draw a line A — H, making any convenient angle with A — I, and lay off 7 equal convenient lengths (A — B, B — C, C — D, etc.), so as to bring H about opposite to I. Join H and I and draw the intermediate lines through B, C, etc., parallel to H — I. These lines divide A — I into 7 equal parts, each 500 yards long. The left part, called the Extension, is similarly divided into 5 equal parts, each representing 100 yards. S The next problem which might arise is where the map has no scale at all. In this case, measure the distance between any two definite points on the ground represented, by pacing or otherwise, and scale oh the corresponding map distance. Then see how the distance thus meas- ured corresponds with the distance on the map between the two points. For example, let us suppose that the distance on the ground between two given points is 1 mile and that the distance between the corresponding points on the map, is f inch. We would, therefore, see that f inch on the map = 1 mile on the ground. Hence \ inch would represent J of a mile, and 4-4, or 1 inch, would represent 4 x J =4-3 = 1] miles. The R. F. is found as follows : _ 1 inch=: 1 inch =: 1 ' ■ U mile 63360 X U inches 84480 MILITARY MAP READING. 353 From this a scale of yards is constructed as above (2). 4 There remains one more problem, which occurs when there is a scale on the map in words and figures, but it is expressed in unfamiliar units, such as the meter {-.= 39.37 inches), strides of a man or horse, rate of travel of column, etc. If a noncommissioned officer should come into possession of such a map, it would be impossible for him to have a cor- rect idea of the distances on the map. If the scale were in inches to miles or yards, he could estimate the distance between any two points on the map to be so many inches and at once know the corresponding dis- tance on the ground in miles or yards. But suppose the scale found on the map to be one inch = 100 strides (ground), then estimates could not be intelligently made by one unfamiliar with the length of the stride used. How^ever, suppose the stride was 60 inches long; we would then have this : Since 1 stride =: 60 inches, 100 strides = 6000 inches. But accord- ing to our supposition, 1 inch on the map = 100 strides on the ground ; hence 1 inch on the map = 6000 inches on the ground, and we have 1 inch (map) 1 as our R. F., = . A graphical scale can now 6000 inches (ground) 6000 be constructed as in (2). Problems in Scales The following problems should be solved to become familiar with the construction of scales. Problem No. 1. The R. F. of a map is . Required: 1000 I The distance in miles shown by one inch on the map ; 2 Con- struct a graphical scale of yards ;• also one to read miles. Problem No. 2. A map has a graphical scale on which 1.5 inches reads 500 strides, i What is the R. F. of the map? 2 How many miles are represented by 1 inch? Problem No. 3. The Leavenworth map furnished herewith has a graphical scale on a measured distance of 1.25 inches reads 1100 yards. Required : / The R. F. of the map ; 2 Number of miles shown by 1 inch on the map. Problem No. 4. i Construct a scale to read yards for a map of R. F. = . 2 How many inches represent one mile? 21120 Scaling Distances from a Map. Having determined the meaning of scales and the method of con- 354 CHAPTER XIX. structing scales, it is well to mention the use of scales in taking distances from the maps. 1st. Apply a piece of straight edged paper to the distance between any two points, A and B, for instance, and mark the distance on the paper. Now, apply the paper to the graphical scale. Figure 3, and read the number of yards on the main scale and add the number indicated on the extension; for example: 600 -|- 75 =:^ 675 yards. 2nd. By taking the distance off with a pair of dividers and applyiiTg the dividers thus set to the graphical scale, the distance is read. 3rd. By use of an instrument called a Map Measurer, Figure 5. Setting the hand on the face to read zero, roll the small wheel over the distance ; now roll the wheel in an opposite direction along the graphical scale, noting the number of yards passed over. Or, having rolled over the distance, note the number of inches on the dial and multiply this by the number of miles or other units per inch. A map measurer is val- uable for use in solving map problems in patrolling, advance guard, out- post, etc. Figure 5. 4th. Apply a scale of inches to the line to be measured, and multiply this distance by the number of miles per inch shown by the map. Having learned how to take off distances on the map, the next step in Map Reading is to determine difference of elevation. Method of Representing Differences of Elevation Since maps are representations on paper of ground which has size not only in a horizontal (level) but in a vertical (up and down) direction, it is necessary to have some means of rapidly determining elevations This is accomplished in one of three ways : MILITARY MAP READING. 355 1st. By means of Contours. A contour-line is the line in which a horizontal (level) plane cuts the surface of the ground. It may also be said that a contour-line is a line that joins points on the surface of the Earth, which are the same height — that is which are in the same level plane. The projection of a contour-line on a horizontal surface (a map) is called a contour. Elevations and depressions may, therefore, be rep- resented on maps by imagining the surface of the ground being cut by a number of horizontal planes that are the same distance apart, and then projecting (or shooting) on a horizontal plane the lines so cut on the Earth's surface. An excellent idea ^>i what is meant by contours and contour-lines caii be gotten from Figure- 6 and 6'. Let us suppose that formerly the 356 CHAPTER XIX. island represented in Figure 6 was entirely under water and that by a sudden disturbance the water of the lake fell until the island stood 20 feet above the water, and that later several other sudden falls of the water, 20 feet each time, occurred, until now the island stands 100 feet out of the lake, and at each of the 20 feet elevations a distinct v/ater line is left. . These water lines are perfect contour-lines measured from the surface of the lake as a reference (or datum) plane. Figure 6' shows the contour-lines in Figure 6 projected, or shot down, on a hori- zontal surface. It will be observed that on the gentle slopes, such as F-b (Fig. 6) the contours (20, 40), are far apart. But on the steep slopes, as R-0, the contours (20, 40, 60, 80, 100), are close together. Hence, it is seen that contours far q,part on a map indicate gentle slopes and con- tours close together, steep slopes. It is also seen that the shape of the contours gives an accurate idea of the form of the island. The contours in Fig. 6' give an exact representation not only of the general form of the island, the two peaks, O and B, the stream, M-N, the saddle, M, the water shed from F to H, and steep bluff at K, but they also give the slopes of the ground at all points. From this we see that the slopes are directly portional to the nearness of the contours — that is, the nearer the contours on a map are to one another, the steeper is the slope, and the farther the contours on a map are from one another, the gentler is the slope. A wnde space without contours, therefore, represents a level plane. MILITARY MAP READING. 357 The contours of a cone (Figure 7) are circles of different sizes, one within another, and the same distance apart, because the slope of a cone is at all points the same. The contours of a half sphere (Figure 8), are a series of circles, far apart near the center (top), and near together at the outside (bottom), showing that the slope of a hemisphere varies at all points, being flat on top and increasing in steepness toward the bottom. The contours of a concave (hollowed out) cone (Figure 9) are close together at the center (top) and far apart at the outside (bottom). The following additional points about contours should be remem- bered : (a) A Water Shed or Spur, along which rain water divides, flow^ing away from it on both sides, is indicated by the higher contours bulging out toward the lower ones, (F-H, Fig. 6'). (b) A water Course or Valley, along which rain falling on both sides of it joins in one stream, is indicated by the lower contours curving in toward the higher ones, (M-N, Fig. 6'). (c) The contours of different heights which unite and become a single lines, represents a vertical cliff. (K, Fig. 6'). (d) Two contours which cross each other represent an overhanging cliff. (e) A closed contour without another contour in it, represents either a hill top (figure cone) or a depression (figure volcano). A hill top is shown when the closed contour is higher than the contour next to it; a depression is shown when the closed contour is lower than the one next to it. Since the horizontal distance between contours on a map (called IMap Distance or M. D.), is proportional to the slope of the ground rep- resented, it is possible to calculate what the M. D. of contours for various degrees of slope of the ground is, and construct a scale of M. D. with which slopes can at once be read off from the distances, apart of any particular contours. This is based on the fact that 688 inches horizontally on a I degree slope gives a rise of one foot. S/ope of /Degree '^IMCH 668 IN. Figure 10. 358 CHAPTER XIX. Slope (degrees) Rise (feet) Horizontal Distance (inches) 1 deg. 688 2 deg. 688 — = 344 2 3 deg. 688 — = 229 3 4 deg. 688 — = 172 4 5 deg. 688 — = 138 5 To construct a s take the distance con cale of M. D. •esponding to for a map on which it is not shown, each degree of slope in inches, mul- tiply this by the contour interval (V. I. vertical interval), -in feet, and by the R. F., and then lay off these distances as shown. Figure 11. L Vz* 1 1 '• I »• I '>• I " 1*-P-P1 M.D. Figure 11. Thus, let us suppose that the scale of M. D. for the map in pocket at back of book is not known, and that it is desired to construct one. Then since the map is drawn on the scale of 4 inches = i mile, the R. F. = 4 1 = . The V. I. of the map is 10 feet. So we have, 63360 15840 The V. I. of the map is 10 feet. So, we would have, R F.. X V. I. (ft.) X 688 (inches) M. D. (inches) = Hence, M. D. = S (degrees— 1°, 2°, etc.) 10 X 688 6880 1 X .44 inch. 15840 '~ 1 15840 And in the case of 2°, 3°, etc., we would have 6880 M. D. for 2° = M. D. for 3° = 15840 X 2 6880 15840 X 3 = .22 inch ; ^ .15 inch, etc. MILITARY MAP READING. 359 Slopes are usually given in one of three ways: 1st, in degrees; 2nd, in percentages; 3rd, in gradients (grades). 1st. A one degree slope means that the angle between the hori- zontal and the given line is i degree (i°). See Figure lo, page 357. 2d. A slope is said to be i, 2, 3, etc. per cent, when 100 units hori- zontally correspond to a rise of 1, 2, 3, etc. units vertically. /Per Ceni S/ope foofi. \fft. 2 Per Ceni Slope iOOft. -^ifi. PerCentH^^ /00/t Figure 12. 3d. A slope is said to be one on one i—\ , two on three, [-^\ etc., when one unit horizontal corresponds to 1 vertical ; three horizontal cor- respond to two vertical, etc. The numerator usually refers to the ver- tical distance, and the denomination to the horizontal distance. Figure 13. Degrees of slope are usually used in military matters ; percentages are often used for roads, almost always of railroads ; gradients are used of steep slopes, and usually of dimensions of trenches. 360 CHAPTER XIX. EFFECT OF SLOPE ON MOVEMENTS. 60 degrees or | inaccessible for InianUy; 45 degrees or j difficult for Infantry; 30 degrees or |- inaccessible for Cavalry; 15 degrees or ^ inaccessible for Artillery; 5 degrees or /g accessible for wagons. The Normal System of scales prescribed for U. S. Army field sketches is as follows : For road sketches, 3 inches = 1 mile, Vertical Interval between contours (V. I.) = 20 ft.; for position sketches, 6 inches = 1 mile, V. I. := 10 ft. ; for fortification sketches, 12 inches =: 1 mile, V. I. = 5 ft. On this system any given length of M. D. corresponds to the same slope on each of the scales. For instance, .15 inch between con- tours represents a 5° slope on the 3-inch, 6-inch and 12-inch maps of the Normal System'. Figure ii, page 358, gives the normal scale of M. D's for slopes up to F degrees. A scale of M. D's is usually printed on the margin of maps, near the geographical scale. Directions on Maps. Having given the means used for determining horizontal distances and relative elevations represented on a map, the next step is the determin- ation of horizontal directions. When these three facts (distance, height and direction) are known of any point with respect to any other point, its position is then fully determined. For instance (see map in pocket at back of book, Pope Hill {sm') is 800 yards from Grant Hill {urn'), (using grahpical scale), and it is 30 feet higher than Grant Hill, since it is on contour 870 and Grant Hill is on contour 840; Pope Hill is also due north of Grant Hill, that is, the north and south line through Grant Hill passes through Pope Hill. Therefore, the position of Pope Hill is fully determined with respect to Grant Hill. The direction line from which other directions are measured is usually the true north and south line (known as the True Meridian) or the plane of the magnetic needle, called the Magnetic Meridian. These two lines do not usually have the same positions, because at all points of the Earth's surface the true meridian is the straight line joining the ob- server's position and the North Pole of the Earth, whereas the direction of the magnetic needle varies at different points of the Earth, at some places pointing east of and at others west of, the True Pole. At the pres- MILITARY MAP READING. 361 ent time the angle which the magnetic needle (called Magnetic Declination) makes with the True Meridian, is at Fort Leavenworth, 8° 23' east of north. Figure 14. It is important to know this relation because maps usually show the True Meridian and an observer is generally supplied with a magnetic compass. Figure 14 shows the usual type of Box Compass. It has 4 cardinal points, N, E, S and W marked, as well as a circle graduated in degrees from zero to 360°, clockwise around the circle. To read the magnetic angle (called magnetic azimuth) of any point, from the ob- servers position, the north point of the compass circle is pointed toward the object and the angle indicated by the north end of the needle is read. Orientation. In order that directions on the map and on the ground shall cor- respond, it is necessary for the map to be oriented, that is, the true meridian of the map must lie in the same direction as the true meridian through the observer's position on the ground, which is only another way of saying that the lines that run north and south on the map must run in the same direction as the lines north and south on the ground. Every road, stream or other feature on the map will then run in the same direction as the road, stream or other feature itself on the ground, and all the objects shown on the map can be quickly identified and picked out on the ground. 362 CHAPTER XIX. Methods of Orientating a Map. isf. By magnetic needle : If the map has a magnetic meridian marked on it as is on the Leavenworth map (in pocket at back of book), place the sighting line, a-b, of the compass (Fig. 14) on the magnetic meridian of the map and move the map around horizontally until the north end of the needle points toward the north of its circle, whereupon the map is oriented. If there is a true meridian on the map but not a magnetic meridian one may be constructed as follows, if the mabnetic declination is known. /*fcip ^rue jVorih ^^ tru6 South Figure 15. (Fig. 15) : Place the true meridian of the map directly under the magnetic needle of the compass and then move the compass box until the needls reads an angle equal to the magnetic declination. A line in extension of the sighting line a'-b' will be the magnetic meridian. If the magnetic declination of the observer's position is not more than 4° or 5°, the orientation will be given closely enough for ordinary purposes by taking the true and magnetic meridians to be identical. 2d. If neither the magnetic nor the true meridian is on the map, MILITARY MAP READING. 363 but the observer's position on the ground is known : Move the map hori- zontally until the direction of some definite point on the ground is the same as its direction on the map ; the map is then oriented. For exam- ple, suppose you are standing on the ground at 8 (Fort Leavenworth Map), and can see the U. S. Penitentiary off to the South. Hold the map in front of you and face toward the U. S. Penitentiar}', bringing the line joining 8 and the U. S. Penitentiary (on the ground). The map is now oriented. FTaving learned to orient a map and to locate his position on the map, the noncommissioned officer should then practice moving over the ground and at the same time keeping his map oriented and noting each ground feature on the map as it is passed. This practice is of the greatest value in learning to read a may accurately and to estimate distances, directions and slopes correctly. True Meridian. The position of the true meridian may be found as follows (Fig. 16) : point the hour hand of a watch toward the sun ; the line joining the pivot and the point midway between the hour hand and XII on the dial, will point toward the south, that is to say, if the observer stands so as to face the sun and the XII on the dial, he will be looking south. To point the hour hand exactly at the sun, stick a pin as at (a) Fig. i6 and bring the hour hand into the shadow. At night, a line drawn toward the north star from the observer's position is approximately a true meridian. SOUTH Figure 16. 364 CHAPTER XIX. The line joining the pointers of the Great Bear or Dipper, prolonged about six times its length passes nearly through the North Star, which can he recognized by its brilliancy. North vStar * ^ * Bipper Figure 17 * Conventional Signs. Rivers, lakes, mountains, forests, roads, houses, telegraph lines, etc., are represented on maps by symbols called Conventional Signs, in which an effort is made to imitate the general appearance of the objects as seen from a high point directly overhead. On account of this similarity of the object to its sign or symbol on the map, the noncommissioned offi- cer will usually have no trouble in deciding at once the meaning of a new symbol. Plate No. i8 on the following page gives Conventional Signs used on military maps, and they should be thoroughly learned so that their meaning will be known at a glance. There is a constant tendency to simplify the Conventional Signs, and very often simply the outline of an object, such as a forest, culti- vated ground, etc., is indicated with the name of the object printed within the outline. Thus : [llj^Uy-ttA^\ Fir.uRE 19. Trees Streams Isolated o o o O o o o Palms *' ' Banana oo ooooooo ooo o o ocooooooooocO o OTChctTCl -> ^ c ooooooocooooo o oooooooeooooo o ooooooooooooo o ;^ * ,^ ^' • Pine Bo^f^hoo Cultivated Grass Corn f I ♦ » « • « » r « » « » » » * * Vineyard' ' I t- t * » / f t « « av/mm.f- WW T Fuller y.T 'Hide. ForeJfi/iJe [TnfordaMe Tnfarifi'V Cavcjiry Artillery Se n try Vidette IJospifal Trench Camp n 1 I r I I ; rr-T-t I I I I X , I ^ III i|i 6 A. A A A ^ice (I i:Mi ^<«ic a«-; B, © O Q ■ ■ - O G . . \," ■ O O Oo «> o ^ ° t> o ■ o s " o a 8- ; o o. o o " Coif on Z to.o. la.o o. O 6. o . o- o ■^°-c.v Q.'^>"-^.o.e^"0 flailj'oads Single Track Double TracA- THeclric Improved Uni/nprov^d Trail Church Pos I office H^alerworAs ■I I I I I I I — »— I — *— < I I I I I I I I I Roads ' Cemetarv *■ + + + "+ ¥ Fences He doe. Stone. tVorui IVire huried Pl^ir-e smooth ObstacJes Ahattis '^ 'S"^ fVi're e/j /a //o/e me/jl Palisades tttlttH DemoJifi o us Depression rS> Cliffs Ravine *?!^?^ .